90_im PDF Panasonic Voice Mail Installation Manual E

KX-TVS 90 Installation Manual 2722za KX-TVS 90 Installation Manual 2722za

KX-TVS 90 Installation Manual 2722za manual pdf -FilePursuit

KX-TVS 90 Installation Manual KX-TVS_90_Installation_Manual Panasonic KX-TVS Voicemail Systems - Telecomuserguides.com

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 410 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Please read this manual before installing, customizing, or operating the Voice Processing System.
Model No.
KX-TVS90
Voice Processing System
Installation Manual
POWER
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Voice Processing System, Model KX-TVS90.
2 Installation Manual
We are confident that it will provide your customer or client with many years of dependable
service.
This Voice Processing System was especially tailored for the American environment. For
example, it can be configured for English, a second language, or a third language:
System prompts—Recorded at the factory in English
User 1 prompts—Record in any language you like
User 2 prompts—Recorded at the factory in Spanish
These prompts guide subscribers and non-subscribers through specific VPS operations.
However, we would like to stress that for outside callers who merely need to be guided to an
extension, a mailbox, or other destinations (e.g., a fax machine), they can be greeted by a
Custom Service. This supports many languages as there are 12 keys on a touchtone phone and
you can record up to 100 Custom Service menus. One twelfth of these menus can be recorded
in one language if you desire. Another twelfth can be recorded in another language, and so on.
Thus callers can be guided entirely in their native languages. For a multi-cultural United States,
Custom Service is a truly powerful feature. Please see "Custom Service" in Appendix
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES for more details.
Note
This product is only for connection behind a suitable PBX and should not be connected directly
to the network.
Panasonic World Wide Web Address: http://www.panasonic.com
for customers in the United States or Puerto Rico.
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model
KX-TVS90 Voice Processing System.
Important Information
Installation Manual 3
Important Information
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
•Follow all product warnings, cautions, and instructions.
•Handle the unit carefully. Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock.
•If the unit malfunctions, disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by
reconnecting the telephone. If the telephone operates properly, have the VPS repaired by a
qualified Panasonic Factory Service Technician.
•Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way. Do not connect this unit
to an extension cord.
•Keep the unit free of dust, moisture, condensation, high temperature exposure (more than
40 °C {104 °F}) and vibration. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight.
•Mount the unit on a stable wall surface. Do not mount the VPS inside of a separate
enclosure unless it is properly ventilated.
•Read all the information contained in this manual.
•This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting. The proper
voltage and current required for this unit are listed on the product label.
•This unit is equipped with a 3-wire grounding plug. The plug will only fit into a grounded
power outlet. Do not modify this plug in any way. If it cannot be inserted into the outlet,
have the outlet replaced by a licensed electrician.
•Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or
damaged, if the cabinet is cracked or broken, or when the unit has been exposed to moisture,
has been dropped, or is not otherwise operating properly.
•Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning.
•Do not block the vent slots and openings located on the front and top of the unit.
•Do not disassemble this product. Dangerous electrical shock could result. The unit must
only be disassembled and repaired by qualified Panasonic Factory Service Technicians.
•Do not insert wires, pins, or any other material into the unit's vent slots or access points.
This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction.
•Do not install the unit near water or moisture, heating appliances, or electrical noise
generating devices such as televisions, monitors, fluorescent lamps, or electric motors.
•Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded outlets could result in fire and/or electrical shock.
•Do not use solvents, liquid cleaners, water, or abrasive powders to clean this unit. Use only
a damp soft cloth for cleaning.
•Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of
the leak.
WARNING
TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Important Information
4 Installation Manual
When you ship the product
Carefully pack and send it prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton.
Attach a postage-paid letter, detailing the symptom, to the outside of the carton. DO NOT
send the product to the Executive or Regional Sales offices. They are NOT equipped to
make repairs.
Product service
Panasonic Factory Servicenters for this product are listed in the servicenter directory.
Consult your authorized Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the back of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
DEALER’S TEL. NO.
For your future reference
Important Information
Installation Manual 5
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY
REASONS, THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING
CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO
REGULATIONS.
Note
Before you start setting or changing system parameters, we recommend that you turn off the
Call Progression Mode with the OFLN command. While off, the power LED of the VPS will
flash and the VPS will not answer any incoming call. After you finish programming, use the
ONLN command to turn on the Call Progression Mode (normal operation). Please see
7.2.1 Off-line Set (OFLN) and 7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN) for more details.
Trademarks
•HyperTerminal is either a registered trademark or a trademark of HILGRAEVE,
INCORPORATED in the United States and/or other countries.
•IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States.
•Procomm Plus is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DATASTORM
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. in the United States and/or other countries.
•Smartcom is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer
Products, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
•All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Important Information
6 Installation Manual
F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
Notify The Telephone Company
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:ACJVM04BKX-TVS90. If requested, this number must be
provided to the telephone company.
Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer. If required, provide the
telephone company with the following technical information:
•The telephone numbers to which the system will be connected
•Make: Panasonic
•Model: KX-TVS90
•FCC Registration No.: found on the back of the unit
•Ringer Equivalence No.: 0.4B
•Facility Interface Code: 02LS2
•Service Order Code: 9.0F
•Required Network Interface Jack: RJ11C
Ringer Equivalence No. (REN)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total
RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the
REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:ACJVM04BKX-
TVS90. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN
of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
Telephone Service Problems
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice
isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities, Equipment, Operations,
and Procedures
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone
company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to
maintain uninterrupted service.
Trouble with this equipment
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please see the
attached warranty, which includes the Servicenter Directory. If the equipment is causing harm
Important Information
Installation Manual 7
to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
Connection to the Party Line
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures.
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
Any change or modification made to the terminal equipment, not expressly approved by the
manufacturer, could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Table of Contents
8 Installation Manual
Table of Contents
1 VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO............................................................ 14
1.1.1 Why Voice Processing?.............................................................................................. 14
1.1.2 Basic Operations......................................................................................................... 14
1.1.3 VPS Limitations ......................................................................................................... 15
1.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND USE.............................. 16
1.2.1 System Administration ............................................................................................... 16
1.2.2 System Management .................................................................................................. 16
1.2.3 Subscriber Use............................................................................................................ 16
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS ....................................................................................................... 17
1.3.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 17
1.3.2 System Components ................................................................................................... 17
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible?..................................................................... 19
1.3.4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements....................................................... 20
1.3.5 Specifications .............................................................................................................21
1.3.6 Hardware .................................................................................................................... 21
1.3.7 Recommendations for System Configuration ............................................................ 21
1.4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION ........................................................................................ 23
1.4.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 23
1.4.2 APT Integration .......................................................................................................... 23
1.4.3 Connection Example—APT Integration .................................................................... 23
1.4.4 DPT Integration .......................................................................................................... 24
1.4.5 Connection Example—DPT Integration .................................................................... 24
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................................... 26
2.1.1 Installation .................................................................................................................. 26
2.1.2 Wiring......................................................................................................................... 27
2.2 UNPACKING .............................................................................................................. 28
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL................................................................. 29
2.4 FRAME GROUND CONNECTION ......................................................................... 30
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS ........................................................................................... 31
2.6 CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................... 33
2.6.1 Connecting to the PBX ............................................................................................... 33
2.6.2 Opening the Ferrite Core ............................................................................................ 33
2.6.3 Connection for APT Integration................................................................................. 34
2.6.4 Connection for DPT Integration................................................................................. 34
2.6.5 Connection for Non-APT/DPT Integration................................................................ 35
2.7 TERMINAL CONNECTION..................................................................................... 36
2.7.1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal .............................................. 36
2.7.2 Connecting the RS-232C Cable.................................................................................. 36
2.7.3 RS-232C Signals ........................................................................................................ 38
3 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE
SYSTEMS
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION....................................................................... 40
Table of Contents
Installation Manual 9
3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband Signaling? ..................................................................................40
3.1.2 Why Integration is Important ......................................................................................40
3.1.3 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate ..................................................................40
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration..............................................................................41
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS ........................................................44
3.2.1 General Guidelines and Definitions ............................................................................44
3.2.2 RS-232C Settings ........................................................................................................44
3.2.3 Port Settings ................................................................................................................44
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters ...........................................................................................45
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs ................48
3.3.1 VPS Programming for Inband Integration ..................................................................48
3.3.2 KX-T123211D Software Verification and Programming for Inband Integration.......49
3.3.3 KX-TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager’s Extension....51
3.3.4 KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration .......................................................54
3.3.5 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 and KX-TD308 Programming for Inband
Integration via the Manager’s Extension ...................................................................63
3.3.6 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, and KX-TA1232 Programming for Inband Integration via
the Operating and Maintenance Tool.........................................................................64
3.3.7 KX-TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance
Tool............................................................................................................................67
4 INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA
SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION .....................................................72
4.1.1 Why Digital Integration is Important ..........................................................................72
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624 ........................74
4.2.1 KX-TA624 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the
Manager’s Extension .................................................................................................74
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION ..........................80
4.4 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232,
KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308 ....................................................................................88
4.4.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Manager’s Extension .................................................................................................88
4.4.2 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Operating and Maintenance Tool...............................................................................93
4.4.3 KX-TD308 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Manager’s Extension .................................................................................................96
4.5 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES ........ 101
4.5.1 Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming.................................................................101
4.5.2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment ..............................................................101
4.5.3 Live Call Screening Password Canceling .................................................................102
4.5.4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming .........102
4.5.5 Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming ........... 103
4.5.6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming............................................104
4.5.7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming..........................105
4.5.8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming..............105
4.5.9 Two-Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Programming........................106
4.5.10 Two-Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming.........................107
4.5.11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming.......................108
Table of Contents
10 Installation Manual
4.5.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming .............................................................. 108
4.5.13 Live Call Screening Activation .............................................................................. 110
4.5.14 Live Call Screening Password Control................................................................... 111
4.5.15 Two-Way Recording into Mailbox ........................................................................ 111
4.5.16 Two-Way Transfer into Mailbox............................................................................ 111
4.5.17 A Restriction on TWR/TWT Activation ................................................................ 111
5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
5.1 STARTING UP .......................................................................................................... 114
5.1.1 Before Programming ................................................................................................ 114
5.1.2 Quick Setup .............................................................................................................. 114
5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup........................................................................................... 115
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................... 122
5.2.1 Custom Service Setting Example ............................................................................. 122
5.2.2 Custom Service Features .......................................................................................... 123
5.2.3 Custom Service Programming.................................................................................. 124
5.2.4 Recording Menus...................................................................................................... 128
5.2.5 Checking Operation.................................................................................................. 128
5.2.6 Voice Mail ................................................................................................................ 128
5.2.7 Mailbox Groups........................................................................................................ 129
5.2.8 Extension Groups ..................................................................................................... 129
5.2.9 Interview Service...................................................................................................... 130
5.2.10 Automated Attendant.............................................................................................. 131
5.2.11 Department Dialing Service ................................................................................... 131
5.2.12 Operator Service..................................................................................................... 132
5.3 SETTING PORTS ..................................................................................................... 133
5.3.1 Port Service Menu .................................................................................................... 133
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS.................................................... 135
5.4.1 Automated Attendant Menu ..................................................................................... 135
5.4.2 Department Dialing .................................................................................................. 135
5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters .............................................................................................. 136
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES .......................................................................................... 139
5.5.1 Mailbox Setting Menu.............................................................................................. 139
5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox................................................................................................... 139
5.5.3 Deleting a Mailbox................................................................................................... 143
5.5.4 Password Reset......................................................................................................... 143
5.5.5 Mailbox Listing ........................................................................................................ 144
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER............................................................................. 145
6FINAL SETUP
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)........................................... 148
6.1.1 Accessing the Message Manager’s Mailbox ............................................................ 148
6.1.2 Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service ............................................................. 148
6.1.3 Company Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,1)................................................................... 149
6.1.4 Recording the Company Name (Enter #6*998,5,2) ................................................. 149
6.1.5 Custom Service Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,4)......................................................... 149
6.1.6 Customizing User Prompts (Enter #6*998,5,6) ....................................................... 150
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES.................................................................................... 151
6.2.1 Recording Personal Greetings .................................................................................. 151
Table of Contents
Installation Manual 11
6.2.2 Recording the Owner’s Name ...................................................................................152
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM..................................................................................153
7 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM ...............................................................................156
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS............................................................................................158
7.2.1 Off-line Set (OFLN)..................................................................................................159
7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN)..................................................................................................159
7.2.3 Set Password (PASS) ................................................................................................159
7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).......................................................................................................160
7.2.5 Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET) ...................................................................161
7.2.6 Error Log Display (ELOG) .......................................................................................162
7.2.7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE) ...........................................164
7.2.8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD) ....................................................166
7.2.9 Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN) .................................................................167
7.2.10 Program Version Display (VERS) ..........................................................................167
7.2.11 Custom Service Report (CREP)..............................................................................168
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR) ..............................................169
7.2.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL) ........................................................169
7.2.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL) ..........................................................170
7.2.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT)................................................................................170
7.2.16 Utility Command List (HELP)................................................................................171
7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET) ...............................................................................................172
7.2.18 Circuit Condition Display (LMON)........................................................................172
7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD) ................................................................172
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID) .....................................................................................174
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS..................................................................................................175
7.3.1 Mailbox Assignments................................................................................................176
7.3.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments........................................................................176
7.3.3 System Service Report ..............................................................................................178
7.3.4 Call Account Report..................................................................................................178
7.3.5 Port Usage Report .....................................................................................................179
7.3.6 Port Usage Statistics Clear ........................................................................................179
7.3.7 Flash Memory Usage Report.....................................................................................180
7.3.8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear .......................................................................181
7.3.9 Mailbox Usage Report ..............................................................................................181
7.3.10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear ...............................................................................182
7.3.11 Fax Call Report .......................................................................................................183
7.3.12 Fax Call Statistics Clear ..........................................................................................183
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ..............................................................................184
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................188
Appendix A SYSTEM FEATURES
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES ...............................................................................................190
Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION ..........................................................................................220
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES ....................................................224
Table of Contents
12 Installation Manual
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS........................................................................................................ 231
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE .............................. 241
B4.1 Port Assignment........................................................................................................ 241
B4.2 Trunk Group Assignment ......................................................................................... 243
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS..................................... 246
B5.1 Automated Attendant Parameters ............................................................................. 246
B5.2 Custom Service ......................................................................................................... 254
B5.3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters ........................................................................... 257
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS ........... 260
B6.1 System Group Assignment ....................................................................................... 260
B6.2 Time Service ............................................................................................................. 263
B6.3 Holiday Setting ......................................................................................................... 267
B6.4 Daylight Saving Time (DST).................................................................................... 269
B6.5 Prompt Setting .......................................................................................................... 270
B6.6 System Caller Name Announcement........................................................................ 272
B6.7 Other Parameters....................................................................................................... 273
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS .............................. 285
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters................................................................................................. 285
B7.2 Port Setting ............................................................................................................... 286
B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters......................................................................................... 287
Appendix C SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S MAILBOX ..................................... 296
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES.................................................................................... 297
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS ................................... 300
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK ......................................................................... 307
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING .................................................. 309
C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING SETTING ...................................... 311
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS)....................................... 313
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES..................................................................................... 315
C9 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S MAILBOX ............................... 318
C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES ........................................ 319
Appendix D MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX.................................. 322
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX ..................................... 323
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION...................................... 325
D4 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX ............................ 328
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK ......................................................................... 330
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES...................................................................................... 332
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET ................................................................. 337
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE .......................... 340
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS...................................................................... 343
Glossary ............................................................................................... 395
INDEX.................................................................................................. 407
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual 13
Section 1
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
14 Installation Manual
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1.1 Why Voice Processing?
The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls. When a call comes in, it answers, forwards to
appropriate extensions, takes and stores messages, and notifies subscribers when messages are
left. Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system. The
VPS is easy to use, helping callers through the system with step-by-step voice prompts.
Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services, VPS messages are
confidential; they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber's password.
Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy, which are commonly lacking with
written messages. The messages come directly from the caller, in the caller's own voice. To
further ensure accuracy, the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before
saving them. Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient.
1.1.2 Basic Operations
Greeting Callers:
The VPS greets callers with a prerecorded message that includes directions for leaving and
editing messages. The VPS can list single-digit numbers for each available extension or
mailbox. Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the
extension number at any time. Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a preprogrammed
destination (which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox) to leave a message.
Sending Messages:
Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailbox. Subscribers can send
messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once. The message sender can then verify
that the other subscriber has received the message.
Receiving Messages:
There are several different message notification methods that subscribers can use. They can
choose to be notified by message waiting lamp, beeper, or a call from the system to another
line. System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time a
message is left. (Subscribers can choose to receive message notifications differently depending
on the time of day.) Mailbox parameters, which accommodate 5-100 messages, determine the
maximum length of messages. If the system is connected using Digital Integration, subscribers
can press a pre-assigned button to record conversations into their own mailboxes or other
subscribers' mailboxes while talking on the phone. Digital Integration also allows subscribers
to screen messages as they are being left, or intercept them if required.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual 15
1.1.3 VPS Limitations
The VPS does not support:
UCD functions
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions;
when all extensions are unavailable, it returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy.
Calls can be forwarded by the VPS to the KX-TD1232/816/308/500 floating number of a UCD
group. The call then rings at the next available phone.
The VPS supports UCD functions with very limited capabilities. Because the incoming call
is forwarded as an intercom path and not a DIL (direct in line), the following items will not
work:
•time table
•overflow function
•DISA message from a DISA card
•IRNA
Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the VPS'
standard functions. We do not recommend these systems for integration with the VPS. The
section 1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible? explains problems with compatibility.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16 Installation Manual
1.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION,
MANAGEMENT, AND USE
1.2.1 System Administration
System Administration is accomplished by the installer using terminal emulation software. It
concerns setting and changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems.
1.2.2 System Management
Two system functions are performed by the customer: System Management and Message
Management.
System Management concerns changing system parameters through the System Manager's
Mailbox.
Message Management concerns recording voice prompts through the Message Manager's
Mailbox. These messages include Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialing
menu, Custom Service menus, voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists, user prompts,
multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names.
1.2.3 Subscriber Use
System users are called subscribers. Subscribers are assigned personal mailboxes which they
can customize. Subscribers can record their names, record personal greetings, set covering
extensions, record questions for an interview mailbox, set the message reception mode, set
incomplete call handling status, set call transfer status, enter Personal Group Distribution Lists,
set the message waiting lamp, and set notification by calling.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual 17
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
1.3.1 General
The KX-TVS90 is initially configured with 2 ports and 6 h of storage.
1.3.2 System Components
Main Cabinet
Note
EIA port is at SELV.
Inside View of the Main Cabinet
System Components
AC Inlet:
Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated to the VPS.
Power Indicator:
Indicates the system status: when flashing, the system is off-line (not ready to receive calls).
POWER
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
MODE (DIP Switch)
Port 1
Port 2
Ferrite Core
Ground Terminal
RS-232C
Connector
AC Inlet
Power Indicator
Memory Card
Master Slave
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
18 Installation Manual
MODE (DIP Switch):
By setting one of the following positions and executing power down and up, you can achieve
a desired result:
*1 For Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems with DPT Integration.
*2 For Panasonic KX-TA624 telephone system with APT Integration.
Table 1
Position Additional Function
0 Normal setting. (All switches in 0 position.)
1 Initializes RS-232C parameters.
RS-232C default parameters: 9,600, N, 8, 1
2*1Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Automated Attendant service.
3*1Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Voice Mail service.
4Reserved.
5
Initializes the VPS. Clears all voice data (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts) and returns all system parameters to the default
setting.
6 Test Mode (Flash Memory Read/Write Test)
7Reserved.
8
Initializes the VPS. Clears all voice data and returns all system
parameters to the default setting.
CAUTION: User 1 and User 2 Prompts will be erased!
9Reserved.
10*2Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Automated Attendant service.
11*2Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Voice Mail service.
12 All service prompts are set to System Prompts.
13 All service prompts are set to User 1 Prompts.
14 All service prompts are set to User 2 Prompts.
15 Reserved.
01
01
01
01
•1
•2
•3
•4
01
01
01
01
•1
•2
•3
•4
01
01
01
01
•1
•2
•3
•4
01
01
01
01
•1
•2
•3
•4
01
01
01
01
1•
2•
3•
4•
01
01
01
01
1•
2•
3•
4•
01
01
01
01
1•
2•
3•
4•
01
01
01
01
•1
•2
•3
•4
01
01
01
01
•1
•2
•3
•4
01
01
01
01
1•
2•
3•
4•
01
01
01
01
1•
2•
3•
4•
01
01
01
01
1•
2•
3•
4•
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual 19
To change the position, use a pointed object, such as a pen, etc.
Ground Terminal:
Should be connected to a ground source with less than 1 resistance.
RS-232C Connector:
Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS that is necessary to program the system.
Memory Card:
(One/system) Stores the proprietary system program, and the voice prompts (about 30 min
worth); has the capacity to record approximately 6h of messages from callers.
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible?
We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems:
•Panasonic KX-TA624
•Panasonic KX-TD308
•Panasonic KX-TD1232
•Panasonic KX-TD816
•Panasonic KX-TA1232
•Panasonic KX-TD500
•Panasonic KX-T336
•Panasonic KX-T123211D
We cannot guarantee adequate integration of the VPS with other PBX systems or with Key
Systems. If the customer does not have a recommended Panasonic PBX system, be sure that
the system has the features listed below.
The PBX should have the following features for successful integration:
•Single line (tip/ring) port circuits (Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this
connection.)
•Station to station touchtone signaling
•Message Waiting Notification from an SLT (single-line telephone)
When setting the DIP Switch to any position (except 0):
1. Disconnect the station wire(s) and wait a few minutes.
2. Disconnect the AC cord from the VPS.
3. Set the DIP Switch.
4. Connect the AC cord to the VPS.
5. Connect the station wire(s) to the VPS and wait approximately 3.5 min.
6. Return the DIP Switch to position 0.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
20 Installation Manual
•Screened transfer from an SLT
•Message Waiting Notification on proprietary (multi-line) sets (message waiting lamp
accessed by dialing on/off codes)
If the PBX does not have these features, VPS operation will be limited.
See 3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration. You will find the following information about
each feature listed:
•Description
•Limitations of the system without the feature
•Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature
VOICE MAIL
The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow-on ID and Inband Integration. When
callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail, Follow-on ID sends
callers directly to the mailbox. Without Follow-on ID, the caller would have to re-enter the
mailbox number when connected to Voice Mail.
Touchtone Integration enables the VPS to recognize the current state of the call and improve
its call handling performance. When enabled, the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) by sending a code with touchtones before sending the normal
call progress tones. For example, when a caller hangs up before making a selection, the PBX
sends # 9 to the VPS port that answered. This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up.
Upon receiving these digits, the VPS goes on-hook and is ready to handle another call.
Digital (APT/DPT) Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX-
TA624 or other Panasonic KX-T series digital PBX (depending on the software version). This
Digital Integration provides the VPS with more information than Touchtone Integration. This
information enables the system to identify the extension number of the caller, know where
from and why the call is forwarded, and recognize what the caller wants to do. Some features
are available only with Digital Integration (Remote Call Forwarding Set, Live Call Screening,
Two-Way Recording, Two-Way Transfer, Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging, Auto
Configuration, Caller Name Announcement [system/personal], Caller ID Call Routing,
Personal Greeting for Caller ID, Time Synchronization with PBX).
1.3.4 Installer Equipment and Software Requirements
The installer must have a personal computer or data terminal equipped with terminal
emulation software. We suggest that you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE.
Use the personal computer to program the VPS. Terminal emulation software enables the
keyboard to be used as a data entry device.
While both the personal computer and data terminal are working, the personal computer allows
screens to be saved in a file throughout the process. It is often helpful to retrieve these files later
if technical support is needed.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual 21
1.3.5 Specifications
1.3.6 Hardware
•2 Flash Memory Cards.
•2 Telephone Inputs (RJ11C)
•1 RS-232C Connector
•1 DIP Switch (4-bit)
1.3.7 Recommendations for System Configuration
General guideline: a ratio of 6/1 (for every 6 lines, 1 port). There are 2 questions to ask when
considering how many ports are desirable:
•Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded/transferred calls?
•If they are answering incoming calls, how busy are the lines?
The guideline above (6/1) usually works well with moderate traffic. However, this may have
to be modified for heavy traffic. Recommendations are outlined in the following charts.
Table 2
Ports: 2 ports
Voice Storage (approximate): 6 h
Custom Services: 100
Message Retention: 1 to 30 days or unlimited
Number of Mailboxes: 62 Subscriber and 2 Manager Mailboxes
Number of Messages per Mailbox: 100 maximum (programmable)
Table 3
CO Lines Port
1-6 1
7-12 2
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
22 Installation Manual
One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 CO lines. The
preceding recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy
traffic.
Table 4
CO Lines Port
1-4 1
5-8 2
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual 23
1.4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION
1.4.1 General
There are 2 types of Digital Integration: APT Integration and DPT Integration.
APT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a KX-TA624. DPT Integration is
available when the VPS is connected to a KX-TD or KX-TA1232 digital PBX.
1.4.2 APT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-TA624, the VPS ports look like proprietary telephones. The PBX thinks
that the VPS is a proprietary telephone, and the VPS mimics all actions of a proprietary
telephone. Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital integration requires
the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire connections for each port. To communicate
between the VPS and the PBX through APT Integration, the PBX and VPS must be
programmed to work together.
1.4.3 Connection Example—APT Integration
For example, you can connect jack 7 of the KX-TA624 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4-wire
connection (see diagram below). This connection creates 1 Voice Mail extension and can only
answer 1 call. This means that a fully-configured 2-port system requires 2 jacks from the PBX.
When APT Integration is activated, a single extension jack provides 1 single-line interface at
a Port on the VPS. For example, when 1 line cord (4 wire) is connected to Port 1 on the VPS,
1 extension is provided.
VPS
Port 1
Extension 107
7
8
KX-TA624
Port 2
Extension 108
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
24 Installation Manual
1.4.4 DPT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration, the VPS ports look like digital
extensions. The PBX thinks that the VPS is a digital phone, and the VPS mimics all actions of
a digital set. Another advantage of digital integration is that the 2B+D communication provides
2 VPS ports for each Digital Station port. Communication between the VPS and the PBX
through digital integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire
connections for each port. To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT
Integration, the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together.
1.4.5 Connection Example—DPT Integration
For example, you can connect jack 15 of the KX-TD1232 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4-wire
connection (see diagram below). This connection creates 2 Voice Mail extensions and can
simultaneously answer 2 calls. This means that a fully-configured 2-port system requires only
1 jack from the PBX.
When DPT Integration is activated, a single extension jack provides 2 single-line interfaces at
a Port on the VPS. For example, when 1 line cord (4 wire) is connected to Port 1 on the VPS,
2 extensions are provided.
VPS
Port 1
Extensions 165 and 166
KX-TD1232 15
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 25
Section 2
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
26 Installation Manual
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS.
2.1.1 Installation
The VPS needs to be mounted on a wall. Improper placement of the system may result in
malfunction, noise, or discoloration. Avoid installing the VPS in the following places:
•in direct sunlight; in hot, cold, or humid places
•in new areas where there are thermal springs, etc. (where sulfuric gas may damage the
equipment or contacts).
•where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
•in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit.
•near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines, elevators or electric
welders.
•on or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment; near microwave ovens or air
conditioners. (Ideally, the VPS should not be in the room with these items and should be
at least 1.8 m {6 feet} away from televisions.)
Do not obstruct the areas around the PBX and the VPS. Both require space above for cooling
and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection.
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 27
2.1.2 Wiring
•To assure good quality telephone connection, it is recommended new and modifications to
existing installation of customer premise wiring shall use solid twisted pair copper
conductors with minimum 24 gauge that comply with the electrical specifications for
Category 3 wiring as detailed in ANSI/EIA/TIA-570A Building Wiring Standards.
•Do not wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source, computer, etc. If cables
are run near those wires, shield them with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground
the shields.
•Use protectors if running cables on the floor. Avoid running cables under carpets.
•Avoid sharing a 120 V AC power supply for computers, telexes, and other office equipment
with the VPS. Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS operation.
When making any connections or removing the cover, be sure the power switch is turned off.
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
•Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
•Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
•Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
•Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Note
If you live in an area that can have frequent power failures, we strongly recommend that you
purchase a suitable UPS (uninterruptible power supply) for your VPS (and PBX if needed).
The power rating of your VPS may be found in the specifications.
INSTALLATION
28 Installation Manual
2.2 UNPACKING
Unpack the box and check the items below.
Table 5
Main Unit 1
AC Cord 1
Screws (Wall Mounting) 3
Anchor Plugs (Wall Mounting) 3
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 29
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL
The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS. If
screws other than the ones supplied are used, use the same-sized diameter screws as the
enclosed ones.
To Mount on a Wooden Wall:
1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
2. Install the 3 screws (included accessories) into the wall.
3. Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Template
Wooden
Wall
Drive the screw
to this position.
INSTALLATION
30 Installation Manual
2.4 FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
IMPORTANT!!!
Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert the grounding wire.
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the grounding wire to the ground.
In most of North America, the ground provided by the "Third wire ground" at the commercial
or residential power outlet will be satisfactory. However, in some cases this ground may be
installed incorrectly. Therefore, the following test procedure should be performed.
Test Procedure
1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a possible reading of up to 250 V AC.
2. Connect the meter probes between the 2 main AC voltage points on the wall outlet. The
reading obtained should be 108 V AC-132 V AC.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the third prong terminal (GND).
Either the same reading or a reading of 0 V should be obtained.
4. If a reading of 0 V at 1 terminal and a reading of 108 V AC-132 V AC at the other terminal
is not obtained, the outlet is not properly grounded. This condition should be corrected by
a qualified electrician (per article 250 of the National Electrical Code).
5. If a reading of 0 V at 1 terminal and a reading of 108 V AC-132 V AC at the other terminal
is obtained, then set the meter to the "OHMS/RX1" scale, place 1 probe at the GND
Terminal and the other probe at the terminal which gave a reading of 0 V. A reading of less
than 1 should be obtained. If the reading is not obtained, the outlet is not adequately
grounded. See a qualified electrician.
POWER
To ground
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 31
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS
The following is an overview of the standard installation process using Digital Integration.
When necessary, other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed
descriptions or instructions.
1. Obtain a list of current users, their extension numbers, their departments, and the type of
systems they use (mailbox, no mailbox, beeper, car phone, etc.).
2. Assess your customers' needs before setting up the system. You will save yourself time later
by giving customers what they need up front. Ask the office manager how the VPS will be
used. Give examples.
Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings. You will find
these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes down
the road.
3. Connect the power cord to the VPS.
CAUTION
The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the socket-outlet
is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
4. Standard Initialization (For Digital Integration Connection)
a) Program the ports of the PBX for voice processing (see Section 4 INTEGRATING THE
VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX).
Program the KX-TA624, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TA1232, the KX-TD816, the
KX-TD308 or KX-TD500 for Voice Mail integration.
•KX-TA624
•KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232, KX-TD308, KX-TD500
Program may be performed on-site or at the office.
All memory is stored and will be retained when the unit is powered up as long as
the DIP Switch has been reset to position [0] prior to turning the unit off.
b) Unplug the power cord of the VPS.
c) Plug station wire(s) from the PBX into VPS (see 2.6 CONNECTIONS).
d) Connect the personal computer to the VPS with a Null Modem Cable (see
2.7.2 Connecting the RS-232C Cable).
e) Set the DIP Switch to position 5.
f) Plug in the power cord of the VPS.
g) Wait until the "warning" appears on the screen.
h) Set the DIP Switch back to position 0.
INSTALLATION
32 Installation Manual
CAUTION
If the DIP Switch is not reset to position 0 after initialization, all programming will be
lost when the voice processor loses power!
5. Perform Quick Setup (see Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM).
6. Check Quick Setup:
•The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid.
•The screen output should be: [On Line].
If you do not see the "On Line" message, check the following:
•The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors.
•The programming on the KX-TA624 is correctly set in System Program [130], or
[130] and [131].
•The programming on the KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 or KX-TD308 is
correctly set in System Program [117].
•The programming on the KX-TD500 is correctly set in the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port
Assignment" screen.
7. Set up Class of Service (COS) for each user. Customize voice prompts if necessary (see
Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE).
8. Perform Administrative Program through a personal computer (see Appendix B SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE).
Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause malfunction.
To turn the power off after installing the VPS, unplug the power cord from the VPS a
few minutes after disconnecting station wire(s).
CAUTION
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 33
2.6 CONNECTIONS
2.6.1 Connecting to the PBX
The VPS can be connected to up to 2 extension ports of the PBX. Use a 4-conductor wire for
connection with KX-TA624 that uses APT Integration, and for connection with KX-T series
systems that use DPT Integration. Use a 2-conductor wire for connection to all other PBXs.
2.6.2 Opening the Ferrite Core
Insert your finger into the opening of the ferrite core and open it as shown below:
Connect a 4-conductor cable or 2-conductor cable to the VPS and run the cable through the
ferrite core (see the following sections). Close the ferrite core.
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
4-Conductor Cable
Modular Connection
Outer Pins
Inner Pins
B: BLACK
R: RED
G: GREEN
Y: YELLOW
L5
Terminal wire
RJ-11
T4
R3
H2
RJ-11
INSTALLATION
34 Installation Manual
2.6.3 Connection for APT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the VPS
2.6.4 Connection for DPT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the VPS
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
To KX-TA624
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
To Extension
Port of the PBX
PORT 2
Extension Jacks 07 and 08
(or 15 and 16)
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
To a KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
To Extension
Port of the PBX
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 2
Any Extension Jack except Jack 01
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 35
2.6.5 Connection for Non-APT/DPT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the VPS
G
RG
R
To Extension Ports of
Non-APT/DPT Integration PBX
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 1
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
To Extension
Port of the PBX
PORT 2
INSTALLATION
36 Installation Manual
2.7 TERMINAL CONNECTION
2.7.1 Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal
The programming terminal must be connected with a serial cable with an RS-232C connector
at the RS-232C port. This must be a null modem cable. This enables system administration
(system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis) to be performed.
Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory:
2.7.2 Connecting the RS-232C Cable
RECOMMENDED:
Before connecting the cable, switch off the power on both the data terminal and the VPS.
Insert the RS-232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction.
The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m {6.5 feet}.
Table 6
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Baud Rate: 9600 bps
Word Bit Length: 8 Bits
Parity: None
Stop Bit Length: 1 Bit
POWER
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual 37
Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Pin
Number Signal Name Circuit Type
RS-232C CCITT
1
2
FG
TXD
Frame Ground
Transmitted Data
AA
BA
101
103
3
4
RXD
RTS
Received Data
Request To Send
BB
CA
104
105
Circuit
type
(EIA)
Signal
name
Pin
no.
Circuit
type
(EIA)
Signal
name
Pin
no.
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
CA
CB
7
8
RTS
CTS
Circuit
type
(EIA)
Signal
name
VPS (9 pin)
25-pin Cable Printer/PC
VPS (9 pin)
9-pin Cable Printer/IBM
®
-PC
Pin
no.
Circuit
type
(EIA)
Signal
name
Pin
no.
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
CD
AB
2
3
4
5
6
1
3
FG
RXD
AA
BB
2
20
7
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
TXD BA
DTR
SG
CB
CC
CF
5
6
8
CTS
DSR
DCD
INSTALLATION
38 Installation Manual
2.7.3 RS-232C Signals
Frame Ground (FG)
Connects an external ground to the unit frame, usually the ground pin of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data (TXD)—output
Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal/printer. A "mark" condition is held unless data
or BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data (RXD)—input
Conveys signals from the terminal/printer to the unit.
Request To Send (RTS)—output
This lead is held on whenever DSR is on.
Signal Ground (SG)
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)—output
This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is RS-232C on-line. Circuit DTR ON
does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal/printer. It is
switched off when the unit is RS-232C off-line.
6 DSR Data Set Ready CC 107
7
8
SG
DCD
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
AB
CF
102
109
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready CD 108.2
Table 7 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Pin
Number Signal Name Circuit Type
RS-232C CCITT
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 39
Section 3
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH
PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
40 Installation Manual
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband Signaling?
There are 3 types of integration available on the VPS: Inband Signaling, APT and DPT. The
VPS used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment.
KX-TA624 that can use APT Integration is:
•KX-TA624 Version Y581A or higher.
KX-TD series PBXs that can use DPT Integration are:
•KX-TD308 Version P871F or higher
•KX-TD816 Version P301O or higher
•KX-TD1232 Version P231U or higher
•KX-TD500 Version Q171A or higher
Likewise, the KX-TA1232 can also use DPT Integration:
•KX-TA1232 Version P831AA or higher (all versions)
Notes
•To the VPS, the KX-TA1232 looks identical to the KX-TD1232.
•Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may
not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration (see
4.1.1 Why Digital Integration is Important). For more information, call National
Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
3.1.2 Why Integration is Important
The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard
single-line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the VPS operation depends on the
capabilities and features provided by the PBX; its performance will vary when connected with
different PBX systems. For example, Follow-on (or Called Party) ID is a feature of the PBX.
If the PBX does not have this feature, the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct
mailbox and play the Busy or No Answer greeting for that mailbox.
3.1.3 How the VPS and the PBX Communicate
To the PBX, the VPS looks like SLT sets. The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT, and the VPS
mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT.
For the VPS and the PBX to communicate, proper signaling is important. Like an attendant,
the VPS places calls by going off-hook and dialing numbers. It starts call transfers with a
hookswitch flash to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number. By recognizing
call progress tones from the PBX, the VPS decides how calls should be handled. Inband
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 41
Integration allows the PBX to send certain digits (touchtone) to the VPS, allowing it to
recognize the status of the extension and take the appropriate action.
The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features. For example, if the VPS takes a
message, one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialing the PBX's Message-Waiting-
Lamp-On code. Once new messages are retrieved, the VPS dials the Message-Waiting-Lamp-
Off code for that same mailbox owner.
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration
The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS. (Although this
section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX, it may be necessary to refer to the PBX's
documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions.)
Single Line (Tip/Ring) Port Circuits
The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLT sets. Some PBXs need an OPX
card to provide this connection. However, some OPX cards do not provide all the capabilities
listed in this section.
Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply:
Station to Station Touchtone Signaling
For system users to access VPS services and features, they must be able to send touchtones
from their telephones to the VPS port. As a general rule, SLT sets can perform station-to-
station touchtone signaling; however, many proprietary telephones cannot. Some PBXs need
to be programmed to make proprietary sets use touchtone signaling.
Table 8
VPS/PBX COMMUNICATION
PBX to VPS VPS to PBX
Call Progress Tones
• ringback
• busy
• reorder
Touchtones
SLT Signals
• on/off hook
• hookswitch flash
• touchtones
Table 9
Minimum Loop Current 20 mA
Minimum Line Voltage 7 V DC
Minimum Ringing Voltage 40 V AC
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
42 Installation Manual
If the PBX does not provide station-to-station touchtone signaling, VPS services and
features will be limited.
Message Waiting Notification from an SLT
The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive stutter dial tone when the Message-
Waiting-Lamp-On code is dialed by the VPS. The VPS functions best when the extension
number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light-On or Light-Off code. On some PBXs,
however, the extension number is dialed first, followed by a hookswitch flash and then the On
code. This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the hook-
switch flash.
If the PBX does not provide message waiting notification from an SLT, the VPS can only
notify mailbox owners by dialing a beeper number or user-assigned extension.
This process slows down VPS performance as it dials the beeper or extension number and
waits to confirm notification. The beeper or user-assigned extension notification is meant to be
used for necessity, usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office (e.g., sales
people or field representatives). The only other option, without message waiting notification,
is for mailbox owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages.
Screened Transfer from an SLT
The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly.
A screened transfer:
1. Puts the caller on hold, usually with a hookswitch flash.
2. Dials the extension.
3. Checks to see if the called subscriber is in, out, or on another line, and whether or not that
subscriber accepts the transfer.
4. Completes the transfer (by going on-hook) or returns to the caller to say that the party is
busy or not available. It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message.
TEST:Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question. When the call
is answered, see if the person receiving the call hears touchtones when
numbers are dialed.
TEST: See if dialing the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension's
message waiting indicator.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 43
If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT, the VPS cannot give callers the
option to leave a message in a subscriber's mailbox.
Follow-on ID or Called Party ID
When forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS, a PBX with Follow-on ID sends the mailbox
number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller. The VPS responds by
playing that subscriber's personal greeting. This operation is sometimes called Call Forward to
Mailbox. Without this feature, the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when the line is
busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message.
TEST: Place an outside call from an SLT. See if you can set up a screened
transfer to another extension. Next, try the same test with an internal call.
(The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls.)
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
44 Installation Manual
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2.1 General Guidelines and Definitions
Optimal performance of the VPS/PBX system relies on proper VPS programming. There are
3 categories of hardware settings: RS-232C, Port Settings, and PBX Interface Parameters.
Entering a number sets some of the parameters, while others use sequence codes.
3.2.2 RS-232C Settings
•Baud Rate (300-38400): Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits-per-
second.
•Word Bit Length (7-8): Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
•Parity (N, O, E): Specifies the parity used for error detection.
•Stop Bit Length (1-2): Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte.
•Default: 9600, 8, N, 1
3.2.3 Port Settings
There is no need to change these in a typical installation. Only change these parameters when
connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Each port on the VPS should
match the type of signaling the PBX expects. If you need to change these settings, refer to the
PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings.
•Flash Time—100 ms, 300 ms, 600 ms, 900 ms:
The minimum length of time that the PBX requires to recognize a hookswitch flash.
Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX's setting.
•CPC Signal (Calling Party Control Signal)—NONE, 6.5 ms, 150 ms, 300 ms, 450 ms,
600 ms:
The length of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate
that the caller has hung up; usually set to NONE, since most PBXs do not provide this
signal to single line ports. If choosing a setting other than NONE, use an amount equal
to or less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal.
•Disconnect Time—1 s-8 s:
The length of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended.
•Dial Mode—Touchtone, Pulse 10 pps, Pulse 20 pps:
The type of signaling the PBX single line port expects to receive (pps = pulses per
second).
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 45
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters
Dialing Parameters
•PBX Type:
Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS.
•Integration Mode:
Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX. If PBX type is set
to the Panasonic KX-T series, the Inband Signaling parameters are set automatically and
should not be altered. APT Integration is only available when a KX-TA624 PBX is
connected and the software is upgraded. DPT Integration is only available when a KX-TD
series or KX-TA1232 PBX is connected and the software is upgraded.
•Operator Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator.
Example: FTX [hookswitch flash—dial tone—dial (operator) extn.]
•Extension Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension.
Example: FTX [hookswitch flash—dial tone—dial extn.]
•Alternate Extension (Transfer Sequence):
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that belongs to the "Alternate Extension
Group". This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure (i.e., blind
transfer) such as modem extensions.
Example: FTXD [hookswitch flash—dial tone—dial extn.—hang up]
•Reconnect Sequence on Busy:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension is busy. PBXs differ in how
they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Table 10
SEQUENCE CODES
D Disconnect
F Hookswitch Flash
R Ring Detection
S Silence Detection
T Dial Tone Detection
W Wait for 1 Second
X Dial Extension
A: Answer
0-9, , # Touchtone Digits
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
46 Installation Manual
•Reconnect Sequence on No Answer:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension does not answer. PBXs differ
in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
•Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension's owner has enabled Call
Screening to not take the call. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an
SLT to determine the sequence.
•Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at an
extension.
•Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at an
extension.
•Call Waiting Sequence:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the called extension
is busy. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the
sequence.
•Release Sequence for Call Waiting:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting. PBXs differ in how they
handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Inband Signaling
These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband. If the PBX type is set
to a KX-T series system, these parameters will be automatically set. If another type PBX is
used, check that system's installation manual for settings.
Table 11
Code
(default)
Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When...
1 Ringback Tone The extension dialed is ringing.
2 Busy Tone The extension dialed is busy.
3
Reorder Tone An invalid extension number is dialed or the call is
inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port (also
heard when no touchtone receiver is available to the Voice
Mail extension).
4 DND The extension dialed has set DND feature (Do Not Disturb).
5 Answer The extension dialed is answered.
6
Forwarded to
Voice Mail
(Ringing)
The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and
another Voice Mail port is able to answer. (This lets the first
Voice Mail port, usually an Auto Attendant, send the call to
the other Voice Mail port.)
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 47
Digit Translation Table Parameters
These parameters allow PBXs that have a fixed Follow-on ID sequence to be used with the
VPS. For example, a Follow-on ID sequence of [ 1001] can be changed to [#61001] by
using these parameters.
•Inter-Digit Time-Out: This parameter defines the interval of incoming signals (Follow-
on ID) from the PBX to the VPS. The Digit Translation Table applies the digits received
within this time to translation.
•Input-Output (up to 8 alphanumeric characters): When the system receives digits
within the inter-digit time, it checks them against the input table. If they are found, the
system utilizes the output digits in their place.
7
Forwarded to
Voice Mail (Busy)
The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and no
other Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call. (This
signals the Voice Mail port [usually Auto-Attendant] to let
the caller to leave a message.)
8Forwarded to Extn. The extension dialed is forwarded to another non-Voice
Mail extension.
9Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp
Off code is dialed successfully.
#9
Disconnect The caller disconnects. The central office must set a CPC
signal to the PBX line for this signal to work for outside
calls.
Table 11
Code
(default)
Call State Sent to the Voice Mail Port When...
The remainder of this section consists of step-by-step guides for software verification
and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems.
If you (the dealer) have any problem as you go through this section, please call
1-800-211-PANA(7262).
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
48 Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.1 VPS Programming for Inband Integration
Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal. The table below lists recommended
parameters for Panasonic KX-T series PBXs.
Table 12
PBX Type Other
Manufac-
turers
T308/
T616
T1232 T96 T336 TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232
TD308 TA
series
TD500
Integration
Mode
None None None None None None None None None
Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A) FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A) FTX
(A)
FTX (A) FTX
(A)
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A) FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A) FTX
(A)
FTX (A) FTX
(A)
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A) FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A) FTX
(A)
FTX (A) FTX
(A)
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on No
Answer
FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
* N/A T701X# T#91X T9X T701X T701X T701X# T701X
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
* N/A T702X# T#90X T#9X T700X T700X T702X# T700X
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 49
3.3.2 KX-T123211D Software Verification and Programming for
Inband Integration
1. Check the software version of the KX-T123211D by using System Program [98], which
shows the software version number:Y201Z940430(TM3)
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (format YYMMDD). In
this example, the date code is April 30, 1994 (year, month, day). For this software version,
the software production date of the PBX must be April 30, 1994, or later.
If the software production date of the PBX is earlier than 4/30/94, call National Parts
Center (1-800-833-9626) to order a software upgrade.
2. Enable System Program [80] for each extension connected to the VPS.
This parameter is used to tell the KX-T123211D which extensions are connected to the
VPS. Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow-on ID and DTMF call status
signaling (busy, answered, disconnect, etc.) if the Voice Mail integration and DTMF
integration features are also enabled.
3. Enable System Program [81] to turn on DTMF Integration. On extensions with the Voice
Mail port parameter enabled, the KX-T123211D can send codes (touchtones) to indicate
call states; this increases VPS efficiency. Codes apply to all transferred calls; outside calls
only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-T123211D is programmed for CPC detection
and the Central Office sends the CPC signal). Refer to the Table 10 in the Section
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters.
Call Waiting
Sequence
*N/A1N/AN/A1111
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
*N/AFN/AN/AFFFF
* Check with manufacturer.
N/A Not Available
(A) Adding "A" for "answer" to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message:
"You have a call" when the AA transfers a call. The VPS disconnects after line is
answered. Adding "D" for "disconnect" creates a blind transfer.
Table 12
PBX Type Other
Manufac-
turers
T308/
T616
T1232 T96 T336 TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232
TD308 TA
series
TD500
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
50 Installation Manual
4. Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program [60].
Reserve this extension group for these extensions! Do not mix other extensions into this
group.
5. Enable hunting for the VPS extension group using System Program [08].
6. Set the hunting type for the VPS extension group to circular using System Program [09].
7. At every VPS extension, temporarily connect an SLT or butt set, go off-hook and dial
7301# to turn on Data Line Security. This prevents the KX-T123211D from sending
Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions. We recommend that all
Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording.
8. At every user’s extension, go off-hook and dial 7192#. This sets the proper Follow-on ID
sequences so that forwarded calls go directly to the extension’s mailbox. The KX-
T123211D automatically sends the extension’s digits to the Voice Mail port before
connecting the caller.
For Follow-on ID to work:
•Ports connected to the VPS must be assigned as Voice Mail ports.
•Extensions must be forwarded to the first port of the Voice Mail (using the Busy/No
Answer mode or the All Calls mode).
•The mailbox number should be the same as the extension number.
Interaction with other features:
•Call Forwarding—If the extension is forwarded to an extension that is also
forwarded, the forwarding will not work.
•Call Hunting—Hunting does not interfere with Follow-on ID.
•Call Transfer—Calls transferred to an extension with Follow-on ID and call
forwarding enabled will be forwarded directly to the mailbox.
•Data Line Security—We recommend that all Voice Mail port extensions have this
feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording by Executive Override tone or
Call Waiting tone.
9. Select the appropriate outside (CO) Line feature settings depending on how your customer
plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup, or C) to
only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended outside (CO) line feature settings:
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programs [51] and [52] to set this
parameter. Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group.
The KX-T123211D will allow incoming CO calls to hunt only if the outside (CO)
lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group. Lines programed as "Normal" do not
hunt.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 51
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System Programs
[47] (Day Mode) and [48] (Night Mode) to enable ringing at the operator’s extension
(jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call before
the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [49] (Day Mode) and [50] (Night
Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programs [51] and [52] to set this parameter.
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System Programs
[47] (Day Mode) and [48] (Night Mode) to enable ringing on every extension (jack)
that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [49] (Day Mode) and [50] (Night
Mode).
CO Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal". Use System
Programs [51] and [52] to set this parameter.
3.3.3 KX-TA Series Programming for Inband Integration via the
Manager’s Extension
Note
If your PBX is the KX-TA1232, please refer to the procedure described in 3.3.5 KX-
TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 and KX-TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via
the Manager’s Extension or 3.3.6 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, and KX-TA1232 Programming
for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool for programming.
1. Enable System Program [102] for each extension connected to the VPS. Jack 07, or jacks
07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail port. Jack 15, or jacks 15 and 16
can be assigned for the VPS2.
This parameter is used to tell the KX-TA series which extensions are connected to the VPS.
Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow-on ID and touchtone call status
Signaling (busy, answered, disconnect, etc.) if the Voice Mail integration and Touchtone
Integration features are also enabled.
2. Enable System Program [103] to turn on Touchtone Integration. On extensions with the
Voice Mail port parameter enabled, the KX-TA series can send codes (touchtones) to
indicate call states; this increases VPS efficiency. Codes apply to all transferred calls;
outside calls only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-TA series is programmed for CPC
Detection, and the Central Office sends the CPC signal). Refer to the Table 10 in Section
3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
52 Installation Manual
3. Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program
[600].
Reserve this extension group for these extensions! Do not mix other extensions into this
group.
Note
Up to two VPS units can be connected to the KX-TA624. When two VPS units are
connected to the KX-TA624, 2 different extension groups should be assigned for each
VPS in System Program [600]. One extension group is for jack 07, or jacks 07 and 08 of
the KX-TA624. The other extension group is for jack 15, or jacks 15 and 16.
4. Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Program [100].
5. Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Program [101].
6. At every VPS extension, temporarily connect an SLT or butt set, go off-hook and dial
7301# to turn on Data Line Security. This prevents the KX-TA series from sending
Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions. We recommend that all
Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording.
7. Select the appropriate outside (CO) line feature settings depending on how your customer
plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup, or C) to
only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended outside (CO) line feature settings:
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night
Mode), [416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to the first
extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA series will allow incoming
outside calls to hunt only if the outside (CO) lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt
group. Lines programmed as "Normal" do not hunt.
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System Programs
[408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to enable ringing at
the operator’s extension (jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call before
the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each
extension connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode), [412]
(Night Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and [416] (Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 53
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System Programs
[408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to enable ringing
on every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode), [412] (Night Mode)
and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and [416] (Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
CAUTION
DO NOT create a mailbox in both VPS for the same extension. Each extension can have a
maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS. The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension
from the VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice
Mail Transfer. DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS. For example, if
jack 06 (extension 106) has its mailbox in the VPS1, assign extension 107 or 108 as the
destination, not extension 115 or 116 (see the following diagram).
Group B
7
6
8
KX-TA series
VPS1
Port 1
Extension 107
Port 2
Extension 108
Extension 106
Mailbox for Extension 106
15
16
Port 1
Extension 115
Port 2
Extension 116
VPS2
Group A
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
54 Installation Manual
3.3.4 KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration
Whenever possible, we recommend that you use DPT Integration. However, in some cases,
this is not possible. In the following situations, you need to use Inband Integration:
•Your PBX is a third-party telephone system.
•You have a KX-TD500, but all the extension cards are analog types.
•You have a KX-TD500, but the DHLC/DLC cards are ancient versions (therefore,
cannot support DPT Integration).
1. Assignment of the extension card to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-1 Slot Assignment" screen.
b) Assign the slot card type to be installed to "DHLC", "HLC", "SLC", "ESLC", or
"SLC-M" SLT interface supports.
c) Click "Apply" to save the slot card type assignment.
d) Set "Card Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 55
2. Assignment of the extension ports to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-3 Extension Port Assignment" screen.
b) Assign "Attribute" of the port to be connected to "TEL" (default).
c) Assign "DN" for the port (click "DN Refer" to check the available directory numbers).
Note:
This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
To reach the Voice Mail system, users dial these extension numbers.
d) Assign "Extension Group No." for the port.
Note:
Specify the extension group number (126 or 127 by default) to which VM or AA
extension groups have been assigned. Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the
VPS through additional programming.
e) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
f) Set "Port Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
56 Installation Manual
3. Assignment of the extension line to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "4-2 Extension Line" screen.
b) Set "Data Line Mode" to "Yes".
c) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
This program prevents the VM port from being interrupted by "Call Waiting",
"Hold Recall", and "Executive Busy Override" features during a call.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 57
4. Settings for the trunk (CO line) features
Select the appropriate trunk (CO line) feature settings depending on how your
customer plans to use the VPS.
• The VPS answers all incoming outside calls promptly.
Go to [Recommended Settings (1)].
• The VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified number of
rings.
Go to [Recommended Settings (2)].
• The VPS answers when an extension user does not take the call after a specified
number of rings.
Go to [Recommended Settings (3)].
[Recommended Settings (1)]
If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (CO line) to a
specific extension number (VPS port).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
In order to utilize the Caller ID features, you must Set "Caller ID" to "Enable".
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
58 Installation Manual
[Recommended Settings (2)]
If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by the Operator (Operator
backup):
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (CO line) to a
specific extension number.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which Operator has been assigned.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 59
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "3-1 Trunk Group" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night" for the trunk (CO line) group.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
60 Installation Manual
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2-4 System Timer 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Time" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
This parameter tells the KX-TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension
before forwarding (redirecting).
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 61
[Recommended Settings (3)]
If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by user extensions:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (CO line) to a
specific extension number.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
62 Installation Manual
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "3-1 Trunk Group" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night" for the trunk (CO line) group.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 63
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2-4 System Timer 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Time" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
This parameter tells the KX-TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension
before forwarding (redirecting).
Screen output:
3.3.5 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 and KX-TD308
Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager’s
Extension
Select a maximum of 2 station ports to be connected to the VPS. Plug each station into a Voice
Mail port.
Go into System Program [602] and assign the Voice Mail stations to a different extension
group. By default, all stations are in Extension Group 1.
Go into System Program [106] and assign the new Extension Group to Auto Attendant (AA).
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
64 Installation Manual
3.3.6 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, and KX-TA1232 Programming for
Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool
1. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming".
(BATCH [1] or INTERACTIVE [2]).
•Before choosing Batch Programming, you must open a file in the Disk File
Management Menu (Item 3).
•Before choosing Interactive Programming, you must connect with the system in the
DSHS Connect/Disconnect menu.
Main Menu
2. Choose "Station" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
3. Choose "Station Setting" from the Station Menu.
Station Menu
1. System Data Programming (BATCH)
2. System Data Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select the number : [ ]
1. Line
2. Station
3. System
4. Toll Restriction
5. ARS
6. Aux. Ports
7. Additional Function
8. Caller ID
Select the number: [2]
1. Station Setting
2. COS & Mailbox ID
3. CO line Outgoing
4. DIL 1:N
5. ISDN Extension Setting
6. SDN Extension CO outgoing
7. Flexible CO Keys
8. Flexible PF Keys
9. DSS
10. Lunch/Break Group
11. FWD/DND Setting
12. FWD/DND Setting (OPX)
Select the number: [1]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 65
4. Enable XDP ports. Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group 8.
Station Setting
5. Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "System".
6. Choose "Miscellaneous" from the System Menu.
System Menu
Jack EXT Name X E Doorphone LCS
D X Day Night Mode
P G 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
01-1 [ 101 ] [ ] N
01-2 [ 201 ] [ ] -
02-1 [ 102 ] [ ] N
02-2 [ 202 ] [ ] -
03-1 [ 103 ] [ ] N
03-2 [ 203 ] [ ] -
04-1 [ 104 ] [ ] N
04-2 [ 204 ] [ ] -
05-1 [ 105 ] [ ] Y
05-2 [ 205 ] [ ] -
06-1 [ 106 ] [ ] Y
06-2 [ 206 ] [ ] -
07-1 [ 107 ] [ ] N
07-2 [ 207 ] [ ] -
08-1 [ 108 ] [ ] N
08-2 [ 208 ] [ ] -
[ 1 ] Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Stop Rec
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 8 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 8 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N Stop Rec
[ 1 ] N N N N N N N N
FWD
N/A
Time
Cordless
PITS
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
[00]
N
–
N
–
N
–
N
–
N
–
N
–
N
–
N
–
01. Day/Night
02. Class of Service
03. Emergency/Quick Dial
04. Speed Dial
05. Absent Message
06. Flexible Numbering
07. Account Code
08. Special Carrier
09. Timer
10. Voice Mail
11. Voice Mail Integration
12. UCD
13. Phantom
14. Opera/Manager/EXT Group
15. Miscellaneous
16. Caller ID Modification
17. Switch Type
18. DID
19. Lunch/Break Time
20. System Time
21. Version
22. ISDN Card
23. T1 Card
24. T1 Minor Error
Select the number: [15]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
66 Installation Manual
7. Choose the "Call Hunting" extension group. Set the last extension group to [A] for
Automated Attendant.
Miscellaneous
8. Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "Line" and then select "CO
Line Setting 1". Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group.
CO Line Setting
Expansion Card Type (Master) =>
(Slave ) =>
Local Access => Priority =
Disable Off
EXT Number
Enable
Disable
=> Enable
=> [01:00] AM
=> [ ]
1
D
2
D
3
D
4
D
5
D
6
D
7
D
8
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
12345678
A
EXP1
COT
COT
EXP2
EXT1
EXT1
EXP3
EXT2
EXT2
TRG No. =
Call Hunting => EXG
No.
=
SPD TRS Override => HOTEL FEATURE =>
DID SELECT
=>
CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key
CO-Key => Off-Hook Monitor
=>
Adjust Time
PBX Code
Caller ID Extension
EXP 1 Not Stored
EXP 2 Not Stored
EXP 3 Not Stored
EXP 4 Not Stored
CO C T D PD C CPC DIL 1:1
No O R I PT I Detection EXT No
LF
NGA SM D Out NightMode Day
01 Y [1] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
02 Y [2] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
03 Y [3] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
04 Y [4] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
05 Y [5] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
06 Y [6] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
07 Y [7] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
08 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
09 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
10 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
11 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[205]EXT[205]
12 Y [8] D 1080 N
R
E
V
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable EXT[205]
DIL 1:1
Break
Grroup
Lunch
Group
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]EXT[205]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 67
3.3.7 KX-TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the
Operating and Maintenance Tool
1. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming".
(BATCH [1] or INTERACTIVE [2])
•Before choosing Batch Programming, you must open a file in the Disk File
Management Menu (Item 3).
•Before choosing Interactive Programming, you must connect with the system in the
DSHS Connect/Disconnect menu.
Main Menu
2. Choose "Station (ALT-S)" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
3. Choose "Settings (1)" in the Sub Menu.
Sub Menu
4. Choose which single line extensions will be attached to Voice Mail.
If using XDP ports, enable "XDP" for the connect jacks.
Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group "8".
1. System Date Programming (BATCH)
2. System Date Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select menu Number:[ ]
AuxPorts (ALT-U)
Manager (ALT-M)
System (ALT-Y)
CO-Line (ALT-L)
Station (ALT-S)
TRS (ALT-T)
ARS (ALT-A)
Settings (1)
Settings (2)
CO Line (O)utgoing
(D)il Line 1:N
Flex (C)o Keys :1-24
Flex (P) F Buttons :1-12
1
2
O
D
C
P
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
68 Installation Manual
Station Setting 1
5. Select "SAVE(F7)". Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select
"System".
6. Choose "System (ALT-Y)" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
Jack Ext. Name XDP EXG Day Night LCS Mode
DoorPhone
[ 1 ] [Y] [Y] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 8 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
[ 1 ] [N] [N] [STOP REC]
[ 1 ] [N] [N]
1-1 [11 ] [ ] [N]
1-2 [21 ] [ ]
2-1 [12 ] [ ] [N]
2-2 [22 ] [ ]
3-1 [13 ] [ ] [N]
3-2 [23 ] [ ]
4-1 [14 ] [ ] [N]
4-2 [24 ] [ ]
5-1 [15 ] [ ] [Y]
5-2 [25 ] [ ]
6-1 [16 ] [ ] [N]
6-2 [26 ] [ ]
7-1 [17 ] [ ] [N]
7-2 [27 ] [ ]
8-1 [18 ] [ ] [N]
8-2 [28 ] [ ]
Auxports (ALT-U)
Manager (ALT-M)
System (ALT-Y)
CO-Line (ALT-L)
Station (ALT-S)
TRS (ALT-T)
ARS (ALT-A)
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual 69
7. Choose "Miscellaneous" from the System Menu.
System Menu
8. Choose the "Call Hunting" extension group. Set the last extension group to "[AA]" for
Automated Attendant.
Miscellaneous
9. Select "SAVE(F7)". Return to the System Data Programming Menu.
(A)ccount Codes
Caller (I)D
Class of Se(R)vice
(D)ay/Night
(E)mergency/Quick Dial
(F)loating Extensions
Fle(X)ible Numbers
(M)iscellaneous
P(H)antom Extensions
Seria(L) Interface
S(P)ecial Carrier
(T)imers
Add. F(U)nctions - SYSTEM
Add. Functions - (C)OS
(V)M Status/Command DTMF Set
Voice Mail Inte(G)ration
A
I
R
D
E
F
X
M
H
L
P
T
U
C
V
G
Automatic Access => Priority
Call Hunting => EXG No.
Automatic Hold By CO Button
Automatic Hold By DSS Button
SPD TRS Override
FAX Transfer Extension
Caller ID Extension
Caller ID Modification
Long Distance Call Del,Add
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
[DIS] [DIS] [DIS] [DIS] [DIS] [DIS] [DIS] [AA]
[2] [3]
23
CO No.
Local Call Del,Add
Area Code
=>
=>
=> [Disable]
=> [Enable]
=> [Disable]
=> [ ]
=> [ ]
=> [0 ] [1 ]
=>
=> [3 ] [ ]
=> [ ]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
70 Installation Manual
10. Choose "CO-Line (ALT-L)" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
11. Choose "Settings (2)" in the Sub Menu, and program all lines DIL to the first extension
of the Voice Mail hunt group.
Sub Menu
CO Line Setting
AuxPorts (ALT-U)
Manager (ALT-M)
System (ALT-Y)
CO-Line (ALT-L)
Station (ALT-S)
TRS(ALT-T)
ARS(ALT-A)
Settings (1) 1
Settings (2) 2
(I)ntercept/Timers/PBX Access Code I
CO
CPC CPC
DIL
DAY NIGHT
EXT NO.
1:1
Signal
Detection
Incoming
Signal
Detection
Outgoing
1 [400 ms] [Disable]
2 [400 ms] [Disable]
3 [400 ms] [Disable]
[25 ]
[25 ]
[25 ]
[25 ]
[25 ]
[25 ]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 71
Section 4
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-
TD SERIES PBX
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
72 Installation Manual
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.1.1 Why Digital Integration is Important
The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard
single line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the communication between the PBX and
VPS is best when Digital Integration is used; the VPS is already set up to communicate through
Digital Integration.
Once Digital Integration is established, the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data
link. This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling, know where
from and why a call is forwarded, and recognize what the caller wants to do. This
communication allows features that are only available with Digital Integration—several of
which are described below:
Table 13
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration only)
The subscribers and the Message Manager can
program their extensions from a remote location to
forward various types of calls to a desired extension or
an outside telephone.
Auto Configuration The VPS knows what extension numbers exist on the
PBX and creates mailboxes for each extension
automatically. Also sets the VPS clock with data from
the PBX clock.
Live Call Screening Extension users can monitor messages as they are
being left in the mailbox or intercept if required.
Two-Way Recording Extension users can record conversations into their
own mailboxes by pressing one button.
Two-Way Transfer Extension users can record conversations into another
person’s mailbox by pressing a button and dialing an
extension number.
Direct Mailbox Access The subscriber can directly enter his mailbox when he
calls the VPS. He does not have to dial his mailbox
number.
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
Each PBX trunk (CO line) group can be assigned one
of 4 incoming call services: Voice Mail Service,
Automated Attendant Service, Interview Service and
Custom Service.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 73
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX (see 3.1.1 APT/
DPT or Inband Signaling?), you may not be able to utilize some of the features listed above.
For more information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
Intercom Paging* Callers can page subscribers through built-in speakers
and external paging equipment. For a Caller ID Caller,
if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature, the name will be announced at
the end of the page.
Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal)*
The VPS announces the prerecorded Caller ID callers’
names when: (1) extension users listen to messages
from assigned numbers left in their mailboxes, (2) the
VPS transfers calls from assigned numbers to the
users, and (3) the VPS pages the users by intercom.
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both
system and personal caller name announcements, the
VPS will use the personal caller name.
Caller ID Call Routing* The VPS automatically sends calls from pre-assigned
Caller ID numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
or Custom Service.
Personal Greeting for Caller ID* Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting
messages for special callers.
Time Synchronization
(DPT Integration only)
Whenever the PBX sets a new date and time or when
DPT Integration is established, the data is
automatically registered in the VPS.
*Caller ID Note 1: When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the
PBX, the VPS will wait about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the
Caller ID information properly from the PBX.
This waiting time can be changed by using the WCID command (see
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID) in 7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS).
Caller ID Note 2: In the documentation for the KX-TD816/1232 series PBX,
the Caller ID feature is called CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation).
Table 13
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
74 Installation Manual
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA624
4.2.1 KX-TA624 Software Verification and Programming for
Digital Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TA624 has the proper software level to allow Digital Integration
with the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TA624 Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system
programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Check the software version of the KX-TA624 using System Program [998].
Example: Y581AYYMMDD(M)
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
Digital Integration, the software version of the PBX must be Y581A or higher.
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, call National Parts Center (1-800-
833-9626) to order a software upgrade.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [998].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE). The system displays the ROM version and the
date it was created.
This version must be Y581A or higher for Digital Integration to be utilized.
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
Date and time are automatically synchronized between the VPS and the Panasonic KX-
TA624 during Auto Configuration or Quick Setup.
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Program [009].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jacks will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those
ports. Jack 07, or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail Port. Jack
15, or jacks 15 and 16 can be assigned for the VPS2.
•KX-TVS90 (2 ports): assign max. 2 jacks
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 75
From the SYS-PGM NO ?screen:
a) Enter [130] (for VPS1) or [131] (for VPS2).
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Disable
c) Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER).
Screen output: Port 7 or Port 15
d) To assign 2 jacks, Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) again.
Screen output: Port 7& 8 or Port 15& 16
To assign 1 jack, skip this step.
e) Press STORE.
f) Press END (HOLD).
5. Select the appropriate outside (CO) Line feature settings depending on how your customer
plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup, or C) to
only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Conditions: The lowest jack (jack 07 or jack 15) entered here must
be connected to the Port 1 of the VPS.
To change the current assignment from "Port 7" to
"Port 7 & 8", you must first change it to "Disable".
Likewise, if you want to change it from "Port 7 & 8" to
"Port 7", you must first change it to "Disable". If the
current assignment is already "Disable", you can make
a change in 1 step. This condition also applies to System
Program [131].
When "Port 7 & 8" is selected in program [130],
extension jack numbers 07 and 08 will be in extension
group 7 automatically. Likewise, when "Port 15 & 16"
is selected in program [131], extension jack numbers 15
and 16 will be in extension group 8 automatically. Also
the Station Hunting type is set as "Circular"
automatically in each of these 2 extension groups.
Extension
group 8
KX-TA624
15
16
Port 1
Port 2
VPS2
7
8
Port 1
Port 2
VPS1
Extension
group 7
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
76 Installation Manual
Recommended Outside (CO) Line feature settings:
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night
Mode), [416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to the first
extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA624 will allow incoming outside
calls to hunt only if the outside (CO) lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group.
Lines programmed as "Normal" do not hunt.
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System Programs
[408] (Day mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to enable ringing at
the operator’s extension (jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call before
the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode), [412] (Night Mode)
and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and [416] (Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System Programs
[408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to enable ringing
on every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode), [412] (Night Mode)
and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal".
Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and [416] (Lunch
Mode) to set this parameter.
6. Connect the jack(s) assigned in Step 3 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
8. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
Table 14 2 CO (Outside) Lines, 2 Ports
CO Lines Ports
11, 2
21, 2
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 77
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System, resulting in a
loss of all user programming, and voice messages (except User1 and User2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system
initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•The Power Indicator light goes on.
•The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•"Checking Flash Memory Cards." is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
•The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the ports
until "1...2...3..." is displayed.
•Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
This message is shown when the digital (APT) connection between the VPS and
telephone system cannot be established.
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3...
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
Active COs: 1 2
APT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
Active COs: 1 2
APT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
78 Installation Manual
Possible causes of the message: "APT Interface Connection is not Established"
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
CAUTION
When 2 VPSs are connected to the KX-TA624, the following 2 procedures should be done to
make the VPSs work correctly.
1. Delete a mailbox in either VPS so that each extension has only ONE MAILBOX.
After Auto Configuration has been executed, an extension has a mailbox in both
VPS1 and VPS2. However each extension can have a maximum of 1 mailbox in
either VPS. To delete a mailbox, Type [D] (Delete) in the "Make (Make/Delete)"
field (see "Step 4 Creating Mailboxes" in 5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup).
The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the VPS which contains
its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer. DO
NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS. For example, if jack 06
Table 15
Cause Action
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default
PBX type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232/
TD308 under DPT Integration), this message
will always appear when connecting to another
type of PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the
proper software level to support APT/DPT
Integration.
Contact National Parts Center
at 1-800-833-9626
or use Inband Integration under
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support
APT/DPT Integration.
Do required integration
programming as described in
this chapter.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 79
(extension 106) has its mailbox in the VPS1, assign extension 107 or 108 as the
destination, not extension 115 or 116 (see diagram below).
2. Change the extension numbers of both VPS port 1 and 2 for VPS2 from 107 and
108 to 115 and 116 (see "Extension Number of VPS Port 1" and "Extension
Number of VPS Port 2" in Table 74 in B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters).
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [107]. If the VPS
answers, you have an APT connection.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TA624 should be able to communicate
through Digital Integration.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from the
VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when programming
the VPS.
7
6
8
KX-TA624
VPS1
Port 1
Extension 107
Port 2
Extension 108
Extension 106
Mailbox for Extension 106
15
16
Port 1
Extension 115
Port 2
Extension 116
VPS2
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
80 Installation Manual
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL
INTEGRATION
Follow the procedure below to program the VPS card for DPT Integration.
1. Assignment of the VPS card to be connected to the VPS
Note:
If the VPS card to which the VPS will be assigned is already installed in the KX-
TD500, skip the steps a through d. If a new VPS card is installed in the KX-TD500,
follow the steps below.
a) Go to the "1-1 Slot Assignment" screen.
b) Assign the slot "Card Type" to be installed to "DLC" or "DHLC" card.
c) Click "Apply" to save the card type assignment.
d) Set "Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 81
e) Check the information of "Card Properties" and confirm the LPR version of the card.
Note:
The LPR Version must be "2" or higher for the VPS card (101: DLC/DHLC) to
which the control channel will be assigned.
Screen output:
f) Check the information of "CPU Card Information" and confirm the Software
Version of the KX-TD500. The software version must be Q171A or higher for DPT
Integration to be utilized.
Notes:
•If the software version of the KX-TD500 is lower than this, you may not be able
to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
•In the example below, Q171AB represents the software version and 010427A
represents the software production date code (year, month, day).
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
82 Installation Manual
2. Assignment of the ports to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-3 Extension Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the appropriate VPS card (101: DLC/DHLC) in the "Card No." menu.
c) Set the attribute of the valid ports to be connected to the VPS to "VPS (DPT)".
d) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note:
The parameters except for "Attribute" will disappear and the DN (Directory
Number) will be cleared.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 83
3. Assignment of VPS card and its model
a) Go to the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the corresponding equipment number in the "TVS No." menu.
c) Select "TVS80/110/200-1/200-2" in the "Type" menu.
Note:
Depending on the version of the KX-TD500, the selection might be "TVS200-1".
In this case, select "TVS200-1" to connect the KX-TVS90.
d) Select the card (101: DLC/DHLC for jacks 1-8; 201: DLC/DHLC for jacks 9-12) which
connects with the VPS in the "VPS Card" menu.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
84 Installation Manual
4. Assignment of the extension ports connected to the VPS
a) Continue the programming in the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the extension port number of the card (DLC/DHLC) to which the VPS (DPT) jack
is to be connected in the "Port No." menu.
Note:
This menu is displayed only when the attribute of the ports is assigned to "VPS
(DPT)" in step 2.
This program tells the KX-TD500 which extension ports are connected to the VPS.
This allows the KX-TD500 to send the proper Digital Integration information to
these ports.
Jack No.1 must be assigned, because its port is used as the channel to control the
VPS.
c) Assign "DN" for the port (click "DN Refer" to check the available directory numbers).
Note:
This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
Since each port connected to the VPS provides two extensions, this enables you to
assign extension numbers to each port. To reach the Voice Mail system, users dial
these extension numbers.
d) Assign "Extension Group No." for the port.
Note:
Specify the extension group number (126 or 127 by default) to which VM or AA is
assigned. Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the VPS through additional
programming.
(Selecting VM has the same effect as selecting AA, regardless of how the VPS is
programmed.)
e) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
f) Set "Status" to "INS".
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 85
Screen output:
5. To set the trunk (CO line) features, follow the instructions in "Settings for the trunk (CO
line) features" (3.3.4 KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration in
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs).
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
8. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System, resulting in a
loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and User 2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
86 Installation Manual
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•The Power Indicator light goes on.
•The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
•The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and
the ports until "1...2...3..." is displayed.
•Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not Established"
Table 16
Cause Remedy
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default
PBX type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232/
TD308 under DPT Integration), this message
will always appear when connecting to another
type of PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3...
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 87
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3]
then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration
Instructions.
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the
proper software level to support APT/DPT
Integration.
Contact National Parts Center
at 1-800-833-9626
or use Inband Integration under
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support
APT/DPT Integration.
Do required integration
programming as described in
this chapter.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [1065]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD500 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD500 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
Table 16
Cause Remedy
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
88 Installation Manual
4.4 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-
TA1232 AND KX-TD308
Notes
•Do not use system programs [106] or [602] for DPT Integration.
•The next 2 sections (4.4.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
Integration via the Manager’s Extension and 4.4.2 KX-TD1232 Software Verification
and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool) are for the
KX-TD1232 as examples. Please refer to them for the KX-TD816 or KX-TA1232.
•And the following Section (4.4.3 KX-TD308 Software Verification and Programming
for DPT Integration via the Manager’s Extension) is for the KX-TD308.
4.4.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TD1232 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration
with the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
Note
Two methods of programming are available on the KX-TD1232. The instructions below
show how to program without the operating and maintenance tool. For instructions on
programming with the operating and maintenance tool, please see 4.4.2 KX-TD1232
Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and
Maintenance Tool.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TD1232 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how
to enter the system programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Verify Software—If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, remember to check both
cabinets. The software must be the same in each. Check the software version of the KX-
TD1232 using System Program [116].
Example: P231UYMMDDA
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
DPT Integration, the software version of the PBX must be P231U or higher.
(For KX-TD816, the version must be P301O or higher; for KX-TA1232, the version must
be P831AA or higher.)
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 89
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, you may not be able to utilize some
of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, call National
Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [116].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
c) Enter the system number ([0] or [1], master/slave). The system displays the ROM
version and the date it was created.
This version must be P231U or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized (both systems
if system connection is used).
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Program [003].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those
ports.
•KX-TVS90 (2 ports): assign 1 jack
Note
If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, all Voice Mail Ports should be assigned to
either the Master or Slave System.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [117].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: M: # # # #
c) Enter the jack numbers (02-64) of the ports you will use for Voice Mail.
d) Press STORE.
e) Press END (HOLD) when finished.
5. Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering.
System Program [118] (Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) is automatically
set. This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions, this enables you to assign
extension numbers to each port. You can assign any extension number that is not already
assigned to another port. To reach the VPS, users dial these extension numbers. It is not
necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 165 and 166.
Conditions: Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port. A jack
programmed as a Manager Extension (System Program
[006]) cannot be used in this program.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
90 Installation Manual
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [118].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM NO?
c) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM-01:#_ _ -1: 165
( _ _ = the port number you entered in program 117)
d) Enter the Extension Number that you want this port to have.
(The default extension number for port 1: 165; port 2: 166)
e) Press STORE.
f) Repeat steps c, d, and e until all extension numbers are entered.
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
8. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System, resulting in a
loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and User 2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•The Power Indicator light goes on.
•The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
Conditions: No 2 jacks on the system can have the same extension
number. If you try to enter a number that is already
assigned, you will hear an error tone. Each digital
extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and
must have 2 different extension numbers assigned.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 91
Screen output:
•The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the
ports until "1...2...3..." is displayed.
•Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not Established"
Table 17
Cause Remedy
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default
PBX type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232/
TD308 under DPT Integration), this message
will always appear when connecting to another
type of PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the
proper software level to support APT/DPT
Integration.
Contact National Parts Center
at 1-800-833-9626
or use Inband Integration under
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support
APT/DPT Integration.
Do required integration
programming as described in
this chapter.
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3...
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
92 Installation Manual
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3]
then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration
Instructions.
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [165]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 93
4.4.2 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool
Follow these steps after communication between the KX-TD1232 and the programming
software has been established. Refer to the Operating and Maintenance manual for
connection information.
1. Check the software version.
a) Go to the Main Menu. Press the ALT key and the letter [V] at the same time.
b) Verify the Operating and Maintenance version being used.
This version must be 4.0xA5 or higher to program the KX-TD1232 for DPT
Integration.
Note
If you have an older version of the maintenance tool but have the correct ROM
version in the system, you may still program the KX-TD1232 but you must program
using the Manager’s Extension.
c) Verify the ROM version of the KX-TD1232.
Example: P231UYMMDDB
This version must be at least version P231U or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized
(both systems if system connection is being used).
(For KX-TD816, the version must be P301O or higher; for KX-TA1232, the version
must be P831AA or higher.)
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, you may not be able to utilize
some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, call
National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
In the example above, the underlined digits represent the software production date code
(year, month, day).
Sample display: Connect DSHS: KX-TD1232
ROM Version: [---P231UxxxxxB] CAN
DB data (PC): Empty
Version: 4.03A5 [0008301332] MUK
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
94 Installation Manual
2. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming" (BATCH [1] or
INTERACTIVE [2]).
Main Menu
3. Choose "System" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
4. Choose "Voice Mail Integration" from the System Menu.
System Menu
5. First, enter the port numbers that will be connected to the VPS. If desired, change the
default extension numbers of the Voice Mail ports.
1. System Data Programming (BATCH)
2. System Data Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select the number : [ ]
1. Line
2. Station
3. System
4. Toll Restriction
5. ARS
6. Aux. Ports
7. Additional Function
8. Caller ID
Select the number : [ 3 ]
01. Day/Night
02. Class of Service
03. Emergency/Quick Dial
04. Speed Dial
05. Absent Message
06. Flexible Numbering
07. Account Code
08. Special Carrier
09. Timer
10. Voice Mail
11. Voice Mail Integration
12. UCD
13. Phantom
14. Opera/Manager/EXT Group
15. Miscellaneous
16. Caller ID Modification
17. Switch Type
18. DID
19. Lunch/Break Time
20. System Time
21. Version
22. ISDN Card
23. T1 Card
24. T1 Minor Error
Select the number: [11]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 95
Voice Mail Integration
6. Step 6 should only be done if the VPS is going to answer all incoming Central Office lines
directly.
Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "Line" and then select "CO
Line Setting 1". Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group.
CO Line Setting
7. Follow steps 5-11 in 4.4.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
Integration via the Manager’s Extension.
VM Port No. Master [30] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Slave [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
VM Jack EXT EXG
01 30-1 [165] [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
02 30-2 [166]
03 -1 [167]
04 -2 [168]
05 -1 [169]
06 -2 [170]
07 -1 [177]
08 -2 [178]
09 -1 [181]
10 -2 [182]
11 -1 [183]
12 -2 [184]
Name
[V.MAIL01]
[V.MAIL02]
[V.MAIL03]
[V.MAIL04]
[V.MAIL05]
[V.MAIL06]
[V.MAIL07]
[V.MAIL08]
[V.MAIL09]
[V.MAIL10]
[V.MAIL11]
[V.MAIL12]
Name
[V.MAIL13]
[V.MAIL14]
[V.MAIL15]
[V.MAIL16]
[V.MAIL17]
[V.MAIL18]
[V.MAIL19]
[V.MAIL20]
[V.MAIL21]
[V.MAIL22]
[V.MAIL23]
[V.MAIL24]
VM Jack EXT EXG
13 -1 [171] [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
14 -2 [172]
15 -1 [173]
16 -2 [174]
17 -1 [175]
18 -2 [176]
19 -1 [179]
20 -2 [180]
21 -1 [185]
22 -2 [186]
23 -1 [187]
24 -2 [188]
CO C T D PD C CPC DIL 1:1
No O R I PT I Detection EXT No
LF
NGA SM D Out NightMode Day
01 Y [1] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
02 Y [2] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
03 Y [3] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
04 Y [4] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
05 Y [5] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
06 Y [6] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
07 Y [7] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
08 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
09 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
10 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
11 Y [8] D 1080 N Disable EXT[165]EXT[165]
12 Y [8] D 1080 N
R
E
V
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.
Reg.Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable EXT[165]
DIL 1:1
Break
Grroup
Lunch
Group
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]
[ ][ ]EXT[165]
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
96 Installation Manual
4.4.3 KX-TD308 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TD308 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with
the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TD308 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to
enter the system programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Verify Software—check the software version of the KX-TD308 using System Program
[116].
Example: P871FYMMDDA
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
DPT Integration, the software version of the PBX must be P871F or higher.
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, you may not be able to utilize some
of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, call National
Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [116].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
c) The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created.
This version must be P871F or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized.
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
The required programming is now complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able
to communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD1232 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM)
from the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time
when programming the VPS.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 97
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Program [003].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those
ports.
•KX-TVS90 (2 ports): assign 1 jack
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [117].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: M: # #
c) Enter the jack number (2-8) of the port you will use for the Voice Mail.
d) Press STORE.
e) Press END (HOLD) when finished.
5. Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering.
System Program [118] (Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) is automatically
set. This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions, this enables you to assign
extension numbers to each port. You can assign any extension number that is not already
assigned to another port. To reach the VPS, users dial these extension numbers. It is not
necessary to change the default programming for the extensions 295 and 296.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [118].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM NO?
c) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM-1: #_ _ -1: 295
( _ _ = the port number you entered in program 117)
d) Enter the extension number that you want this port to have.
(The default extension number for port 1: 295; port 2: 296)
e) Press STORE.
f) Repeat steps c, d, and e until all extension numbers are entered.
Conditions: Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port. A jack
programmed as a Manager Extension (System Program
[006]) cannot be used in this program.
Conditions: No 2 jacks on the system can have the same extension
number. If you try to enter a number that is already
assigned, you will hear an error tone. Each digital
extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail ports and
must have 2 different extension numbers assigned.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
98 Installation Manual
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
8. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System, resulting in a
loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and User 2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•The Power Indicator light goes on.
•The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
•The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the ports until
"1...2...3..." is displayed.
•Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3...
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 99
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not Established"
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3]
then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration
Instructions.
Table 18
Cause Remedy
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default
PBX type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232/
TD308 under DPT Integration), this message
will always appear when connecting to another
type of PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the
proper software level to support APT/DPT
Integration.
Contact National Parts Center
at 1-800-833-9626
or use Inband Integration under
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support
APT/DPT Integration.
Do required integration
programming as described in
this chapter.
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
100 Installation Manual
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [295]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD308 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD308 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 101
4.5 COMMON DIGITAL INTEGRATION
FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES
The following features can be used on any KX-T proprietary telephone (7000 series analog;
7200/7400 series digital). KX-T7000 series is used with the KX-TA624. The KX-T7200 and
KX-7400 series are used with the KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration.
4.5.1 Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming
LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes. The notification method is
programmable for hands-free or private. Hands-free allows the user to monitor a recording
through the speakerphone and, if desired, intercept the call by lifting the handset. The private
mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded. By pressing the
LCS button, the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off-hook. System
Programming or PC Programming (only available for KX-TD500 users) also determines
whether the mailbox continues to record after the user intercepts the call.
4.5.2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment
To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have the
LCS button lit. To light this button on the telephone, press the LCS button, then enter the
password. This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the
messages as they are being left. (It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate this
feature.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number [77 ] (for KX-TA624) or [799] (for KX-T series PBX that uses
DPT Integration) from system program.
3. For KX-TA624
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) twice and #.
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) twice.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: The 3-digit password you entered is displayed.
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
102 Installation Manual
4.5.3 Live Call Screening Password Canceling
To cancel the password, follow the procedure below. (It is not necessary to enter PITS
Programming to activate this feature).
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number [77 ] (for KX-TA624) or [799] (for KX-T series PBX that uses
DPT Integration) from system program.
3. For KX-TA624
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) once and #.
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) once.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: Password Cancel
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.5.4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System
Programming
This program allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the
extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter [620] (for KX-TA624) or [610] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration)
from system program.
2. Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Jack No.?
3. Enter the jack number.
Screen output: # _ _ :Stop Rec
(_ _ = the jack number you entered)
4. Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) until the desired selection is displayed.
5. Press STORE.
6. Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
7. Repeat the steps 4 to 6 until all jacks are programmed.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 103
4.5.5 Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment via
Station Programming
This program assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox. It
determines whether an alert tone is sent or whether the recorded message is played through the
built-in speaker of the extension. The default mode is hands-free. (This is a station level
program and should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Dial the code for the mode you want this telephone to have.
Hands-Free = Press #11 (for KX-TA624) or [71] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT
Integration).
Private = Press #12 (for KX-TA624) or [72] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT
Integration).
Screen output: Hands-Free or Private
3. Press STORE.
4. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
For the KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration:
A single-line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone can
also be used to monitor an incoming message. Be sure that Live Call Screening on the
connected proprietary telephone has been activated. This feature is useful when you are using
a cordless telephone. The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being
recorded. To intercept the call, flash the hook.
Conditions: None
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
104 Installation Manual
4.5.6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TD500 users can program Live Call Screening features via PC programming. Follow
the procedure below to assign each feature.
1. Go to "4-2 Extension Line" screen.
Screen output:
2. Select the "Card No." and "Port No." which you are going to program.
3. In "LCS Settings":
a) To set LCS Password, Enter a 3-digit number (using "0-9") in "LCS Password".
Note
To cancel the password, erase the 3-digit number
b) To assign LCS Recording Mode, Set "Recording Mode" to "Keep Rec" or "Stop Rec".
c) To assign LCS Private/Hands-free Mode, Set "Operation Mode" to "Private" or
"Hands-free".
d) To activate the LCS status, Set "Status" to "Active".
Note
To utilize the Live Call Screening features, it is necessary to first assign the LCS
Password and LCS Button (see 4.5.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming), and
then activate the LCS status.
4. Click "Apply".
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each extension.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 105
4.5.7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have an LCS
button lit at the time of the message reception. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key
with a lamp. Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button on an extension. (This is a
station level program and should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.12 Button Assignment via
PC Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired FLEXIBLE (CO or DSS/BLF) button you want to assign as the LCS
button.
3. Dial [92].
Screen output: LCS
4. Press STORE.
5. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.5.8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station
Programming
This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Live Call
Screening Cancel button.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.12 Button Assignment via
PC Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
106 Installation Manual
2. Press the Flexible (CO, DSS) button that you wish to assign as a Live Call Screening
Cancel button.
3. Dial [93].
Screen output: LCS Cancel
4. Press STORE. The STORE indicator light turns on.
The display shows the initial programming mode.
5. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional; Live Call Screening can also
be canceled by Pressing the FLASH button.
4.5.9 Two-Way Recording Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Two-Way Recording feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWR
button on it. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a TWR button on an extension. (This is a station level program and should be
done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.12 Button Assignment via
PC Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the Flexible button (CO or DSS/BLF) that you want to assign as the TWR button.
3. Dial [90].
Screen output: 2Way-Rec:
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2Way-Rec: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press Store.
6. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 107
4.5.10 Two-Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Two-Way Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWT
button on it. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a TWT button on an extension. (This is a station level program and should be
done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.12 Button Assignment via
PC Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired FLEXIBLE (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the
TWT button.
3. Dial [91].
Screen output: 2Way-Trans:
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2Way-Trans: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions: This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a TWR button. If this key is pressed
when all Voice Mail ports are busy, the user will hear a
reorder tone.
Conditions: This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a TWT button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will hear
reorder tone.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
108 Installation Manual
4.5.11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station
Programming
This feature allows an extension user to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox. This is
available with both Digital and Inband Integrations.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.12 Button Assignment via
PC Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the VTR
button.
3. Dial [94] (for KX-TA624) or [8] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration).
Screen output: VTR
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: VTR-_ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.5.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TD500 users can assign buttons via PC programming. Follow the procedure below to
assign each button.
1. Go to "4-2 Extension Line" screen (refer to the screen image in 4.5.6 Live Call
Screening Assignment via PC Programming).
2. Select the "Card No." and "Port No." which you are going to program.
Conditions: This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a VTR button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will hear
reorder tone.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 109
3. Click "CO Key" in the upper right corner. "Flexible CO Key" screen (for all CO Keys)
displays.
Screen output:
4. Click the Key Number to which a button will be assigned.
"Flexible CO Key" screen displays.
Screen output:
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
110 Installation Manual
5. Select the desired Key Type. When 2WAY-REC, 2WAY-TRN, or VTR is selected, enter
the extension number in "DN".
Example screen output:
6. Click "OK". "Flexible CO Key" screen (for all CO Keys) displays again.
7. Click "OK". "4-2 Extension Line" screen displays again.
8. Click "OK" or "Apply".
9. Repeat these steps for each extension.
4.5.13 Live Call Screening Activation
To activate the Live Call Screening status, follow the steps below.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.5.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Press the assigned LCS Button.
2. Press the assigned LCS Password.
3. Confirm the assigned LCS Button is red-on.
4. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions: To activate the Live Call Screening features, it is
necessary to light the LCS button after assigning the
LCS password and LCS button.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
Installation Manual 111
4.5.14 Live Call Screening Password Control
This feature allows Operator(s) and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS
at any extension. If a user forgets the preprogrammed password, Operator(s) and the Manager
of the PBX can cancel the LCS password.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Dial [#2] (for KX-TA624) or [03] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration).
Screen output: Ext NO?
3. Dial the desired Extension Number, or Press [ ] to remove all passwords (for KX-T
series PBX that uses DPT Integration only).
4. Press STORE.
5. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.5.15 Two-Way Recording into Mailbox
This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their mailboxes by pressing
the Two-Way Recording (TWR) button.
4.5.16 Two-Way Transfer into Mailbox
This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person's mailbox
by pressing the Two-Way Transfer (TWT) button and dialing the mailbox number. This is
commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants the
message recorded in the mailbox at the same time.
4.5.17 A Restriction on TWR/TWT Activation
If your PBX is a basic KX-TD500, you can have only 8 simultaneous activations of Two-Way
Recording and Two-Way Transfer, because the basic KX-TD500 supports only 8 three-way
conferences. However, if you add the KX-TD50104 TSW-CONF (TSW Conference
Expansion) Card to your PBX, then the PBX supports an additional 64 three-way conferences.
In this case, the PBX will not limit the VPS on Two-Way conversation recordings.
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD SERIES PBX
112 Installation Manual
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 113
Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
114 Installation Manual
5.1 STARTING UP
5.1.1 Before Programming
1. Determine the customer’s needs.
•Work with the owner, manager, and receptionist to build the Custom Service
Greetings and Holiday Greetings.
•Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings.
•Check the software level of the PBX.
2. Use "System Administration" and your personal computer for the startup sequence.
3. After the system becomes "on line", disconnect the CO lines going into the system until the
greetings have been completed.
4. Work with the receptionist to record the system greetings. These are listed in Appendix
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES.
•It is important to spend time training the receptionist. Making sure that the
receptionist understands the system and is capable of answering basic questions will
save you time in the end.
•Show the receptionist how to transfer "General Delivery Mailbox" messages. See
Appendix D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX.
5.1.2 Quick Setup
Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items. Each of these must
be initially set to start the VPS operation.
Notes
•Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software.
•Quick Setup cannot be performed in ASCII mode.
1. PBX type
2. Extension numbers of VPS ports
3. Extension numbers for mailboxes
4. Creating mailboxes
5. Port service setting
6. Password setting
7. Date and time setting
8. Activating the Quick Setup
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 115
Depending on your PBX type, some steps will be skipped as shown below.
* Not available in the United States.
5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup
The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect. If you press "\", you will have
to start over. Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data.
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit long.
At the System Administration Top Menu, Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then QSET
and Press ENTER. See 7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET) for more information.
Screen output:
Table 19
PBX Type Required Procedures
KX-T308/T616 12345678
KX-T123211D/T336/T96* 1345678
Non-Panasonic System 1345678
KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232/TD500/TD308 14568
Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems
This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate
in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system. The system will prompt you to enter, modify or
confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select.
By entering the appropriate information in the following screens, the system sets PBX
integration parameters, identifies the extension numbers connected to it, creates default
mailboxes, sets its ports to handle callers with automated attendant or voice mail service,
sets system passwords and sets the time and date. Finally, it confirms that you want to
activate the system based on the information you entered, modified or confirmed.
To proceed, press Enter. To exit and cancel Quick Setup now, press \ .
System Administration Top Menu
or
System Administration Top Menu
5
3 QSET
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
116 Installation Manual
1. PBX Type
a) Press ENTER.
Screen output:
b) Select your PBX type. The required steps are different for some models. Go to the step
indicated below for that type.
Notes
•APT Integration with the KX-TA624 will be activated automatically by selecting
"7. KX-TA series".
•DPT Integration with the KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232, KX-TD308, or KX-
TD500 will be activated automatically by selecting "5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/
KX-TA1232", "6. KX-TD308", or "8. KX-TD500".
•APT/DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time
and date by transferring extension and time information from the PBX
automatically.
2. Extension Numbers of VPS Ports
Screen output:
Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2-digit numbers. This improves the VPS
integration with the KX-T308 or KX-T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate between
VPS extensions and non-VPS extensions.
Table 20
1. KX-T308/616 Go to Step 2.
2. KX-T123211D, 3. KX-T96,
4. KX-T336, 0. Others Go to Step 3.
5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232,
6. KX-TD308, 7. KX-TA series, 8. KX-TD500 Go to Step 4.
Quick Setup - PBX type
Please select your PBX type.
1. KX-T308/KX-T616
2. KX-T1232
3. KX-T96
4. KX-T336
5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232
6. KX-TD308
7. KX-TA series
8. KX-TD500
0. OTHERS
Quick Setup - Assigned extension No. of VPS Port
Please enter extension number of VPS.
1: 2:
Please enter extension numbers.
(2 digits) : =
S: Next Screen
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 117
Type [S] to go to the next screen.
3. Extension Numbers for Mailboxes
Screen output:
Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes (the VPS accepts
any extension numbers within a 2- to 5-digit range). For example, to enter the extension
number 101, Press [101] and Press ENTER. You can also enter multiple extensions.
Enter the extensions from No.101 to No.110 by Pressing [101-110] and Pressing
ENTER.
The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered. (See Step 4.)
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Quick Setup - Enter Extensions for Mailboxes
What extensions need a mailbox on this system?
Please enter extension numbers.
: =
1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
6: 7: 8: 9: 10:
11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
21: 22: 23: 24: 25:
26: 27: 28: 29: 30:
31: 32: 33: 34: 35:
36: 37: 38: 39: 40:
41: 42: 43: 44: 45:
46: 47: 48: 49: 50:
51: 52: 53: 54: 55:
56:
61:
57:
62:
58: 59: 60:
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
118 Installation Manual
4. Creating Mailboxes
To go to the next screen (S) or to change the menu (P or N), the cursor must be in the
MBX column.
Screen output:
a) To create or discard mailboxes
In the "MAKE (Make/Delete)" field: Type [M] (Make) to create the mailbox; Type [D]
(Delete) to discard the mailbox. If there are more than 62 mailboxes, the first 62 of them
are displayed with "Make" and the rest are displayed with "Delete" (screen output:
[Assigned 62, Vacant 0]).
To change the status of a mailbox from "Delete" to "Make", first change the status of a
mailbox from "Make" to "Delete" (screen output: [Assigned 61, Vacant 1]). Then
change the status from "Delete" to "Make".
b) Owner’s last name
Up to 16 alphabetic characters can be assigned as an Owner’s Last Name.
Note
• Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen
Panasonic KX-TD Series or KX-TA1232 System
The same numbers as the extensions of the KX-T series system that uses Digital
Integration that were automatically transmitted to the VPS—Auto Configuration.
Other System
The same numbers as those of the extensions entered in step 3.
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Quick Setup - Mailbox Editing
Extension and mailbox list Assigned 62 Vacant 0 Page 1/4
Ext MBX Owner (Last Name) MAKE (Make/Delete)
• • • : 101 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Make
110 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make110
111 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make111
112 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make112
113 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make113
114 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make114
115 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make115
116 : • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make116
117 117: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •Make
• • •
• • •
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 119
• The length of mailbox numbers
The Message Manager mailbox (General Delivery Mailbox) might be 2- to 5-digit long
(98, 998, 9998, or 99998).
The System Manager mailbox might be 2- to 5-digit long (99, 999, 9999, or 99999).
If both 3 and 4-digit extension numbers exist at the same time, the VPS will unify all
mailbox numbers to 4-digit length by entering [0] at the end of all 3-digit numbers.
Example:
Note
After creating mailboxes for subscribers by Quick Setup, the COS parameter
"Authorization for Message Notification" (see Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS) for
COS number 1 will be set to "Yes". It will stay "No" for COS number 2 through
number 62.
To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner’s Last
Name (or First Name), see 5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES. The caller can use "Dial by
Name" feature using the Owner’s Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service or
Voice Mail Service.
Extension
Numbers
201
202
203
2000
2001
2002
*The VPS puts [0] at the end of 3-digit numbers.
Mailbox
Numbers
201(0) *
202(0) *
203(0)*
2000
2001
2002
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
120 Installation Manual
5. Port Service Setting
Screen output:
Incoming Call Services for all ports (Day/Night) can be defined by this setting. Default
values for all ports (Day/Night) are "Automated Attendant Service (Custom 1)". To
select other incoming call services, go to "Setting Ports".
6. Password Setting
Screen output:
You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset/Clear Password
in this screen, if necessary.
IMPORTANT
•We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum
protection against hackers.
•Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
•Please change the password periodically (for instructions, see 7.2.3 Set Password
(PASS) in 7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS.)
To go to the next screen without assigning the password, Press ENTER.
All ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard automated atten-
dant operation, day and night mode, using the Custom Service feature (Custom
1). You can change the operation to standard Voice Mail (Custom 2) or leave it
as automated attendant. If necessary, Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified
under the menu 'Program -> Service Setting -> Custom Service.'
Day Mode Night Mode
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
A: Auto. Attend., V: Voice Mail, S: Next Screen
Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1), Voice Mail (using Custom 2)
Quick Setup- Port Service Setting
PORT 1
PORT 2
Quick Setup-Password Setting
System Administrator Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
System Reset/Clear Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 121
7. Date and Time Setting
Screen output:
Enter the time (hour, minute in 2 digits, comma and A or P) and date (month, day and
year in 2 digits).
To go to the next screen, Press ENTER.
8. Activating the Quick Setup
Screen output:
To activate the Quick Setup, Press [1] and Press ENTER.
Note
To cancel the Quick Setup, Press [2] and Press ENTER. This cancels all changes
made up to this point.
The VPS begins to change system programming data.
Screen output:
Then "PORT TEST..." "SYSTEM SETUP..." and "1...2...3..." appear on the screen one by
one.
Screen output:
Screen output when Quick Setup is finished:
Quick Setup-Time Setting
Current time is 3:04, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Current date is MON JAN-1-2001
Enter new date (MM-DD-YY) : =
Quick Setup - Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select 'Yes.'
To cancel and exit, select 'No.'
1: Yes 2: No
Quick-Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select "Yes."
To cancel and exit, select "No."
1: Yes 2: No
Setup 101
PORT TEST ...
SYSTEM SETUP ...
1 ... 2 ... 3 ...
**ON LINE MODE**
>
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
122 Installation Manual
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Design each system according to the needs of your customer. You should be familiar with all
options for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect. Each port
can be assigned as Voice Mail, Interview Service, Automated Attendant, or Custom Service.
Custom Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the other
services by pressing one key. We recommend programming all ports as Custom Service
for caller convenience.
5.2.1 Custom Service Setting Example
Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail. Custom
Service offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location
quickly and easily.
Sample Company Greeting 1
"Thank you for calling ABC company". (Company greeting should be short!)
Sample Custom Service Message
"If you know the extension number of the person you are calling, you can dial it at any time.
For a list of extensions, Press [1]; to reach the sales section, Press [2]; to reach the service
section, Press [3]; if you would like to place an order, Press [4]; all other callers, please wait
and an operator will be right with you".
Sample Custom Service Tree
Create a tree to design a route that leads callers to the desired extension, mailbox, or next menu.
This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers.
Moreover, callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times. Discuss
available options with the customer before programming the system.
Custom Service
100
Main Greeting
all ports day
Custom 2
Extension List
Custom 3
Extension List
New Cars Used Cars
Transfer
to Service
Transfer
to Orders
Company Greeting
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 123
The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the
VPS. Then create a branch for each option until each caller option has been documented. Next,
fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily remember what action
corresponds to each keystroke.
Remember that it is possible and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another
custom service. For example, if someone presses [1] for sales, you might want another menu
to say "for new car sales, press [1]; for used car sales, press [2]". This way, callers are routed
directly to the person best suited to handle them.
Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages
If you are an airline or travel agency, your callers might not be fluent in English. You can easily
accommodate several languages with Custom Service. For example, each key on the keypad
(there are 12 keys) could be assigned to a language. Record Custom Service Menu 100 so that
the caller can select a language with one-touch dialing. For example, the top menu could be:
"For English, press 1. For French, press 2. For Spanish, press 3. For German, press 4. For
Japanese, press 5. For Chinese, press 6... etc." (of course, selections should be recorded in
their respective languages).
At the next level, create menus in each language for Day Mode. For example, Custom Service
Menu 2 (the one for English callers) might be: "For departure information, press 1. For arrival
information, press 2. For reservations, press 3. To leave a message, press 4. To send a fax,
press 5". Thus at this level (or at an even lower level) a caller can be guided in his native tongue
to the right person (extension), the right message-taker (mailbox), or the right device (fax
machine).
In parallel, create menus in each language for Night, Lunch, and Break Modes. For example,
Custom Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be: "Sorry, we are closed for the day. Our
regular business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. If you would like to
leave a message, press 1 now. If you would like to send a fax, press 2 now". Record a similar
message for the other languages in each mode.
5.2.2 Custom Service Features
Time Service (1-5-2-2)
Set each day of the week for the correct Day, Night, Lunch, or Break Mode.
Intercom Paging (1-5-7-7)
This feature is only available with Digital Integration.
When needed, change the paging code for each of the paging groups.
Example for KX-TD1232: All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in
system program [602]. No hunting type assigned in system program [106]. Assign each
salesperson’s mailbox to a different COS in the VPS and assign the paging group to that
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
124 Installation Manual
COS. (This tells the VPS which paging group to dial). In the Intercom paging section,
assign the number "333" to the paging group assigned to the sales dept.
Fax Management (1-5-7-8)
Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX. If the CNG tone is heard,
the VPS will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine. If the first fax machine is
busy or does not answer (is out of paper), the VPS forwards the call to the second fax machine.
This also allows to assign an extension as the fax manager to be notified on incoming faxes.
Disconnect Parameter (1-5-7-9)
Determines how many seconds of silence the VPS allows during a caller’s message before
disconnecting the call.
RS-232C Settings (1-6-1)
Allows the System Administrator to change the baud rate, parity bit, etc.
Port Setting (1-6-2)
Only to be used when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Use the
CPC control of the PBX for normal disconnect problems.
Dialing Parameters (1-6-3-1)
These parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted.
Most of the settings will be left unchanged. The only setting that will be changed quite often
is the Transfer Sequence for the operator or the extension. By default, it is set at FX on APT/
DPT Integration and FTX for Inband Integration. In other words, the voice processor dials the
flash, waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number. By default, the VPS will stay on
the line to monitor the status of the call. If the extension user answers, the voice processor will
announce "you have a call" prior to releasing the call. This can be alleviated by adding the
letter "A" or "D" to the sequence. "A" stands for answer; the call will be transferred without
the announcement "you have a call". For a blind or unscreened transfer, add the letter "D" for
disconnect.
5.2.3 Custom Service Programming
After you have finished constructing the tree, enter the System Programming Custom Service
Settings Menu.
Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence:
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 125
System Administration Top Menu:
The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit. Enter the desired number
(1-100).
The Custom Service screen is displayed:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Setting)
Enter The Number: = 2 (Custom Service)
2. Prompt Mode [ System ]
1:System 2:User1 3:User2 :=
3. Menu Repeat Cycle [ 3 ] (1-3 times) :=
4. Call Transfer Anytime [ Extn. ] (Extn./Mbx/No) :=
5. Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s) :=
6. No DTMF Input Operation [ c ] (a - f)
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
Select Operation :=
7. Keypad Assignment
Keypad 0 [ c ]
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
g. Voice Mail Service
Program - Service Setting - Custom Service Setting - Custom 1 (Not recorded)
1. Description [ ]
:=
h. Call Transfer Service
i. Subscriber Service
j. Department Dialing
k. Dial by Name
l. Repeat Menu
m. Main Menu
n. Fax Transfer
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
126 Installation Manual
Enter data into the Custom Service menu; use the table below as a guide.
Table 21
Description Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Specifies the language that the caller will hear when
calling this Custom Service.
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 Times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the Custom Service
menu will be repeated before the No DTMF Input entry
is used.
Call Transfer
Any Time
Extn./Mbx/No
(Extn.)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when
dialing an extension or mailbox number during the
menu. If this entry is set to "Extn.", the caller will be
transferred to the corresponding extension. If it is set to
"Mbx", the caller will be sent directly to the
corresponding mailbox. If it is set to "No", extension
transfer and mailbox transfer are disabled; only 1-digit
entries work (following the Custom Service menu).
Note: This parameter should be set to "No" when
Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service
option and it is desired that digits can be entered very
quickly to specify a mailbox. Therefore, in most cases,
"No" is the best setting for this parameter. This is
especially true if you do not want to explain "Call
Transfer Any Time" in your Custom Service menu
recording.
Wait for
Second Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu
choice within the Custom Service. If a second digit is
not dialed within the specified time, the menu choice is
used.
No DTMF
Input
Operation
a.-f.
(c.)
Used when a caller does not dial anything when hearing
the menu (usually rotary callers).
Keypad
Assignment
a.-n.
(=d, 0=c,
others=None)
Specifies the action to be performed when a keypad
digit is dialed. Callers can access specific services by
pressing the appropriate keys on their telephones.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 127
Keypad Assignment Options
Table 22
Entry Function
a. Transfer to Mailbox Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific
mailbox.
b. Transfer to Extension Transfers the caller to a specific extension.
c. Operator Transfers the caller to the operator.
d. Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller.
e. Previous Menu Returns the caller to the previous menu.
f. Custom Service Transfers the caller to another Custom Service and
plays the menu.
g. Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
h. Call Transfer Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant
Service.
i. Subscriber Service
Allows the caller to access Subscriber Service. Digits
received after entering this code are assumed to be the
subscriber’s mailbox number. If this option is
enabled, it is strongly recommended that each
subscriber establish a password; this will prevent
unauthorized callers from accidentally or
intentionally accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
j. Department Dialing Transfer the caller to the Department Dialing menu.
k. Dial by Name
Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a
last name of the person they wish to reach, then
transfers him to the corresponding extension.
l. Repeat Menu Repeats the Custom Service menu prompts.
m. Main Menu Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu.
n. Fax Transfer Allows the caller to send fax messages to the
extension specified as the fax extension.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
128 Installation Manual
5.2.4 Recording Menus
After you have finished entering the parameters in each menu, record the menu messages.
Menu messages inform the caller of available options and their corresponding keys. For this
reason, the prompts must match the programming that has been input.
Note
The Message Manager’s mailbox might be 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
1. Dial an Extension Number that is connected to the VPS to access the Message Manager’s
mailbox (998).
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 998] to enter the Message Manager’s mailbox.
3. Press [5] to modify messages.
4. Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
5. You will hear:
Enter the Custom Service prompt number [1] through [100].
To record Custom Service Exit prompt, press [0].
6. Enter Custom Service Number you want to record.
7. You will hear:
Custom Service number (entered number).
Record menu at the tone...
Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded, using the tree
that you created as a guide.
5.2.5 Checking Operation
After you have entered and recorded all menus, it is important to try the program yourself to
see that all functions perform properly. Dial into the system and try all the choices to see if you
are routed correctly. Verify that each menu choice works as it should.
5.2.6 Voice Mail
Voice Mail service is a message-taking service that allows non-subscribers to leave messages
to subscribers. This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live
person. This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired.
Callers can access Voice Mail service by:
•Voice Mail Port—This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports of
the VPS. Callers reaching these ports immediately access Voice Mail service.
•Voice Mail Trunk—This service can be programmed on a per trunk (CO line) basis.
Callers reaching these trunks (CO lines) immediately access Voice Mail service.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 129
•Service Access Command—A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialing [#6]
during a call.
•Via Custom Service—This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a Custom
Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Voice Mail service.
5.2.7 Mailbox Groups
This program allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at once. The message
activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones. These mailboxes may
be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The Message Manager can
record a voice label for each System Group Distribution List (see D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES). There are 20 group lists available, and each group list can have up to 20 entries.
To establish a mailbox group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-1-1]
(Program-System Parameter-System Group Assignment-Mailbox Group-Enter).
2. Assign a List Number to the Mailbox Group. This number can be from 2-5 digits (same as
mailbox numbers). This number must be an unused number. In other words, the number
assigned to this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution List
number or mailbox number. For example, we will use the number 250.
There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List:
Option A:
For inside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed so
that any subscriber can press [2] and then enter the list number (which is [250] in this
example) to deliver a message. The message will be delivered to all specified mailboxes.
Option B:
For outside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed as
a custom greeting for incoming callers. For instance, the greeting might be: "To leave a
message for the parts section, press 3". The digit "3" would be assigned to System
Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting.
Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the
individual station.
5.2.8 Extension Groups
An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox. These extensions may be
assembled into a list called a Extension Group List. The extensions in the group list cannot
have a personal mailbox! When a message is left in this mailbox, it lights all of the message
waiting lamps of the phones that are in this group list. There are 20 group lists available, and
each group list can have up to 20 entries.
When a message is left for the extension group, it will light the message waiting lamps on each
phone. The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
130 Installation Manual
phones. Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a specific
person (e.g., a Parts Center, Technical Support Group, etc.).
To establish an extension group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-2-1]
(Program-System Parameter-System Group Assignment-Extension Group-Enter).
2. Enter an Extension Group List Number that has not been assigned to another mailbox or
Extension Group List (this must be a vacant number). Enter the Extensions that are to be
assigned to this group list.
3. Enter the Extension Numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group List.
4. Return to the Main Program Menu.
5. Type [1-1-1]
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit).
Assign the Extension Group List Number to a mailbox. If you used the number "700" for
an Extension Group List number, assign the number "700" as a new mailbox. You must also
enter 700 as an extension.
Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation.
5.2.9 Interview Service
The subscriber can leave a series of prerecorded questions (up to 10) for the caller in an
Interview Mailbox. As the caller answers questions, answers are recorded in the mailbox. After
a caller records the answers, the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp. When
retrieving the messages, the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions.
There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox:
•Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox
•Assign a port as an interview mailbox
To structure an interview mailbox:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-1-1 Mailbox Number-1]
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit-Mailbox Number-Mailbox Setting).
2. Enter the Mailbox Number that is to be assigned to the interview mailbox.
This should be an existing mailbox number for the person who responds to the questions.
3. At "Interview Mailbox Number "parameter, Enter a Nonexistent Mailbox Number. This
will be the interview mailbox for this subscriber—please make a written note of it for future
reference. It will not show up in Mailbox Listing. If, at a later time, you want to delete the
interview mailbox, press backspace at "Interview Mailbox Number".
4. Exit System Administration Programming.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 131
5. Enter the subscriber’s mailbox and Record the Questions. Call the VPS and Press [#6 ]
then Dial the Mailbox Number assigned to the interview mailbox. From the Main Menu
Press [6-1].
6. Confirm that your questions have been recorded. Call the VPS and Press [#6] and the
Interview Mailbox Number. All your questions should be played.
Note
When using the Custom Service setting, 1 digit can be assigned to go to the mailbox
of the Interview Service. The mailbox owner’s message waiting lamp will go on for
normal Voice Mail messages and for message left in the separate interview mailbox.
5.2.10 Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an
extension number. It transfers the caller to the appropriate extension.
Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by:
•Automated Attendant Port—This service can be programmed independently of any or
all ports of the VPS. Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant service.
•Service Access Command—A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by
dialing [#8] during a call.
•Via Custom Service—The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit within
a Custom Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Automated Attendant Service.
Note:
When the VPS calls an extension, the VPS waits for a reply. This waiting time is established
by "Call Transfer No Answer Time" in Table 62 (B6.7 Other Parameters).
5.2.11 Department Dialing Service
Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 (one-touch dialing). As a guide for
the caller, the Message Manager should record the Department Dialing Menu—for example,
"Thank you for calling. For overseas travel, press 1. For domestic travel, press 2. For group
travel, press 3".
This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within Custom Service; after pressing this key,
the caller will hear the Department Dialing Menu.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
132 Installation Manual
5.2.12 Operator Service
This service (when enabled) can be accessed via:
•Voice Mail—Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General
Delivery Mailbox or Operator Service.
•Automated Attendant—Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service.
•Custom Service—The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a
Custom Service; after pressing this key, the caller enters Operator Service. Operator
Service can also be the destination of "no-DTMF-input".
Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator. Operator Service can
be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call, it goes to Operator 2. If that
fails, the call goes to Operator 3. If that fails, the caller can record a message. At each stage,
there are other options for busy cases and no-answer cases. Operator Service can be
programmed differently for Day, Night, Lunch, or Break Mode. Each operator can be assigned
a mailbox for message-taking.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 133
5.3 SETTING PORTS
5.3.1 Port Service Menu
Access the Port Service Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Screen output:
From Program-Port/Trunk Service-Port Service Menu:
Enter the data using the table below as a guide.
Note
In the table below, the sub-parameter "Prompt for Rotary Callers" is underlined. This sub-
parameter can be assigned only when "Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to "Selective".
Table 23
Description Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Company
Greeting No.
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Incoming Call
Service
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
[Notes]
•When you specify the Interview Service, one of
Subscriber's Interview mailbox numbers should also
be specified.
•When you specify the Custom Service, one of 100 (1-
100) Custom Service numbers should also be
specified.
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 3 (Port/Trunk Service)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Port Service)
Program - Port/Trunk Service - Port Service
Enter the Port Number (1-2) :=
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
134 Installation Manual
Incoming Call
Service
Prompt
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his choice, provided the Message Manager
has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the
System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection
Number in "System/User 1/User 2 Prompt Selection
Number" in Table 59 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
[Note]
•If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a
rotary caller or an External Delivery Message receiver
hears when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
Delayed
Answer Time
0-60 s
(0)
Specifies whether the port answers immediately (0) or in
delay (1-60 s).
Table 23
Description Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 135
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Automated Attendant parameters include: Department Dialing, Operator Parameters, and
Alternate Extension.
If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension (such as modem extension),
alternate extension should be assigned (see "Alternate Extension Assignment" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant Parameters).
5.4.1 Automated Attendant Menu
Access the Automated Attendant Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
5.4.2 Department Dialing
Department Dialing numbers (1-9) represent department extensions; the VPS will provide
these numbers to the caller in the initial list of prompts.
Return to Program-Service Setting-Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Setting)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Automated Attendant)
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting Menu
1. Department Dialing
2. Operator's Parameters
3. Alternate Extension
Enter The Number : = 1
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting - Department Dialing Menu
1. Department Dialing No.1 [ ] := 102
2. Department Dialing No.2 [ ] := 104
3. Department Dialing No.3 [ ] := 115
4. Department Dialing No.4 [ ] := 136
5. Department Dialing No.5 [ ] := 107
6. Department Dialing No.6 [ ] := 108
7. Department Dialing No.7 [ ] := 109
8. Department Dialing No.8 [ ] := 110
9. Department Dialing No.9 [ ] := 111
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
136 Installation Manual
5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters
If you enable operator service, you must set the following parameters: Operator’s Extension
and Mailbox Number, Coverage Modes, and Message Repeat Cycle.
Operator 1:
The default is set at "0" which coincides with the operator of the PBX. When a caller
tries to leave a message to the Operator 1, the message will automatically go to the
General Delivery Mailbox (GDM) by default.
Operators 2 and 3:
For KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TD500 and KX-TA1232, Operators 2 and 3 can be
assigned to a floating number that is assigned to a ring group.
Return to Program-Service Setting-Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter the data using the table below as a guide. The table below is for Operator 1 as an
example. Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3.
Table 24
Description Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator
Service
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
[Note]
•All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the
General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator
Service is disabled.
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting - Operator's Parameters Menu
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
3. Lunch Mode
4. Break Mode
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 137
Operator’s
Extension
1-5 Digits
(0)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
[Notes]
•The default setting (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature
and the Remote Call Forwarding Set feature.
When using these features, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
•The extension number must not be assigned
anywhere else (in particular, the extension must
not have a mailbox). Otherwise, you will get an
error message.
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 Digits
(998)
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a
message in this mailbox depending upon how the
Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes are
set.
Operator No
Answer Time
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered
within the time set, the VPS will offer other options
as defined by the "No Answer Coverage Mode".
[Notes]
•This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
•If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator
No Answer Time" to 15 s.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold
and the Operator 1 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option
specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to
the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 1 when
another call is waiting using the Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
Table 24
Description Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
138 Installation Manual
*: Note
In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s mailbox
when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
1. No input to Automated Attendant.
2. No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Input Operation" is set to "C.
Operator" in Table 53 in B5.2 Custom Service.
3. No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage" is set to
"Operator Extension" in Table 70 in B6.7 Other Parameters.
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the
"Operator No Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select*—Allows the caller to leave a
message or call another extension.
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to
Operator 2.
Message
Repeat Cycle
1-3 Times
(3)
Specifies the number of times that the VPS will
play the Automated Attendant top menu.
Table 24
Description Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 139
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5.1 Mailbox Setting Menu
Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 25
Description Value Range
(Default) Description/Function
The Extension
of the Owner
2-5 Digits
(None)
Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the
mailbox. Any valid number can be assigned.
Owner First
Name
Up to 16
alphabetic
characters
(None)
The Dial by Name feature uses the last name. Both will
be printed on mailbox report.
Owner Last
Name
Class of
Service No.
COS No.1-62
(1)
Defines a set of services available to each subscriber. The
Class of Services 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message and
System Managers. Most subscribers can be placed in the
same COS. Anyone who needs unclaimed messages
forwarded to a cell phone, beeper or another mailbox
would need to be in a separate COS.
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Mailbox Setting)
Program - Mailbox Setting Menu
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 1
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
140 Installation Manual
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Covering
Extension 2-5 Digits
(None)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when
Covering Extension is dialed or set under Incomplete
Call Handling.
Interview
Mailbox
Number
2-5 Digits
(None)
Used to permit mailbox owner to have an interview
mailbox. Must be an unused mailbox.
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, calls coming to the extension through
Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox without
ringing the extension. (Message Waiting Lamp will not
be turned on.)
Table 25
Description Value Range
(Default) Description/Function
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Notification Setting
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
3. 3rd Device
Enter The Number : =
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 141
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 26
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Dial Number Up to 32 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
Assigns a telephone or beeper number to Device 1, 2,
or 3. The subscriber can also specify the dial number
from his telephone.
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note: The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS and
"Type of Device" is set to "Beeper". The proper number
of "Pauses" must be inserted before the callback entry
code.
Important Note: When the VPS calls to an outside line
via a PRI (ISDN Primary Rate Access Interface) card of
a Panasonic PBX, please be sure to add "#" after the
telephone number (1112223333 in the example here):
Example: 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX#
Please contact your System Administrator for more
explanation.
Type of Device 1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Specifies the device to receive notification. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the
Dial Number (above). The subscriber can also specify
the type of device from his telephone.
Use Mode 1. Not Use
2. Continuously
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
telephone.
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
142 Installation Manual
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
No. of Retries 0-9 times
(0)
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received.
Busy Delay
Time
0-120 min
(3)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a busy condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
No Answer
Delay Time
60-120 min
(60)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a no-answer condition is received before making
another notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
Time Frame 1,
2
MON:
TUE:
WED:
THU:
FRI:
SAT:
SUN:
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
a.m./p.m.
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting
Notification service for 1 week for this device.
Note: These parameters are active only when "Use
Mode" is set to "Scheduled".
Table 26
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Remote Call FWD to CO
1. Telephone No.1 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.1 : =
2. Telephone No.2 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.2 : =
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 143
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
5.5.3 Deleting a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
5.5.4 Password Reset
To reset a subscriber's password, go to the Password Reset Menu. "Enter the Mailbox Number"
appears on the screen. Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset. "Enter the Mailbox
Number" appears again. Enter a new number, if you wish to reset more than one password.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Table 27
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Telephone
Number 1, 2
Up to 16 digits
(With the KX-
TD816/TD1232/
TA1232)
or
Up to 24 digits
(With the KX-
TD500)
(None)
Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO
line.
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
"".
Note: This feature is available with DPT Integration
only.
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Delete
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Are you sure? (Y/ N) : =
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Password Rese
t
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
144 Installation Manual
5.5.5 Mailbox Listing
This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit
long.
Enter The Number : = 4
Program - Mailbox Setting - Mailbox Listing
1: 101 2: 103 3: ---- 4: ---- 5: ----
6: ---- 7: ---- 8: ---- 9: ---- 10: ----
11: ---- 12: ---- 13: ---- 14: ---- 15: ----
16: ---- 17: ---- 18: ---- 19: ---- 20: ----
21: ---- 22: ---- 23: ---- 24: ---- 25: ----
26: ---- 27: ---- 28: ---- 29: ---- 30: ----
31: ---- 32: ---- 33: ---- 34: ---- 35: ----
36: ---- 37: ---- 38: ---- 39: ---- 40: ----
41: ---- 42: ---- 43: ---- 44: ---- 45: ----
46: ---- 47: ---- 48: ---- 49: ---- 50: ----
51: ---- 52: ---- 53: ---- 54: ---- 55: ----
56: ---- 57: ----
System Manager’s Mailbox No. :999
Message Manager’s Mailbox No. :998
61: ---- 62: ----
58: ---- 59: ---- 60: ----
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual 145
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers.
He should explain which service (Voice Mail service, Automated Attendant service, Interview
Service, or a Custom service) will play during the day, and what services will play during night,
lunch, and breaks. He should explain that outside callers are called "non-subscribers" because
they do not have mailboxes. VPS guidance prompts will assist non-subscribers in reaching the
extension or mailbox they need. He should explain the responsibilities of the System
Administrator, the Message Manager, and the System Manager—and how each can be
contacted (phone number and/or mailbox number).
The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers.
Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages. To
check messages (or change mailbox parameters) from an outside telephone, do the following:
As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message, Press code [# 6 ] and then the mailbox
number. For example, a subscriber who has extension 115 and mailbox 115 would press
code [# 6 115]. If the subscriber has a password enabled, the password must be entered.
If the subscriber forgets his password, he should contact either the System Administrator or the
System Manager. Either one can clear the password so that the subscriber can establish a new
password.
Explain the purpose of the General Delivery Mailbox. The Message Manager will periodically
check it, and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber.
Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists. They can be created by the System
Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers. In particular,
senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group Distribution Lists.
Twenty lists can be created, with 20 mailboxes in each list.
Finally, if Custom Service menus are used, subscribers should be encouraged to listen to these
menus often and make suggestions for improvement. Custom service is a very powerful feature
of the Panasonic VPS. Make the most out of this feature.
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
146 Installation Manual
FINAL SETUP
Installation Manual 147
Section 6
FINAL SETUP
FINAL SETUP
148 Installation Manual
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER'S MAILBOX (Mailbox
998)
The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system
messages. Please refer to D6 RECORDING MESSAGES to see the full array of recording
tasks. Follow the instructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user prompts.
Note:
The Message Manager’s mailbox might be 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
6.1.1 Accessing the Message Manager’s Mailbox
1. Enter an Extension Number that is connected to Voice Mail.
You will hear the initial prompt:
2. Press [# 6 9 9 8] to access the Message Manager’s mailbox.
You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set:
3. Enter the Message Manager’s Password (if programmed). Otherwise, you will hear the
Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
6.1.2 Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service
Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening.
Welcome to the Voice Processing System...
Enter your password, followed by a pound sign.
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To set station call forwarding, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
FINAL SETUP
Installation Manual 149
6.1.3 Company Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,1)
1. Access the Message Manager’s Main Command Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [1] to change the Company Greeting.
4. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
After you record the company greeting, it may be necessary to enter programming through
the terminal and set the company greeting assignment under the Port Settings Menu, Trunk
Service Menu and Holiday Service Menu. This tells the system what company greeting to
play on each port and trunk (CO line) group. A company greeting should be very short.
Example: "Thank you for calling ABC Company". It is not necessary to give any other
instruction within the company greeting because instructions will follow the company
greeting automatically. If Interview Service follows, explanations should be included in the
first question (work for the subscriber who maintains the Interview Service mailbox). If
Custom Service follows, explanations should be included in the first menu (work for the
Message Manager).
6.1.4 Recording the Company Name (Enter #6 998,5,2)
1. Access the Message Manager’s Main Command Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [2] to record the Company Name.
4. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Note
The company name is only played when the External Message Delivery feature is
used.
6.1.5 Custom Service Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,4)
1. Access the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
4. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Example: Custom Service Greeting: "Thank you for calling ABC Company. If you know
your party’s extension, you may dial it at any time during this message".
Note
FINAL SETUP
150 Installation Manual
This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port. The recording will
be played directly after the call is received.
6.1.6 Customizing User Prompts (Enter #6 998,5,6)
The customer may want to enter user prompts in place of the factory-provided system prompts.
To change the user prompts:
1. Access the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [6] to modify the User Prompts.
4. Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or Press [2] to change User Prompt 2.
5. Press [1] to change specified prompts, or Press [2] to change all prompts.
6. Enter the Prompt Number you want to change.
7. Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus.
Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process.
Note
Prompt 585: The system prompt is "This is the General Delivery Mailbox". You can
record User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as, "Thank you for calling ABC company. We
are currently closed, however, if you leave your name and phone number, we will
return your call as quickly as possible".
FINAL SETUP
Installation Manual 151
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The following steps complete the basic installation of the VPS. For each mailbox on the
system, a No Answer, Busy, and After Hours Greetings should be recorded, as well as the
Owner’s Name and Password. Please follow the steps below to set up the mailboxes
accordingly.
6.2.1 Recording Personal Greetings
•The No Answer Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox during business
hours.
•The Busy Greeting plays when the caller is told your line is busy and then selects to leave
a message in your mailbox.
•The After Hours Greeting plays whenever the caller enters your mailbox when the VPS is
in the Night Mode.
1. Dial the Extension Number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ] and Dial the Number of the mailbox for which you
wish to record Personal Greetings.
3. Enter your Password (if programmed), then Press [#].
You are now inside the mailbox.
4. Press [5] for Mailbox Management.
5. Press [1] to change the Personal Greetings.
6. Press [1] again to change the No Answer Greeting.
7. The system will then say: "No Answer Greeting is not recorded. Record greeting at the
tone".
8. State your Greeting at the tone.
Example: "Hi this is Tom. I am away from my desk right now but please leave a message at
the tone and I will return your call as soon as possible".
9. Press [1] when finished.
The system gives the options of reviewing, accepting, or erasing the message.
10. Press [1] to review the greeting.
11. Press [2] to accept the greeting.
12. The system will then play the menu for changing the No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal
Greeting and the After Hours Greeting. Record the Busy Signal Greeting as you did for the
No Answer Greeting.
13. Continue on to the After Hours Greeting and hang up when finished.
FINAL SETUP
152 Installation Manual
6.2.2 Recording the Owner’s Name
1. Dial the Extension Number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ] and Dial the Number of the mailbox to which you
wish to record the Owner’s Name.
3. Enter your Password (if programmed), then Press [#].
You are now inside the mailbox.
4. Press [5] for Mailbox Management.
5. Press [3] to change the Owner’s Name.
6. The system will say: "Owner’s name is not recorded. Record owner’s name at the tone".
7. State the Owner’s First and Last Name at the tone.
8. Press [1] when finished.
The VPS tells you the customer’s name.
9. Press [2] to accept.
TEST THE SYSTEM
Before backing up the system, call each extension to see that each port functions as it
should. Check for proper greetings and call transfers.
FINAL SETUP
Installation Manual 153
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
1. Choose the Utility Command. Type [SAVE], then Press ENTER. See screen output
below.
From System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 3 (Utility Command)
2. To start, Press [2] and then ENTER.
3. Press RETURN or ENTER.
Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example.
4. Select Receive File from the Transfer Menu.
5. Specify a folder where data is to be saved (if necessary, use "Browse").
6. Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data.
7. Click "Receive".
8. Enter desired filename and click "OK".
The file transfer screen appears and shows download progress. Download time will vary
depending on the communication speed and file sizes.
"SAVE Completed" will appear on the screen when the file has been saved. Continue
saving the other items as needed. It is not necessary to save the "Program" because it is
resident on the flash memory (Master) and cannot be altered. We do recommend all other
data be saved including User Prompt 1 and User Prompt 2 (if they have been recorded).
Notes
Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal) cannot be
$ SAVE
VPS Flash Memory Data Save ( VPS -> PC : Xmodem )
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4: User Prompts-1
5: User Prompts-2
6: Custom Service Menus
7: Personal Greetings
8: Company Greetings
Select No. : = 2
FINAL SETUP
154 Installation Manual
saved by the above procedure, only Caller ID numbers can be saved. When the saved
Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command, the following things should be
done:
•For System Caller Name Announcement, the Message Manager rerecords caller
names (see "Recording System Caller Names" in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES).
•For Personal Caller Name Announcement, subscribers rerecord caller names (see
4.12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber’s Guide).
User Prompt files are very large and can take 1 h to save. Store saved files in a safe area.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 155
Section 7
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
156 Installation Manual
7.1 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
Initializing the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system
parameters to their default settings. Throughout this section, menu selections are indicated as
"System Administration Top Menu-(Selection Number)". This means that the System
Administration Top Menu must first be accessed. On the first menu displayed, make the menu
selection corresponding to the first menu displayed. Repeat this process for each subsequent
menu when additional selection numbers are listed.
1. Go to the System Administration Top Menu
2. Type [4] for System Initialization.
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the "Mailbox No. Length" might be 2
to 5.
3. Type [Y] (this places the VPS in the off-line mode).
To initialize the system, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-4
1 : Program
2 : System Reports
3 : Utility Command
4 : System Reset/Clear
5 :Quick Setup (VT100 Mode Only)
Enter the number: =
System Reset/Clear Menu
1. Mailbox No. Length [3]
2. System Manager's Mailbox No. [999]
3. Message Manager's Mailbox No. [998]
Will you change the settings ? (Y/N): =
System Reset/Clear Menu
1. Mailbox No. Length [3] (2 - 5) : =
2. System Manager's Mailbox No. [999] : =
3. Message Manager's Mailbox No. [998] : =
Are these parameters acceptable ? (Y/N) : =
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 157
4. Type [Y] to start the system resetting.
5. When system initializing is complete, the following display will appear:
Note
The execution time for System Reset/Clear may differ each time it is performed because
of system capacity and system programs.
Generally, initialization will take about 2 min to accomplish.
System Initializing
•
•
•
>
** ON LINE MODE **
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
158 Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
In the Utility Command Mode, the System Administrator can access the functions described
below by entering the appropriate command at the "$" prompt, and Pressing RETURN.
To select the Utility Commands Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-3
Table 28
OFLN: Sets the system to off-line mode
ONLN: Sets the system to on-line mode
PASS: Sets the System Administrator’s password
TIME: Sets the system clock, date, and time
PSET: Specifies the reports printing time
ELOG: Displays device error log
SAVE: Stores a backup of the program or data in the flash memory
LOAD: Restores a backup of the program or data to the VPS
GPRN: Displays all of the VPS parameters
VERS: Displays the version of the program
CREP: Displays the keypad assignments, message recording status and the
tree-structure of a Custom service
CCLR: Clears a Custom service menu access count
MWL: Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the message
waiting lamp on the extensions
MRL: Sets the minimum recording length of a message
MPLT: Displays the user prompt recording status
HELP: Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands
QSET: Set up your VPS roughly so that you can use it quickly
LMON: Line Monitor
PUTD: Displays Touchtone Information
WCID: Wait for Caller ID
Utility Command (Type 'HELP' for command list.)
$
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 159
7.2.1 Off-line Set (OFLN)
Use the OFLN command to turn off the VPS Call Progression Mode. Set the VPS to Off-Line
Mode before deleting a mailbox, since this operation involves the updating of a large number
of related parameters.
Type OFLN, then Press RETURN. If no VPS ports are in use, the VPS will immediately
suspend the Call Progression Mode.
If any VPS port is in use, the VPS will display the following warning:
The following message indicates that the VPS is in the Off-Line Mode.
7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN)
Use the ONLN command to place the VPS in the Call Progression Mode.
Type ONLN, then Press RETURN.
7.2.3 Set Password (PASS)
Use the PASS command to create, change and clear system passwords. Valid passwords are
created using up to 10 characters; any alphanumeric character, [(space)], [.] and [_] can be
used.
IMPORTANT
•We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for maximum
protection against hackers.
•Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
•Please change the password periodically.
$ OFLN
** OFF LINE MODE **
*** Now line is used!! *** <WAIT>
** OFF LINE MODE **
$ ONLN
** ON LINE MODE **
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
160 Installation Manual
1. Type PASS, then Press RETURN.
2. To create a password or change an existing password, Go to Step 3.
To clear a password, Go to Step 4.
3. To create a password or change an existing password:
a) Type [1] or [2]
Note
When you press [2] to change the System Reset/Clear password, you should
type the current (OLD) password before entering a new one.
b) Type the password.
c) Type the password again for verification.
4. To clear a password:
a) Type [1] or [2].
b) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
c) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
Note
The password entered on the screen will not appear. The VPS does not
distinguish the capital letter from the small letter.
7.2.4 Set Time (TIME)
Use the TIME command to set the system date and time. A number of system functions require
that the system time and date be set correctly. These functions include message waiting
notification, external message delivery, call-retries-after initial-failure-to-connect, and
automatic deletion of messages.
Time Synchronization: If you have DPT Integration between the VPS and your PBX (latest
software version), the date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS whenever
the PBX sets the date and time. Also, this transfer occurs whenever DPT Integration is
established.
$ PASS
1: Administrator Password 2: System Reset/Clear Password :=
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION: =
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 161
1. Type TIME, then Press RETURN.
2. Type the current time.
3. Type the current date. For the year, type the last 2 digits.
Note
Enter the exact time and date. This command cannot be used when either the System
or the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature.
7.2.5 Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET)
Use the PSET command to issue system usage reports (Flash Memory Usage Report, Port
Usage Report, Call Account Report) at a specified time each day. A printer or data terminal
must be connected to the VPS at the RS-232C port for the reports to be printed or displayed.
1. Type PSET, then Press RETURN.
2. Type [1] to enable this function or Type [2] to disable it.
3. Type the time to print the reports.
Note
The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where you see the
following prompt:
$ TIME
Current time is 12:34, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Current date is MON JAN-1-2001
Enter new date (MM-DD-YY) : =
$ PSET
Report Print Out Service [ Disable ]
1 : Enable 2: Disable :=
Enter The Print Out Time (HH:MM, AM/PM) :=
>
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
162 Installation Manual
7.2.6 Error Log Display (ELOG)
Use the ELOG command to diagnose VPS problems. Selection of this command will display
an error log.
Type ELOG, then Press RETURN.
Note
The following tables display and explain the errors that the system can identify.
* = Port number (1-2)
Table 29 Device Error Log Indications
Indication Meaning
CPU MEM-GET CPU card software memory acquisition error.
CPU card is short of memory temporarily because
of too much traffic.
CLOCK Clock access error. Clock IC is out of order.
Check the hardware.
FLASH
MEMORY
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy) Flash Memory access error. If there is a sector that
often causes errors, check the flash memory.
xx : IDE error code
yyyy : read/write error sector number
DSP* SCAN DSP-SCAN error. DSP is out of order. Check the
hardware.
DSP* FIFO DSP/FIFO error. During the system is handling
calls, there is something wrong with DSP and
FIFO memory temporarily.
CPU APPLICATION (x) Application error. While the system is handling
calls, temporary application error occurs.
x: port number
COM. Communication error between CPU and DSP
DATA Process error of voice data
MEM. Memory error
PRG. Program error in CPU card
R/W Read/Write error of Flash Memory
$ ELOG
DEVICE ERROR TIME
JUL-14 2:00 PMMEM-GET1. CPU
JUL-14 2:00 PM2. CLOCK
JUL-14 2:00 PMDATA R/W (xx:yyyy)3. FLASH
MEMORY
JUL-14 2:00 PMSCAN4. DSP*
JUL-14 2:00 PMFIFO5. DSP*
JUL-14 2:00 PMAPPLICATION (x)6. CPU
* = Port number (1-2)
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 163
Examples of a terminal display when errors are generated:
Table 30 Error Indications at System Startup
Indication Meaning
ROM ERROR: Sum Error!! ROM checksum error.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Initialize
Error!!
Flash Memory initialization error.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: No
System!!
No system Flash Memory present.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Program
Load Error!!
Program could not be loaded from system Flash
Memory.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Program
Sum Error!!
Checksum error in program loaded from system
Flash Memory.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: System
Data Error!!
Error Loading of administrator data from system
Flash Memory.
SYSTEM ERROR: 1 Administrator data error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 2 Error loading of report data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 3 Clock error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 4 Mailbox data error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 5 Message data error (1).
SYSTEM ERROR: 6 Message data error (2).
SYSTEM ERROR: 7 Error loading of control data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 8 Error loading of voice prompt data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 9 Error loading of MWL control data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 10 Error loading of flash memory identify data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 11 Error writing of VBI chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 12 Error writing of BLK chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 13 Error loading of user prompt modify data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 14 Error loading of Class of Service data.
No CO lines are active!! No Port cards present.
COs are all disabled!! All Ports are malfunctioning.
APT(DPT) Interface Connection is not
Established.
Ports are malfunctioning for APT(DPT)
Integration because telephone lines are
disconnected or Integration with PBX is not set to
APT(DPT) integration mode.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
164 Installation Manual
7.2.7 Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE)
All system programming data and voice prompts can be saved in separate data files. To save
this data, connect a data terminal to the RS-232C port of the VPS. Save the files individually.
Execute the SAVE command for each data file. It will require several minutes to execute this
command for all the data selected. When performing this operation, always wait until the
process completion indication appears.
WARNING
Never save (back-up) and upload the "Program" without Panasonic Technical support.
The memory required to save each data component is indicated below.
Saving items 4-7 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages.
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus (Custom service recordings)
7. Personal Greetings (Subscriber greetings)
8. Company Greetings
Table 31 Error and Warning Indications During System Operation
Indication Meaning
FLASH MEMORY STORAGE SPACE IS
NOW EXCEEDING
80%...
80 % or more of the Flash Memory voice
message save area is used.
ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error Error loading of ASCII terminal control
program.
1. Program—approximately 1 Mbytes (See Warning above)
2. Parameters—approximately 0.4 Mbyte (System Configuration)
3. System Prompts—approximately 5 Mbytes (Do not save—prompts are
saved as defaults in the flash memory)
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 165
1. Type SAVE, then Press RETURN.
2. Select item to be backed up, then Press RETURN. The size of the file will be displayed.
3. Press RETURN.
4. Perform a Standard File Transfer. Set the data terminal to the receiving (Answer) mode
(Xmodem) and specify the backup filename. The specified data will be transmitted to the
data terminal.
Notes
•The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that
supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be canceled by Typing
[\] before entering the receiving mode. Once the receiving mode has been selected, use
the cancel command of the communication software being used.
•If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you SAVE at the
maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS (see
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters). Next, change the RS-232C setting of your data terminal
to the same speed.
$ SAVE
VPS Flash Memory Data Save (VPS -> PC : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Select No. :=
To start press 'RETURN'
- - - - - - SAVE Start!!
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
166 Installation Manual
7.2.8 Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD)
Use the LOAD command to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS. Execute this
command for each data file.
When performing this operation, always wait until the process completion indication appears
before proceeding.
1. Type LOAD, then Press RETURN.
2. Select the item to be restored to the flash memory, then Press RETURN.
3. Press RETURN.
When "CCC" appears, the VPS is ready for loading.
4. Set the data terminal to the sending (Call) mode (Xmodem). Then enter the backup
filename. Press ENTER. The backup data will be restored to the flash memory.
5. When the load to the VPS has been completed, power-off and restart the VPS.
$ LOAD
VPS Flash Memory Data Load (PC -> VPS : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Select No.:=
To start press 'RETURN'
- - - - - - Load Start!!
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 167
Notes
•The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that
supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be canceled by Typing
[\] before entering the sending mode. Once the sending mode has been selected, use
the cancel command of the communication software being used.
•If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you LOAD at the
maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS (see
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters). Next, change the RS-232C setting of your data terminal
to the same speed.
7.2.9 Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN)
Use the GRPN command to print all VPS parameter settings (output to screen). Use Ctrl-C at
any time to stop printing.
Type GPRN, then Press RETURN.
Note
This command is only valid when in the ASCII TERMINAL mode.
7.2.10 Program Version Display (VERS)
Use the VERS command to display the version numbers of the flash memory and main ROM.
Type VERS, then Press RETURN.
$ GPRN
0: All Parameters
1: Mailbox Setting
2: Class of Service Setting
3: Port/Trunk Service Setting
4: Service Setting - Auto Attn. Setting
5: Service Setting - Custom Service Setting
6: Service Setting - Caller ID Call Routing
7: System Parameter Setting - System Group Assignment
8: System Parameter Setting - Time Service, Holiday, Daylight Saving Time
9: System Parameter Setting - Prompt Setting
10: System Parameter Setting - System Caller Name Announcement
11: System Parameter Setting - Others
12: Hardware Setting
13: System Reset Clear Parameter
Please select : =
$ VERS
V.P.S. PROGRAM VERSION
MAIN FLASH MEMORY : VP21AA (4.12)
MAIN ROM : VP01AA (2.01)
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
168 Installation Manual
Note
The numbers are examples only. Your system will show different numbers.
7.2.11 Custom Service Report (CREP)
Use the CREP command to display the Custom Service menu access count, the keypad
assignments, message recording status and the tree-structure of the Custom Service.
Type CREP, Press Space, Enter the Custom Service number (1-100), and Press RETURN.
Custom [100]: Indicates that Custom Service No. is "100".
System: Indicates that "System" prompts are active.
Access: 9: Indicates that the callers have accessed this Custom
Service 9 times. This counter can be cleared. See
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear
(CCLR).
Custom [100] (System) (Access: 9 ) (Menu Msg. : None)
| < multilingual pick >
[N]- Xfer Mbx (998)
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- Custom [1] (System) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
| | <English service>
| [N]- Operator
| [0 ]- Operator
| [1 ]- A.A. Service
| [2 ]- V.M.Service
| [3 ]- FAX Transfer
| [ ]- Subscriber
[2 ]- Custom [2] (User -1) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
| | <French service>
| [N]- Operator
| [0 ]- Operator
| [1 ]- A.A. Service
| [2 ]- V.M.Service
| [3 ]- FAX Transfer
| [ ]- Subscriber
[3 ]- Custom [3] (User -2) (Access: 3) (Menu Msg. : None)
| | < Vietnamese service>
| [N]- Operator
| [0 ]- Operator
| [1 ]- A.A. Service
| [2 ]- V.M.Service
| [3 ]- FAX Transfer
| [ ]- Exit
[4 ]- Dept Dial
[5 ]- Repeat Menu
[ ]- Exit
[# ]- Main Menu
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 169
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR)
Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has
been accessed. This command clears this counter.
Type CCLR, Press Space, and Enter Custom Service Menu (1-100), then Press RETURN.
Note
Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Services.
7.2.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL)
Use the MWL command to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the
Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension. Apply this setting when a PBX other than the
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system is used.
Note
This setting is not valid if "Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message" is set to "Yes".
Menu Msg. :None: Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service
is "None (not recorded)". If menu message is recorded,
"Rec" will appear.
[N]-Xfer Mbx (998): Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox (GDM)
if he dials nothing.
[1]-Custom [1]: Custom Service 1 will play when the "1" key is pressed.
[2]-Custom [2]: Custom Service 2 will play when the "2" key is pressed.
[3]-Custom [3]: Custom Service 3 will play when the "3" key is pressed.
[4]-Dept Dial: Department Dialing menu will play when the "4" is
pressed.
$ CCLR 20
Custom Menu <20> Access Counter Cleared !!
$ MWL
Current Setting of M.W.L. Retry Count is 3
Enter M.W.L. Retry Count (1-3) =
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
170 Installation Manual
7.2.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL)
Use the MRL command to specify the minimum message recording length (0-3 s). Messages
shorter than the specified minimum recording length are discarded from the mailbox.
Note
The minimum recording length can only be set using this command.
1. Type MRL, then Press RETURN.
2. Type the message length.
7.2.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT)
Use the MPLT command to display the user prompt recording status: recorded, not recorded,
or turned off.
1. Type MPLT, then Press RETURN.
MPLT —> both prompts
MPLT 1 —> User 1 prompts
MPLT 2 —> User 2 prompts
$ MRL
Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2
Enter Minimum Recording Length (0-3) =
$ MPLT 1
***List of Registered User Prompt 1 No. ([1], [2], . . ., [914])***
*** Total number of Registered = 3 ***
*** Total number TURNED OFF = 2 ***
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
1,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
5*,
,
,
,
,
,
,
6,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
OFF
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 171
Note
The "Total Number of Registered" shown at the bottom of the screen does not include the
prompts that have been turned off.
7.2.16 Utility Command List (HELP)
Use the HELP command to display the list of all available utility commands.
1. Type HELP, then Press RETURN.
Blank: The prompt has not been recorded (but the default
[System Prompt] is active)—WILL BE HEARD
Prompt No.: The prompt has been recorded—WILL BE HEARD
Prompt No. with an*: The prompt has been recorded but is turned off—
WILL NOT BE HEARD
"OFF": The prompt has never been recorded and the default
prompt has been turned off—WILL NOT BE
HEARD
$ HELP
OFLN : System Off-line
ONLN : System On-line
PASS : Password setting
TIME : Time & Date setting
PSET : Report Print Out Time setting
ELOG : Device Error Log Listing
SAVE : VPS Program & Date Save (VPS —> PC : Xmodem)
LOAD : VPS Program & Date Load (VPS <— PC : Xmodem)
GPRN : Parameter Global Printing (only ‘ASCII Terminal’ mode)
VERS : Program Version Check
CREP [no.] : Custom Menu Information List
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100)
CCLR [no.] : Custom Menu Access Counter Clear
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100/0) (0: Clear All)
MWL : MWL Retry count Set (1-3)
MRL : Minimum Recording Length Set (0-3)
MPLT [opt] : Registered User Prompt No. List
[opt] : 1 —> User Prompt 1
2 —> User Prompt 2
None —> User Prompt 1&2
QSET : Quick Setup
LMON : Line Monitor
PUTD : DTMF Information Display (Don't leave enabled after
troubleshooting.)
WCID : Wait Time for Caller ID
$
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
172 Installation Manual
7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET)
Use the QSET command initially to setup the VPS very roughly when you use it for the first
time or after system initialization.
Note
Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software.
Type QSET, then Press RETURN.
7.2.18 Circuit Condition Display (LMON)
Use the LMON command to display the circuit condition every 1.5 s. To turn off this
command, enter [\].
The following circuit conditions may be displayed.
7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD)
Use the PUTD command to display the touchtones the VPS receives and sends.
In addition to the touchtones, the following will be displayed—the Incoming Call Service
(Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Custom, and Interview) entered by the caller and the time
periods that the ports are enabled.
Type PUTD. The VPS will remain in this mode until "PUTD" is entered again. The default
setting of this mode for all ports is "OFF".
"Ready" : Possible to serve
"Incoming Call" : Processing arrival service
"Outgoing Call" : Processing sending service
"DSP Reset" : Processing DSP reset disposition
"PT connect" : Processing PT connect disposition
"Error" : DSP Card is not loaded
$ LMON
No.:
1: Ready
2: Ready
Status
$ PUTD
Target Port : **
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 173
To change the mode from "PUTD" to "OFF", Type PUTD again.
Note
"*"means "enable" for the port. "0" means "disable" for the port.
To set the mode for only 1 port, Type PUTD and the port number.
Sample display:
WARNING
"PUTD" is a command originally used when troubleshooting. Do not use this command
for any other purpose. Do not disconnect the RS-232C connection while the "PUTD"
command is enabled. This could cause data overflow.
$ PUTD
Target Port : 00
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
$ PUTD 1
Target Port : 0*
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
$ PUTD
Target Port for Debug : * *
$
[1] DTMF:3
[1] DTMF:8
[1] A.Attend
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:6
[1] Voice Mail
[1] DTMF:1
[1] DTMF:0
[1] DTMF:1
[1] NonSub Svc
[1] * * *
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:9
[1] Thank you
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
174 Installation Manual
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID)
Use the WCID command to specify the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must wait for the
Caller ID after the VPS has received the incoming call from the PBX.
If Caller ID is not needed at all, set the waiting time to "0" to accelerate the VPS response to
incoming calls.
Type WCID, then Press RETURN.
$ WCID
WAIT TIME FOR CALLER ID (5 sec) [0-60 sec] : = 0
$
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 175
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating
status. The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed. The terminal or printer must
be connected to the RS-232C port. (The System Manager is also able to output System
Reports.)
The following 4 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To select the System Reports Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1
To clear the following 4 reports, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2
System Reports System Report Menu
1. Mailbox Assignments
2. COS Assignments
3. System Service Report
4. Call Account Report
5. Port Usage Report
6. Flash Memory Usage Report
7. Mailbox Usage Report
8. Fax Call Report
Enter the Number : =
System Reports System Clear Menu
1. Port Usage Statistics Clear
2. Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
3. Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
4. Fax Call Report Clear
Enter the Number : =
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
176 Installation Manual
7.3.1 Mailbox Assignments
The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the applied mailbox authorized
features and current parameter settings.
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit
long.
Note
An 'X' displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to "YES".
7.3.2 COS (Class of Service) Assignments
The COS (Class of Service) Assignments report provides information concerning all Class of
Service numbers.
For a complete explanation of COS parameters, please see Tables 40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
To select the Mailbox Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-1
COS: Class of Service
CExtn: Covering Extension IVMBOX: Interview Mailbox
AlTrf: All Call Transfer to Mailbox MN1st: Message Notification Device 1
MN2nd: Message Notification Device 2 MN3rd: Message Notification Device 3
Bep: Beeper Tel: Telephone
To select the COS Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-2
**Mailbox Assignments JUL-28-2001 11:30 AM **
MBOX Extn. Name (Fir/Lst) COS CExtn IVMBOX AITrf MN1st MN2nd MN3rd
510
511
512
520
521
522
523
2
2
16
1
1
21
32
601
602
603
--
--
--
--
621
611
612
-
888
-
642
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
---
Bep
Tel
---
---
---
---
---
Tel
Bep
Tel
---
---
---
---
---
---
Bep
---
---
---
201
202
203
310
320
410
421
JONE / DELY
SCHE /----------
MAY /-----------
JONE /----------
DAVE /---------
CLUS / ALCC
WHIT / BLUE
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 177
Note
An "X" displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to "Yes".
COS: Class of Service number GL: Personal Greeting Length
RtN: New Message Retention RtS: Saved Message Retention
Time
Ln: Message Length Time
(Un=Unlimited)
CaN: Maximum Message
CaT: Maximum Message Time
(Un=Unlimited)
RO: Message Retrieval Order
(L=LIFO, F=FIFO)
SI: Message Scanning with
Information
SP: Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting
CW: Use Call Waiting on Busy DM: Direct Mailbox Access
PG: Intercom Paging Group Pr: Prompt Mode (S=System
Prompts, U1=User 1 Prompts,
U2=User 2 Prompts)
RC: Remote Call Forward to CO DC: Delete Message Confirmation
CN: Maximum number of names
for Personal Caller Name
Announcement
GC: Play Personal Greeting for
Caller ID
CS: Caller ID Screening MN: Authorization for Message
Waiting Notification
ED (pr): Authorization for External
Message Delivery (Prompt
Mode)
(SY=System, U1=User 1,
U2=User 2, SL=Selective)
AF: Authorization for Auto
Forwarding
(mbox)=Mailbox No
(dl)=Delay Time
(md)=Forwarding Mode
(M=move, C=copy)
* * COS Assignments JUL-29-2001 11:30 AM * *
COS
1
2
3
63
64
GL
16
16
8
-
-
RtN
10
7
7
30
30
RtS
10
7
7
6
6
Ln
5
3
3
Un
6
CaN
10
10
10
100
100
CaT
10
10
10
100
100
RO
L
L
F
L
L
SI
N
Y
Y
N
N
SP
N
N
N
-
-
CW
N
N
N
-
-
MC
N
N
N
-
-
DM
N
N
N
-
-
PG
1
2
3
-
-
Pr
U1
U1
S
U1
U1
CN
30
30
30
-
-
GC
Y
Y
Y
-
-
CS
Y
Y
Y
-
-
MN
X
X
X
X
-
ED
X
X
-
-
-
(pr)
U1
U1
-
-
-
AF
-
-
-
-
-
(mbox/
-----
-----
-----
-
-
dl/ md)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RC
N
N
N
N
-
DC
N
N
N
N
N
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
178 Installation Manual
7.3.3 System Service Report
The System Service Report provides information about the VPS’s usable ports, trunk (CO line)
groups and Holiday Services. It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port and each
trunk (CO line) group (for Day, Night, Lunch and Break modes), each Holiday Service, and all
incoming and outgoing call services.
Trunk data (Trunks 1 and 2 are shown above) is shown only when 1 (or more) service mode is
not NONE. By default, all trunks for all modes are NONE.
7.3.4 Call Account Report
The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences (for accounting and
billing purposes). Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed
outgoing calls, the telephone numbers called, the call dates, and call duration times. When the
number of outgoing calling sequences reaches 64, the first 10 items are automatically sent to
the terminal. Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system’s
memory.
To select the System Service Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-3
V.M.: Voice Mail Service C.S.: Custom Service
A.A.: Automated Attendant
Service
I.S.: Interview Service
Grt: Company Greeting
** System Service Report JAN-4-2001 4:37 PM **
Port [Day mode] [Night mode] [Lunch mode] [Break mode]
Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv
1 1 V.M. 2 A.A. 3 V.M. 4 A.A.
2 1 A.A. 2 I.S.(700) 3 V.M. 4 A.A.
Trunk [Day mode] [Night mode] [Lunch mode] [Break mode]
Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv Grt Srv
1 SYS A.A. SYS V.M. SYS V.M. SYS A.A.
2 SYS A.A. SYS V.M. SYS V.M. SYS A.A.
[Holiday List]
Name of Holiday Start End Grt Srv Port Trunk
NEW YEAR'S DAY JAN-1 15 C.S.(100) 1-2 1-48
SPRING HOLIDAY MAR-24 APR-5 16 C.S.(99) 1-2 1-48
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 179
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to5-digit long.
7.3.5 Port Usage Report
The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port
traffic to be measured. The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and
outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port.
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
ED: External Delivery MN: Message Notification Rcv: Receive
Full-line Time: The total time that both ports were used simultaneously.
7.3.6 Port Usage Statistics Clear
Clears the Port Usage Report for use again.
To select the Call Account Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-4
To select the Port Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-5
** Call Account NOV-14-2001 3:40 PM**
MBOX:111
MBOX:116
MBOX:114
MBOX:118
MBOX:112
JAN-4
JAN-7
JAN-7
JAN-8
JAN-8
7:46
2:26
5:06
9:07
10:24
00:01:32
00:03:32
00:02:45
00:01:15
00:04:51
DIAL:91111111
DIAL:92222222
DIAL:93333333
DIAL:94444444
DIAL:95555555
PM
PM
PM
AM
AM
** Port Usage Report JAN-4-2001 7:46 PM**
FROM : : JAN-3-1999 9:53 AM
Port
1
2
Total
ED
8
4
9
MN
0
0
0
Rcv
84
21
105
Connect Time
02:10:19
00:18:54
02:39:13
Full-line Time 00:10:15
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
180 Installation Manual
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Port
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.7 Flash Memory Usage Report
The Flash Memory Usage Report indicates the amount of flash memory storage used and the
flash memory availability in minutes. It also presents the following statistics:
•The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last
clearing of this report.
•The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report.
•The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers, and expired and were removed
by the system since the last clearing of this report.
•The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last
clearing of this report.
Drive: Specifies the memory card. "1" is the MASTER memory card (factory provided). "2" is
the SLAVE memory card.
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
Cpy: Copy (Transfer) Del: Deleted Exp: Expired and Removed
To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-1
To select the Flash Memory Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-6
System Reports - System Report Clear - Port Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear port usage report data? (Y/N) : =
** Flash Memory Usage Report JAN-22-2001 8:30 PM **
Drive Avail Used (%)
1 120 min 0min (0)
2 240 min 0min (0)
FROM : : JAN-21-2001 10:20 PM
New Cpy Del Exp
MSGs 0 0 0 0
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 181
7.3.8 Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
The Flash Memory Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Flash
Memory Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.9 Mailbox Usage Report
The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage at specific mailbox. It
includes the number of recorded messages, the total amount of outgoing calling time, and
external message, message notification and group message delivery.
Note
Specify the range or the mailbox number. To obtain information on specific mailboxes from
No.200 to No.209, Type [20 ] and Press RETURN, or [200] [,] [209] and Press RETURN.
To clear the Flash Memory Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-2
To select the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-7
System Reports - System Report Clear - Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear Flash Memory usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Enter the Range : = 111
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
182 Installation Manual
Note
New MSGs, Received MSGs, and ED MSGs are current status indications. All else are
accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report.
7.3.10 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Mailbox
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report ED: External Delivery
MN: Message Notification IM: Interview message
GM: Personal/System Group Distribution List AF: Auto Forwarding
LD: Long distance call (8 digits or more)
Lcl: Local call (less than 8 digits) Rcv: Received
Del: Deleted Exp: Expired
To clear the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-3
** Mailbox Usage Report JAN-4-2001 7:46 PM**
MBOX:111 [JONE BLUE]
New MSGs 4
Received
ED
FROM : : JAN-3-2001 9:53 AM
Subscriber Access Time 00:00:40
MBOX Use Time 00:00:12 of 01:40:00 ( 1% Used)
ED MN IM GM AF
Feature Usage 11 31 20 14 22
MSGs 6
MSGs 0
LD Lcl Beep Extn.
Outcalling 6 13 0 28
(Time) 00:05:10 00:10:45 00:00:00 00:31:21
Rcv Del Exp
MSG Received 42 30 11
System Reports - System Report Clear - Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
Enter the Range : =
May I clear mailbox usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 183
7.3.11 Fax Call Report
The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax
signal. It includes the fax data receiving date, the port number used, and the fax transfer status
for up to 64 fax messages.
7.3.12 Fax Call Statistics Clear
The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Fax
Call Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
To select the Fax Call Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-8
FAX-1: Main facsimile machine FAX-2: Alternate facsimile machine
connect: Call was answered by the facsimile machine no-ans.: No Answer
To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-4
** Fax Call Report NOV-14-2001 3:50 PM**
[DATE/TIME] [PORT] [FAX-1] [FAX-2]
JAN-11 11:15 AM 1 connect
MAR-01 07:58 PM 2 (busy) (no-ans.)
MAR-01 10:23 AM 1 (busy) connect
System Reports - System Report Clear - Fax Call Report Clear
May I clear fax call report data ? (Y/N) : =
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
184 Installation Manual
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 32
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Nothing is heard from the
VPS when accessing the
VPS.
•Improper connection of jacks.
•Bad connection with PBX.
•Confirm that you are using the
correct extension number for
the VPS. Ask your System
Administrator.
•Check if the jacks of the VPS
are connected to the proper
jacks of the PBX (see
1.4 DIGITAL
INTEGRATION).
•Check the System Program
[130] of the KX-TA624 to see if
the programming agrees with
the actual connection.
•Check the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port
Assignment" screen of the KX-
TD500, or System Program
[117] of other KX-T series
telephone systems that use DPT
Integration to see if the
programming agrees with the
actual connection.
Unable to utilize some of the
DPT Integration features,
even though DPT
Integration has been
established properly.
•Your PBX cannot support the
feature.
•The software version of your
PBX is lower than required.
•Call National Parts Center at
1-800-833-9626.
The VPS does not operate. •Bad printed circuit board.
•Bad connection with PBX.
•Incomplete card insertion.
•Change the printed circuit
board.
•Check the connection between
the VPS and PBX.
•Insert the card firmly into the
card slot.
Dialing is not registered. •A pulse phone is being used by
mistake.
•Improper setting of integration
mode.
•Change to a touch tone phone.
•Adjust the integration mode
properly between the VPS and
your PBX (see "Integration
Mode" in Table 73 in
B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 185
Line disconnection occurs
while transferring an outside
call.
Unable to transfer an outside
call.
•Improper setting of the
sequence.
•Improper setting of the
hooking time.
•Improper setting of the CPC
signal.
•Adjust the transfer sequence to
that of the connected PBX and
reset (see "Operator Transfer
Sequence" and "Extension
Transfer Sequence" in Table 75
in B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
•Adjust the hooking time to that
of the connected PBX and reset
(see "Flash Time" in Table 71
in B7.2 Port Setting).
•Adjust the CPC signal to that of
the connected PBX and reset
(see "CPC Signal" in Table 71
in B7.2 Port Setting).
Unable to call an outside
party.
•Improper setting of the outside
call dial procedure.
•Reset the CO line access
sequence of the connected PBX
(see "Dial Number" in Table 38
in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES and "Number of
Digits to Access Outside Line"
in Table 62 in B6.7 Other
Parameters).
•Also check "Outgoing Call
Setup Sequence" in Table 62 in
B6.7 Other Parameters).
•When setting a Dial Number for
Device Notification or a
telephone number for External
Message Delivery, keep in
mind the "Important Note" for
"Dial Number" in Table 38 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
Unable to call an extension. •Improper setting of extension
numbering plan.
•Adjust the extension numbering
plan properly (see "Numbering
Plan 1-16" in Table 61 in
B6.7 Other Parameters).
Table 32
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
186 Installation Manual
Unable to access the
mailbox.
•Improper setting of the
mailbox number.
•Readjust the number of digits in
the mailbox number (see
"Mailbox Number" in Table 36
in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES).
Unable to access to Operator
1
•Improper setting of the
operator extension number.
•Adjust the operator extension
number to that of the connected
PBX (see "Operator's
Extension" in Table 45 in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters).
Connected terminal (RS-
232C port) does not operate.
•Improper connection.
•Improper setting of the
parameter.
•Be sure you are using a null
modem cable (see
2.7 TERMINAL
CONNECTION).
•The terminal and VPS should
have the same parameter
settings for Baud Rate, Word
Bit Length, Parity and Stop Bit
Length (see B7.1 RS-232C
Parameters).
Unable to make
reconnection when the line is
busy.
•Improper setting of the busy
signal reconnection procedure.
•Readjust the busy signal
reconnection procedure to that
of the connected PBX (see
"Reconnect Sequence on Busy"
in Table 75 in B7.3 PBX
Interface Parameters).
Unable to make a no-
response reconnection.
•Improper setting of the no-
response reconnection
procedure.
•Readjust the no-response
reconnection procedure to that
of the connected PBX (see
"Reconnect Sequence on No
Answer" in Table 75 in
B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Unable to generate a call
waiting tone from the VPS.
•Improper setting of sequence. •Adjust the Call Waiting
sequence to that of the
connected PBX (see "Call
Waiting Sequence" in Table 75
in B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Table 32
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual 187
Unable to make an Intercom
Paging for groups.
•Improper setting of the
Intercom Paging access code.
•Adjust the Intercom Paging
access code to that of the
connected PBX (see "Paging
Code for Group 1-16" and
"Paging Code for All Groups"
in Table 67 in B6.7 Other
Parameters).
Table 32
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
188 Installation Manual
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Table 33
Port: 2 Digital/Analog ports
Dialing Method: Touchtone/Pulse (10/20 pps)
Flash Time: 100 ms/300 ms/600 ms/900 ms (programmable)
CPC Detection None/6.5 ms/150 ms/300 ms/450 ms/600 ms (programmable)
Type of Line: Loop start minimum Loop Current: 20 mA
minimum Line Voltage: 7 V DC
minimum Ringing Voltage: 40 V AC
Extension Numbering: 2 to 5 digits (programmable)
Pause Time: 1 s to 9 s (programmable)
Message Waiting Lamp: Programmable Touchtone sequence
Main CPU: 16-bit microprocessor
Flash Memory Capacity: Approximately 6 h (non-expandable)
Number of Mailboxes: Maximum 64
(including System Manager and Message Manager mailboxes)
Number of Messages: Maximum 100 per mailbox (programmable)
Personal Greeting Message
Length:
8 s to 60 s (programmable)
Message Retention Time: 1 to 30 days or unlimited (programmable)
Maximum Message Length: 1 min to 6 min, or unlimited length (programmable)
Reports: Mailbox Assignment, COS (Class of Service) Assignment, System
Service Report, Call Account Report, Port Usage Report, Flash
Memory Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report, FAX Call Report
Connections Telephone Line: Modular connectors 2
•In case of Inband, 2-conducotor wire 2
•In case of APT, 4-conducotor wire with APT Interface 2
•In case of DPT, 4-conducotor wire with DPT Interface 1
Data Port: RS-232C interface port
Environmental Requirements: 0 °C to 40 °C {32 °F to 104 °F}, 10 % to 90 % relative humidity
Power Source: 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power Consumption: Approximately 10 W
Dimensions (H W D): 173 mm 318 mm 65 mm {6-13/16" 12-1/2" 2-9/16"}
Mass (Weight): Approximately 1.2 kg {2.7 lb.}
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 189
Appendix A
SYSTEM FEATURES
SYSTEM FEATURES
190 Installation Manual
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the System
Administrator, the System Manager, and/or System Subscribers. The Table 34 lists and briefly
describes each key VPS system feature. In addition, references to specific sections of this
manual and the Subscriber's Guide are provided in the references column that pertains to each
feature listed. The specific procedure steps required to initiate, access, or utilize each feature
are detailed at these references.
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may not be
able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
Alternate Extension
Group
a group of extensions, which require a
different call transfer sequence than normal,
placed into a separate group.
•See "Dialing Parameters" in
3.2.4 PBX Interface
Parameters.
•See "Alternate Extension
Assignment" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
•See "Alternate Extension
Group" in Glossary.
APT Integration is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
sent to the VPS from the PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Auto Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing,
Caller Name Announcement (System/
Personal), Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom
paging, Live Call Screening, Personal
Greeting for Caller ID Two-Way Recording,
Two-Way Transfer.
•See "VOICE MAIL" in
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems
are Compatible?.
•See 1.4.1 General.
•See 1.4.2 APT Integration.
•See 1.4.3 Connection
Example—APT Integration.
•See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
•See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signaling?
•See INTEGRATING THE VPS
WITH THE PANASONIC KX-
TA SERIES PBX AND KX-TD
SERIES PBX.
•See "APT Integration" in
Glossary.
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 191
Auto Configuration
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
creates mailboxes by obtaining extension
numbers from the Panasonic KX-TA624 or
other KX-T series telephone system that uses
DPT Integration.
Also sets the time and date automatically by
obtaining time information from the PBX.
•See "System Components" in
1.3.2 System Components.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See "Creating Mailboxes" in
5.1.3 Starting the Quick
Setup.
•See "The length of mailbox
numbers" in 5.1.3 Starting the
Quick Setup.
•See "Auto Configuration" in
Glossary.
Auto Forwarding moves or copies unretrieved messages from
one mailbox to another, after a specified
period of time. This service is only available
to subscribers (you cannot auto forward
messages to the System Group Distribution
Lists). Class of Service programming
determines the mailboxes that can use this
feature. Messages marked as "private" cannot
be forwarded. Also, a message is never
forwarded to the original sender of the
message.
•See "Private Message" in this
Table.
•See "Authorization for Auto
Forwarding" in Table 40 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Auto Forwarding" in
Glossary.
Automated
Attendant
answers incoming calls and routes those calls
to the desired extension. The service can be
assigned to all of Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break time periods. Available for both Port
and Trunk Services.
•See 5.2.10 Automated
Attendant.
•See 5.4 AUTOMATED
ATTENDANT
PARAMETERS.
•See B5.1 Automated
Attendant Parameters.
•See "Automated Attendant" in
Glossary.
Broadcasting
Messages
permits the System Manager to deliver the
same message to all VPS subscribers at the
same time.
This feature is only available to the System
Manager.
•See "Delivering Messages to All
Mailboxes (Broadcasting
Messages)" in
C8 DELIVERING
MESSAGES.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
192 Installation Manual
Busy Coverage
Mode
specifies how the VPS will handle calls to the
operator when the line is busy. The Busy
Coverage options that are available include:
Hold, No Answer Coverage, Call Waiting,
and Disconnect Message.
•See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
Table 24 in 5.4.3 Operator’s
Parameters.
•See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
Tables 45, 46 and 47 in
B5 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SERVICE SETTINGS.
Call Services include a series of both incoming and
outgoing call services.
Incoming Call Services: Automated
Attendant Service, Voice Mail Service,
Interview Service, Custom Service.
Outgoing Call Services: Message Waiting
Notification, and External Message Delivery.
•See "Port Service Setting" in
5.1.3 Starting the Quick
Setup.
•See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table 23 in 5.3.1 Port Service
Menu.
•See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table 42 in B4.1 Port
Assignment.
•See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table 43 in B4.2 Trunk Group
Assignment.
Call Transfer Status permits subscribers to specify how the VPS
will handle calls to their individual
extensions. Call Transfer Status options
include: Call Screening, Call Blocking,
Intercom Paging, and Calling a Beeper.
•See "Calling a Beeper" and
"Intercom Paging (APT/DPT
Integration Only)" in this Table.
•See "Call Transfer" in Glossary.
•See 4.1 Call Transfer Status in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 193
Callback Number
Entry
enables the caller to leave a callback number
in several different ways depending upon
which option is programmed into the VPS.
The VPS can forward the callback number to
a beeper.
•See "Notification Setting" in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode" in Tables 40 and 41 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Other Parameters-Message
Waiting Notification" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Caller ID Call
Routing
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
allows the System Administrator to assign up
to 120 Caller ID numbers and program the
route for the calls from these assigned
numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
(System Group Distribution List included) or
Custom Service.
The Company Greetings will not play when
calls are routed as programmed by this
feature.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See B5.3 Caller ID Call
Routing Parameters.
•See "Caller ID Call Routing" in
Glossary.
Caller ID Screening
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
allows extension users to hear prerecorded
caller names when calls from assigned
numbers are transferred from the VPS to the
extension users.
•See "Caller Name
Announcement—Personal" and
"Caller Name Announcement—
System" in this Table.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
194 Installation Manual
Caller Name
Announcement—
Personal
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller
ID numbers and record a caller name for each
Caller ID number from their telephone. The
caller name is announced when: (1)
subscribers listen to the messages from
assigned numbers left in their mailboxes, (2)
the VPS transfers calls from assigned
numbers to the subscribers (Caller ID
Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the
subscribers by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See "Number of CIDs for Caller
Name Announcement" and
"Caller ID Screening" in Table
40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
Personal)" in Glossary.
•See 4.12 Personal Caller Name
Announcement in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Caller Name
Announcement—
System
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
allows the System Administrator to assign up
to 120 Caller ID numbers. Each Caller ID
number can have a caller name recorded by
the Message Manager. The caller name is
announced when: (1) extension users listen to
the messages from assigned numbers left in
their mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls
from assigned numbers to the subscribers
(Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages
the subscribers by intercom (Intercom
Paging).
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See "Caller ID Screening" in
Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See B6.6 System Caller Name
Announcement.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Recording System Caller
Names" in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
Personal)" in Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 195
Calling a Beeper allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper
when he has message(s). If the beeper has a
display, it is possible to send to it a callback
number. The callback number can be
recorded when a caller leaves a message. If
the caller does not leave a callback number,
the System Callback No., or the caller's
number if it is received through a telephone
company's Caller ID service, will be sent
instead.
To utilize this feature, follow the procedure
below.
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
COS No.(1-63).
Select "Yes" in the Authorization for
Message Notification parameter. Make 1
selection from the available options in the
Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode parameter.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-1-1-Mailbox No.-Y-2-Device No.(1-
3) (Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit-
Mailbox No. Entry-Do you want to edit this
mailbox?-Notification Setting-Device No.
Entry).
For the Dial Number parameter: enter your
PBX's line access code before the beeper
number for dialing outward; enter an X after
the beeper number. (The X is for the caller to
enter his number as the callback number
which will later appear on your beeper.)
Finally, select "Beeper" in the Type of Device
parameter.
•See "Dial Number" and "Type
of Device" in Table 38 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Authorization for Message
Notification" and "Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode" in
Tables 40 and 41 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "System Callback Number"
in Table 63 in B6.7 Other
Parameters.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
196 Installation Manual
Class of Service
(COS)
There are 62 COS levels for subscribers.
COS 63 is for the Message Manager and COS
64 is for the System Manager.
Either the System Administrator (using a
personal computer) or the System Manager
(using a telephone) can change COS
assignments.
•See 7.3.2 COS (Class of
Service) Assignments.
•See B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Company Greeting is a prerecorded message designed to greet all
incoming callers and provide relevant
information. This feature allows the use of up
to 32 different greetings for each individual
Time Service period (Day, Night, Lunch and
Break) as well as holidays*. Available for
both Port and Trunk services.
Note: The System Manager can change the
Company Greeting setting remotely by
simply calling the VPS.
*: Only the System Administrator can assign
specific greetings for holidays.
•See 6.1.3 Company Greetings
(Enter #6*998,5,1).
•See C6 CHANGING THE
COMPANY GREETING
SETTING.
•See "Company Greeting No." in
Tables 42 and 43 in
B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
•See "Company Greeting No." in
Table 57 in B6.3 Holiday
Setting.
•See D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Company Greeting" in
Glossary.
Company Name is used by External Message Delivery Service
when the intended receiver enters the
password incorrectly 3 times. The VPS
announces the Company Name so that the
receiver realizes what company placed the
call to him.
•See D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Company Name" in
Glossary.
•See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 197
Covering Extension forwards calls to a second extension when the
first extension's subscriber is not available to
take the call. The caller can also access the
Covering Extension by pressing [0] while a
Personal Greeting is being played, or while
leaving a message.
•See "Covering Extension" in
Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Covering Extension" in
Glossary.
•See 4.2 Covering Extension in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Custom Service allows callers to access specific functions by
entering numbers or symbols through the
telephone keypad.
The Message Manager can record up to 100
Custom Service menus. These menus can be
recorded in various foreign languages, and
help guide outside callers to the desired
extension, mailbox, System Group
Distribution List, Department Dialing menu,
operator, fax machine, etc.
Note: Callers cannot jump between Custom
Service menus more than 8 times.
•See 5.2 PORT SETTING
OPTIONS.
•See 6.1.4 Recording the
Company Name (Enter
#6*998,5,2).
•See 7.2.11 Custom Service
Report (CREP).
•See 7.2.12 Custom Service
Menu Access Count Clear
(CCLR).
•See B5.2 Custom Service.
•See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in
D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Custom Service Setting" in
Glossary.
Daylight Saving
Time Assignment
changes the internal clock of the VPS for the
start and end of Daylight Saving Time.
•See B6.4 Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
Delete Message
Confirmation
requests confirmation from mailbox owner
before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
COS (Class of Service) settings.
•See "Delete Message
Confirmation" in Tables 40 and
41 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
198 Installation Manual
Department Dialing is a speed-dialing feature that permits the
caller to quickly reach the desired extension
by dialing a 1 digit number either during or
after the playing of the Department Dialing
message.
•See 5.4.2 Department Dialing.
•See "Department Dialing" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
•See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in
D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Department Dialing" in
Glossary.
Dialing by Name allows the caller to reach the intended
mailbox/extension (when the number is not
known) by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of
the mailbox owner's last name. The VPS
identifies all subscribers with that letter
combination and states each name for the
caller. The caller selects the desired
subscriber by entering the appropriate
number.
•See "Owner Last Name" in
Table 37 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
Direct Mailbox
Access
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
allows subscribers to call the VPS and access
their mailbox without entering the mailbox
number.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 199
DPT Integration is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
transmitted between the VPS and PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Remote Call Forwarding Set, Auto
Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing, Caller
Name Announcement (System/Personal),
Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging,
Live Call Screening, Personal Greeting for
Caller ID, Time Synchronization with PBX,
Two-Way Record and Two-Way Transfer.
Note: Depending on the model and/or the
software version of the connected PBX, you
may not be able to utilize some of the features
available only with DPT Integration. For
more information, call National Parts Center
at 1-800-833-9626.
•See "Voice Mail" in
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems
are Compatible?
•See 1.4.1 General.
•See 1.4.4 DPT Integration.
•See 1.4.5 Connection
Example—DPT Integration.
•See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
•See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signaling?
•See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES
PBX AND KX-TD SERIES
PBX.
•See "DPT Integration" in
Glossary.
Extension Group places several extensions into the same
mailbox to share information using an
Extension Group List. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
maximum of 20 entries on each.
•See 5.2.8 Extension Groups.
•See "System Group
Assignment-Extension Group"
in B6.1 System Group
Assignment.
Extension
Numbering Plan
permits the VPS to recognize an extension
number as valid.
•See "Other Parameters-
Extension Numbering Plan" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
External Message
Delivery List
allows a subscriber to send a message to
outside parties and/or extensions with a
single operation. One subscriber can maintain
up to 2 lists with a maximum of 8 entries on
each.
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorized for the
subscriber's COS.
•See "External Message Delivery
Service" in this Table.
•See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
Glossary.
•See 3.3 Setting up an External
Message Delivery List in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
200 Installation Manual
External Message
Delivery Service
allows a subscriber to send a message to
several subscribers and non-subscribers
(including outside parties) at a specified time
(or immediately). This feature also permits
the receiver to reply to the message without
having to specify the mailbox number.
If the sender wishes, he can require the
receiver to enter a 4-digit password to receive
the sender's message. If the receiver enters
the password incorrectly 3 times, the VPS: (1)
plays the Company Name (if it has been
recorded), (2) plays the Callback Telephone
Number (if registered), and (3) plays the
sender's extension (if both the Callback
Telephone Number and the Extension of the
Owner have been registered). With this
information, the receiver can possibly track
down the message even if he does not
remember the password.
COS programming determines whether this
feature can be used or not.
•See "The Extension of the
Owner" in Table 37 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Authorization for External
Message Delivery" in Table 40
in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Other Parameters-External
Message Delivery" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
Glossary.
•See 3.4 Sending External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
•See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
•See 3.6 Replying to External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber's Guide.
External Message
Delivery Status
allows the subscriber to check the status of
undelivered and pending external delivery
messages.
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorized for the
subscriber's COS.
•See "External Message Delivery
Service" in this Table.
•See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
Glossary.
•See 3.7 Checking and Setting
External Message Delivery
Status in the Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 201
Fax Management allows the VPS to automatically route an
incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine.
Up to 2 fax machines can be assigned using
this feature. Outside callers can also reach the
fax machine via Custom Service selection, if
programmed.
A special mailbox can be assigned to the Fax
Manager. In this way, the VPS can notify the
Fax Manager of the status of faxes.
•See "Fax Management (1-5-7-
8)" in 5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
•See 7.3.11 Fax Call Report.
•See 7.3.12 Fax Call Statistics
Clear.
•See "Other Parameters-Fax
Management" in B6.7 Other
Parameters.
Group Distribution
List—Personal
allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a
message to several mailboxes using a Group
Distribution List. This list is established by
the subscriber. Each subscriber can maintain
a maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on
each list.
•See "Group Distribution List—
System" in this Table.
•See "Personal Group
Distribution List" in Glossary.
•See 4.5 Personal Group
Distribution Lists in the
Subscriber's Guide.
•See 4.6 Deleting Group
Distribution Members in the
Subscriber's Guide.
•See 4.7 Deleting Group
Distribution List Names in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Group Distribution
List—System
allows a subscriber to send a message to
several mailboxes using a Group Distribution
List. Also allows a caller to record a message
into all mailboxes within the list. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
maximum of 20 entries on each.
•See "System Group
Assignment-Mailbox Group" in
B6.1 System Group
Assignment.
•See C8 DELIVERING
MESSAGES.
•See "System Group Distribution
List" in Glossary.
Hold provides the caller with the option of
temporarily holding the call when the line is
busy. The VPS automatically recalls the
extension after a specified period of time.
When several callers hold their calls to the
same extension, callers are connected in the
order in which they originally called.
•See "Other Parameters-Call
Hold" in B6.7 Other
Parameters.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
202 Installation Manual
Holiday Service permits the VPS to record, store, and play
several different holiday greetings. Up to 20
Holiday Service settings can be programmed.
It is possible to either specify a single day or
a range of days on which to enable the
Holiday Service setting.
Note: Holidays cannot overlap.
•See B6.3 Holiday Setting.
Inband Integration allows the PBX, using Inband Integration, to
send information to the VPS using
Touchtones. Inband integration is
characterized as Voice Mail Integration and
Touchtone Integration. Voice Mail
Integration works with the Call Forwarding
Feature of the PBX to permit a caller to leave
a message when the mailbox number of the
called extension is not known. Touchtone
Integration works with the Automated
Attendant Service to enable the VPS to
immediately recognize the state of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) and improve
its call handling performance.
•See "Voice Mail" in
1.3.3 Which Phone Systems
are Compatible?
•See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
•See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signaling?.
•See Section 3 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS.
•See "Inband Signaling" in
Glossary.
Incomplete Call
Handling Service
allows the subscriber to offer callers several
service options when the extension is busy or
there is no answer: Leaving a Message,
Transfer to Covering Extension, Returning to
the Automated Attendant Top Menu,
Intercom Paging, Calling a Beeper, or Calling
Operators.
•See "Calling a Beeper" and
"Intercom Paging (APT/DPT
Integration Only)" in this Table.
•See "Incomplete Call Handling
Service" in Glossary.
•See 4.3 Incomplete Call
Handling Status in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 203
Intercom Paging
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
permits callers to page subscribers by PBX
paging (there are different kinds of PBX
paging, and these can be specified by VPS
programming) when the subscribers have set
Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when
the subscribers have set Intercom Paging for
Incomplete Call Handling. The caller is
briefly placed on hold while the VPS
announces the page and until the subscriber
answers the page. The subscriber can answer
the page from any extension using the paging
answer code; this code is specified in the PBX
User Manual. For a Caller ID Caller, if his
name has been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature, the name will be
announced at the end of the page. If the
caller's name has been recorded for both the
System and Personal Caller Name
Announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
To utilize this feature, follow the procedure
below.
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
COS No.(1-62). Select an Intercom Paging
Group (1-17) for this COS. If set to Group 17,
the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-5-7-7 (Program-System Parameter
Setting-Others-Intercom Paging Parameters).
Adjust the "No Answer Time for Intercom
Paging" to your preference (the default is 5 s).
For the Intercom Paging Group you selected
in Step 1, set the Intercom Paging access code
in "Paging Code for Group 1-17" and "Paging
Code for All Groups".
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See "Intercom Paging (1-5-7-7)"
in 5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
•See "Intercom Paging Group" in
Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Other Parameters-Intercom
Paging Parameter" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
•See "Intercom Paging" in
Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
204 Installation Manual
Interview Service plays a set of recorded questions when a
caller accesses the service. The caller is
provided an opportunity to answer each
question after it has been asked. Subscribers
are able to record questions directly into their
own Interview Mailbox.
•See 5.2.9 Interview Service.
•See "Interview Mailbox
Number" in Table 37 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
•See "Interview Service" in
Glossary.
•See 4.9 Interview Mailbox in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 205
Live Call Screening
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
permits the subscriber to monitor incoming
calls as messages are being recorded. The
subscriber has the option of answering calls
while monitoring or allowing the message to
be recorded without interruption. There are
two modes in this feature: Hands-free and
Private.
Hands-free permits the subscriber to hear the
caller through the telephone's speaker and
answer the call by lifting the handset. The
Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the
telephone handset to be lifted before the
message can be monitored. Two-way
communication is established by pressing the
feature button.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See 4.5.1 Live Call Screening
(LCS) Programming.
•See 4.5.2 Live Call Screening
Password Assignment.
•See 4.5.3 Live Call Screening
Password Canceling.
•See 4.5.4 Live Call Screening
Recording Mode Assignment
via System Programming.
•See 4.5.5 Live Call Screening
Private/Hands-Free Mode
Assignment via Station
Programming.
•See 4.5.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC
Programming.
•See 4.5.7 Live Call Screening
Button Assignment via Station
Programming.
•See 4.5.8 Live Call Screening
Cancel Button Assignment via
Station Programming.
•See 4.5.13 Live Call
Screening Activation.
•See 4.5.14 Live Call
Screening Password Control.
•See "Message Cancel for Live
Call Screening" in Table 40 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Live Call Screening" in
Glossary.
•See 4.13 Live Call Screening in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
206 Installation Manual
Logical Extension
(All Calls Transfer
to Mailbox)
is an extension that always receives calls
directly into its mailbox. This feature is used
by subscribers that are often unavailable or
that do not have a telephone.
•See "All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox" in Table 37 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
•See "Logical Extension" in
Glossary.
Mailbox is a place where all messages to a subscriber
are stored. Several mailbox options exist:
Subscriber Mailbox, Interview Mailbox,
System Manager's Mailbox, and Message
Manager's Mailbox (General Delivery
Mailbox).
•See 5.5 SETTING
MAILBOXES.
•See 6.2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
•See 7.3.1 Mailbox
Assignments.
•See 7.3.9 Mailbox Usage
Report.
•See 7.3.10 Mailbox Usage
Statistics Clear.
•See B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
•See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Message Delivery,
Internal
allows the VPS to automatically deliver a
single message to multiple mailboxes.
•See "Group Distribution List—
Personal", "Group Distribution
List—System" and "Message
Delivery Status" in this Table.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 207
Message Delivery
Status
allows a subscriber to check the status of
messages that have been sent. The sending
subscriber has the option of canceling any of
the messages after checking their status. If a
recorded message has not been received, the
VPS will voice report the following: the
message's destination mailbox number and its
contents.
Message delivery status information is
automatically deleted after the message has
been received by the subscriber, or when the
subscriber cancels the delivery, or when a
new message arrives after 84 delivery status
messages have been stored in the subscriber's
mailbox (the oldest status message is always
deleted first).
•See 3.2 Checking Mailbox
Distribution in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Message Reception
Mode
allows incoming calls to be received by either
a subscriber's regular or interview mailbox.
This mode is effective for: (1) Incomplete
Call Handling Service (when the subscriber's
line is busy, or he cannot take the call, or
when he has enabled Call Blocking), and (2)
when the transfer destination of calls is set to
a Logical Extension.
•See "Interview Service" and
"Logical Extension (All Calls
Transfer to Mailbox)" in this
Table.
•See "All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox" in Table 37 in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See 4.4 Message Reception
Mode in the Subscriber's Guide.
Message Scan permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of
each message. The subscriber can replay the
previous message, play the next message, or
play the entire message.
•See "Message Scanning with
Information" in Table 40 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Scanning Messages" in
Glossary.
•See 2.1 Receiving Messages in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
208 Installation Manual
Message Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer messages to
other mailboxes after playing. The subscriber
can also add a personal comment at the
beginning of the message to be transferred if
desired.
One or more individual mailboxes can be
specified for message transfer. Messages can
also be transferred using either the System or
Personal Group Distribution Lists.
•See "Transferring Messages" in
D2 MANAGING THE
GENERAL DELIVERY
MAILBOX.
•See "Message Transfer" in
Glossary.
•See 2.3 Message Transfer in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Message Waiting
Notification—
Device
automatically notifies the subscriber/
Message Manager of the reception of new
message(s) by calling either a specified
telephone or beeper number. The message
will automatically play when the subscriber/
Message Manager answers a call to the
telephone. When a beeper is called, the
subscriber/Message Manager must call the
VPS and access the message from the
mailbox. Notification can be scheduled either
on or off for a maximum of 2 times during
any 24 h period.
The subscriber/Message Manager can
program a maximum of 3 telephones or
beepers in sequence. The VPS will recall the
number or number sequence for a specified
number of times until answered.
Notification is terminated when the
subscriber/Message Manager has received
the message, when the last number has been
called a specified number of times, or at the
completion of the programmed time period.
•See "Message Waiting
Notification from an SLT" in
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for
Integration.
•See "Notification Setting" in
B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Authorization for Message
Notification" in Tables 40 and
41 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Other Parameters-Message
Waiting Notification" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See D3 SETTING UP
MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION.
•See "Message Waiting
Notification" in Glossary.
•See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 209
Message Waiting
Notification—Lamp
automatically illuminates the message
waiting lamp on the subscriber's or the
Message Manager's telephone when there are
unplayed messages waiting in the mailbox.
Note: The extension assigned for Operator 1
in the Day Mode is the Message Manager's
telephone. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this feature.
When using this feature, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
•See "Message Waiting
Notification from an SLT" in
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for
Integration.
•See 7.2.13 Message Waiting
Lamp Retry Times (MWL).
•See "MWL Notification for
Unreceived Message" in Tables
40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Other Parameters-Message
Waiting Notification" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See D3 SETTING UP
MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION.
•See "Message Waiting Lamp" in
Glossary.
•See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Multilingual Service permits up to 3 languages to be used for
prompt options. If the "Selective" mode is
selected, callers are able to choose their
desired language.
•See "Incoming Call Service
Prompt" in Table 23 in
5.3.1 Port Service Menu.
•See "System/User 1/User 2
Selection Number" in Table 59
in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
•See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" and "Recording
User Prompts" in
D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Multilingual Selection
Menu" in Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
210 Installation Manual
No Answer
Coverage Mode
specifies how the calls will be handled when
Operator 1, 2 and/or 3 do not answer them
within the specified "Operator No Answer
Time". There are 4 options:
Caller Select*1—caller may leave a message
or call another extension.
Leave Message*1—caller may leave a
message in Operators' mailbox.
Disconnect Message*1—caller is
disconnected from the VPS after hearing
"Thank you for calling."
Next Operator*2—caller is transferred to the
next operator (Operator 2 or 3) extension.
*1: Assignable for Operator 1, 2 and 3
*2: Assignable for Operator 1 and 2
•See "No Answer Coverage
Mode" in Table 24 in
5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters.
•See "No Answer Coverage
Mode" in Tables 45, 46 and 47
in B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
Operator Service permits callers to request a live operator by
pressing [0] on the telephone keypad. Up to 3
operators can be specified to receive calls in
the Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
•See 5.4.3 Operator’s
Parameters.
•See "Operator's Parameters" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
•See "Operator's Extensions" in
D4 CUSTOMIZING THE
MESSAGE MANAGER'S
MAILBOX.
Password
Administration
allows the System Administrator or System
Manager to clear a subscriber password (so
that a new one can be assigned).
•See 5.5.4 Password Reset.
•See "Deleting a Mailbox
Password" in C2 SETTING
UP MAILBOXES.
PBX Integration allows the VPS and PBX to work together as
an integrated unit. Three integration options
are available: Inband Integration, APT
Integration and DPT Integration.
•See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
•See Section 3 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS.
•See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA SERIES
PBX AND KX-TD SERIES
PBX.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 211
Personal Greeting
for Caller ID
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
permits subscribers to record up to 4 personal
greetings for calls from pre-assigned Caller
ID numbers. Each greeting supports up to 8
caller ID numbers.
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
COS (Class of Service) settings.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See "Personal Greeting Length"
and "Personal Greeting for CID"
in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Personal Greeting for
Caller ID" in Glossary.
•See 4.10 Recording Personal
Greetings for Caller ID in the
Subscriber's Guide.
•See 4.11 Assigning Caller ID
Numbers for Personal Greeting
for Caller ID in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Personal Greetings permit the subscriber to record the following
3 personal message greetings:
No Answer—Plays when unavailable to
answer the call during business hours.
Busy Signal—Plays whenever the line is
busy.
After Hours—Plays when the VPS is in the
Night Mode.
The No Answer Greeting will also play:
• when the caller accesses the mailbox
directly.
• when the Busy Signal or the After Hours
Greeting has not been recorded.
•See 6.2.1 Recording Personal
Greetings.
•See "Personal Greeting Length"
in Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Personal Greetings" in
Glossary.
•See 1.2 Recording Personal
Greetings in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
212 Installation Manual
Play System Prompt
After Personal
Greeting
allows the "Guidance for Recording"
message to be played for the caller after the
"Personal Greeting". The "Guidance for
Recording" message instructs the caller how
to terminate the call, access more features,
and rerecord the message.
•See "Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting" in Table 40
in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Port Service allows assignment of call services to each
port.
The incoming call service determines which
service is used when answering incoming
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
•See 5.2 PORT SETTING
OPTIONS.
•See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
Private Message allows a subscriber and the System Manager
to specify a message as "Private" when
sending it to other subscribers, the Message
Manager and/or the System Manager. A
message specified as "Private" cannot be
transferred. It is also possible to specify
messages recorded in the Voice Mail Service
as "Private".
•See "Delivering Messages to
Specified Mailboxes" in
C8 DELIVERING
MESSAGES.
•See "Private Message" in
Glossary.
•See 3.1 Delivering Messages to
Other Subscribers in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Receive Message allows subscribers to access messages left in
their mailboxes. Three options are available
to subscribers:
Reply to Message Sender—permits
subscribers to reply to the message sender
without specifying the extension.
Message Transfer—permits subscribers to
transfer their messages to other mailboxes.
Message Scan—permits subscribers to listen
to the first 4 s of each message.
•See "Message Transfer" and
"Message Scan" in this Table.
•See 2.1 Receiving Messages in
the Subscriber's Guide.
•See 2.2 Replying to Messages in
the Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 213
Remote Call
Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration
only)
allows a subscriber and the Message Manager
to program his extension from a remote
location to forward various types of calls to a
desired extension or an outside telephone.
There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number.
FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number when the line is
busy.
FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming
calls to a desired extension number when
there is no answer.
FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all
incoming calls to a desired extension number
when the line is busy or there is no answer.
FWD to CO*—Forward all incoming calls
to the Telephone number 1 or 2 (programmed
in the Mailbox Setting), or to any other
number.
FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding
setting.
*: Must be enabled in the COS (Class of
Service) settings to be utilized.
With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is
disabled. To enable VPS Remote Call
Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for example,
must be programmed properly. For the
COS of the extensions whose calls are to be
forwarded to a CO line, enable the
following: [504] Call Forward to Outside
Line.
Note: The extension assigned for Operator 1
in the Day Mode is the Message Manager's
extension. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this feature.
When using this feature, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
•See 5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox.
•See "Remote Call Forward to
CO Setting" in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•See "Remote Call Forward to
CO" in Tables 40 and 41 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See D7 REMOTE CALL
FORWARDING SET.
•See "Remote Call Forwarding
Set" in Glossary.
•See 4.16 Remote Call
Forwarding Set in the
Subscriber's Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
214 Installation Manual
Rotary Telephone
Service
provides guidance to callers using rotary
telephone systems or when several seconds
pass without anything being entered by the
caller.
•See "Other Parameters-Rotary
Telephone Service" in
B6.7 Other Parameters.
•See "Rotary Telephone" in
Glossary.
Service Access
Commands
allow the caller to directly access several
standard features.
(0) to repeat the Help Menu or call the
operator
() to return to previous menu
(#) (1) to dial by name
(#) (3) Department Dialing
(#) (5) Login
(#) (6) Voice Mail Service
(#) (7) to restart (Subscriber's main menu)
(#) (8) to call transfer
(#) (9) to exit
•See 5.2.6 Voice Mail.
•See 5.2.10 Automated
Attendant.
•See 1.5 Service Access
Commands in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Service Mode allows the System Administrator or the
System Manager to change the call handling
method that is programmed in the Time
Service setting.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it
is retained unless the System Manager or
System Administrator changes it again, even
after the power turns off.
There are 6 Service Modes available:
Automatic Mode—Operates according to
the setting in Time Service.
Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day
Mode.
Manual Night Mode—Operates only in
Night Mode.
Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in
Lunch Mode.
Manual Break Mode—Operates only in
Break Mode.
PBX Control Mode—Operation changes
depending on PBX time period (APT/DPT
Integration only).
•See "Time Service" in this
Table.
•See "Time Service-Service
Mode" in B6.2 Time Service.
•See C5 CHANGING THE
SERVICE MODE SETTING.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 215
Special Feature
Authorization
permits mailbox owners to use the following
special features: Remote Call Forward to CO,
Delete Message Confirmation, Message
Waiting Notification, External Message
Delivery, and Auto Forwarding.
But the Message Manager can only utilize the
following features: Remote Call Forward to
CO, Delete Message Confirmation, and
Message Waiting Notification; and the
System Manager can only utilize the Delete
Message Confirmation feature.
•See "Remote Call Forward to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", "Authorization
for Message Notification",
"Authorization for External
Message Delivery", and
"Authorization for Auto
Forwarding" in Table 40 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See "Remote Call Forward to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", and
"Authorization for Message
Notification" in Table 41 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
System Clock allows the correct setting of the date and time
to be made for proper VPS operation.
•See 7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).
•See C4 SETTING THE
SYSTEM CLOCK.
•See D5 SETTING THE
SYSTEM CLOCK.
System Reports Eight System Reports are available to the
System Administrator and System Manager
to monitor VPS operating status. These
reports include: Mailbox Assignments, COS
Assignments, System Service Report, Call
Account Report, Port Usage Report, Flash
Memory Usage Report, Mailbox Usage
Report, and the Fax Call Report.
•See 7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS.
•See C7 CHECKING
SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM
REPORTS).
•See "System Report" in
Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
216 Installation Manual
Time Service is a timer function that initiates the
appropriate call handling method depending
on the time of day: Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Service periods.
•See "Service Mode" in this
table.
•See "Time Service (1-5-2-2)" in
5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
•See "Time Service-Time
Service" in B6.2 Time
Service.
Time
Synchronization
(DPT Integration
only)
occurs between the VPS and PBX when the
PBX sets a new date and time, or when DPT
Integration is established. The date and time
are automatically sent from the PBX to the
VPS.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See 7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).
•See "Time Synchronization" in
Glossary.
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
allows call services to be assigned to each
trunk (CO line) group.
The incoming call service determines which
service is used when answering incoming
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
Two-Way
Recording
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
permits a subscriber to record two-way
conversations into his mailbox.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See 4.5.9 Two-Way
Recording Button Assignment
via Station Programming.
•See 4.5.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
•See 4.5.15 Two-Way
Recording into Mailbox.
•See 4.5.17 A Restriction on
TWR/TWT Activation.
•See "Two-Way Recording" in
Glossary.
•See 4.14 Recording a Two-Way
Conversation in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual 217
Two-Way Transfer
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
permits a subscriber to record two-way
conversations into another person's mailbox.
•See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
•See 4.5.10 Two-Way Transfer
Button Assignment via Station
Programming.
•See 4.5.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
•See 4.5.16 Two-Way Transfer
into Mailbox.
•See 4.5.17 A Restriction on
TWR/TWT Activation.
•See "Two-Way Transfer" in
Glossary.
•See 4.14 Recording a Two-Way
Conversation in the Subscriber's
Guide.
Unlimited Message
Length
permits a mailbox owner to record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or
another person's mailbox (Two-Way
Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The
maximum recording time for other messages
will automatically be set to 6 min.
To allow unlimited recording time, the
"Message Length" parameter must be set to
"0: Unlimited" in the COS (Class of Service)
settings.
•See "Two-Way Recording" and
"Two-Way Transfer" in this
table.
•See "Message Length" in Tables
40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Unlimited Message
Length" in Glossary.
Utility Commands allow the System Administrator to access
critical VPS functions.
•See 7.2 UTILITY
COMMANDS.
Voice Mail Service permits a caller/non-subscriber to leave a
message in any mailbox.
•See 5.2.6 Voice Mail.
•See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
•See "Voice Mail" in Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM FEATURES
218 Installation Manual
Voice Prompts are announcements that instruct the caller.
There are 3 kinds of voice prompts:
(1) System Prompts (recorded at the factory
in English),
(2) User 1 Prompts (not recorded), and
(3) User 2 Prompts (recorded at the factory
in Spanish).
•See 6.1.6 Customizing User
Prompts (Enter #6*998,5,6).
•See " Prompt Mode" in Tables
40 and 41 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS
•See B6.5 Prompt Setting.
•See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
•See "Recording User Prompts"
in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
•See "Voice Prompt" in
Glossary.
Table 34
FEATURE DESCRIPTION REFERENCES
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 219
Appendix B
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
220 Installation Manual
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
Use either a VT or RS-232C terminals (ASCII Terminals) to perform System Administration,
which includes the setting and changing of system parameters. This can be a personal computer
with emulation software.
Keyboard Use
RS-232C Terminals (ASCII Terminals)
When using RS-232C Terminals, Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN
to choose menu options.
Using the Interface
Programming Guidance
Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens. The Programming Menu
Structure Diagram provided below depicts this menu flow. A menu flow that corresponds to
the Programming Menu Structure Diagram is given at the beginning of each section. This flow
is designed to guide the user through the appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or
changed. The following example illustrates how the menu flow is used.
Table 35
KEY FUNCTIONS
(1)-(9), then (RETURN) Typing any number 1 through 9 will select
the corresponding option for that number.
Pressing RETURN will select the number
entered.
(\) Exits the current screen and returns to the
previous step within the menu.
Backspace Used to correct any mis-typed entry.
Example:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 1
1. Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu. Press RETURN.
2. Press 4 at the Program Menu. Press RETURN.
3. Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu. Press RETURN.
4. Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select "1. Department Dialing," when selected.
5. Press RETURN. Auto. Attn-Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 221
1. Program 1. Mallbox
Setting
2. Class of
Service
3. Port/Trunk
Service
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
2. Custom
Service
1. Department
Dialing
2. Operator's
Parameter
3. Alternate
Extension
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
222 Installation Manual
Programming Menu Structure Diagram
1. Program 1. Mailbox
Setting
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
1. Day Mode for each port
2. Night Mode for each port
Mailbox No
Entry
1. Mailbox
Setting
2. Notification
Setting 1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
3. 3rd Device
3. Remote Call
FWD to CO 1.
Telephone No.1
2.
Telephone No.2
2. Class of
Service
3.
Port/Trunk
Service
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
2. Operator's
Parameter
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Custom
Service
1. Day Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
4. Break Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
2. Night Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
3. Lunch Mode
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Enter Extension
2. Delete Extension
3. Extension Listing
1. Enter
3. Caller ID Listing
Custom Service No. (1-100) Entry
3. Caller ID
Call Routing
Continued Next Page
2. Trunk Service
COS No. (1-64)
Entry
2. Delete
1. Port Service 3. Lunch Mode for each port
4. Break Mode for each port
1. Day Mode for each trunk group
2. Night Mode for each trunk group
3. Lunch Mode for each trunk group
4. Break Mode for each trunk group
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 223
5. System
Parameter
Setting
1. System Group
Assignment
2. Time Service
3. Holiday Setting
4. Daylight Saving
Time
5. Prompt Setting
7. Others
1. RS-232C
2. Port Setting
for each port
3. PBX Interface
Parameter 1. Dialing
Parameter
2. Inband
Signaling
1. Inter-digit
Timeout
2. Input/Output
3.
Digit Translation
Table
6. Hardware
Setting
1. Extension Numbering Plan 1-16
2. Dialing Parameter
3. Message Waiting Notification
4. External Message Delivery
5. Call Hold
6. Rotary Telephone Service
7. Intercom Paging Parameters
8. Fax Management
9. Disconnect Parameter
1. Holiday Setting Enter
2.
Holiday Setting Delete
3. Holilay Listing
1. Service Mode
2. Time Service
1. Day Service
2. Lunch Service
3. Break Service
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
1. Mailbox
Group
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Listing
2. Extension
Group
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Listing
6. System Caller Name
Announcement
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
224 Installation Manual
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Up to 62 Subscriber Mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence of
steps.
Editing Mailboxes
The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
To access the proper menu for mailbox setup, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.
Table 36
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Mailbox
Number
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the subscriber's mailbox number. Mailbox
number length is determined during setup or when
initializing the system. Mailbox numbers cannot begin with
"0". If the length of the mailbox number has been defined
as 3 digits, for example, the valid range for all mailbox
numbers would be 100 through 997 (998 and 999 would be
reserved for the Message Manager and the System
Manager). The length of the mailbox number cannot be
changed through the Mailbox Setting screen once it has
been specified.
To access the proper menu for mailbox editing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-1
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 225
Table 37
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
The Extension
of the Owner
2-5 digits
(None)
Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a subscriber's
mailbox.
Any valid extension number including an Extension Group
List number can be assigned.
Note: If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a
mailbox, all group members are able to share the
information stored there.
Owner First
Name
Up to 16
alphabetic
characters
(None)
The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed
on the Mailbox Assignments report.
The Dialing by Name feature uses the last name.
Owner Last
Name
Class of Service
No.
COS No.1-62
(1)
Used to define the set of services available to the
subscriber.
Note 1: We recommend that parameters for each COS
number be defined before assigning a Class of Service
(COS) number.
Note 2: COS No.63 pertains to the Message Manager while
COS No.64 pertains to the System Manager. These
numbers cannot be entered in the COS No. data field.
Covering
Extension
2-5 digits
(None)
Identifies the extension number that will receive
unanswered subscriber calls. The Automated Attendant
Service accomplishes this call transfer. The caller is given
the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in
the subscriber's mailbox.
The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call
Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled by
the subscriber using the telephone keypad.
Note: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned as covering extensions.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
226 Installation Manual
Notification Setting
Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device
feature. A maximum of 3 destinations (Device 1, 2, 3) can be specified per mailbox.
•Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature.
•If the destination device is a telephone, the subscriber will be called when he has
message(s), and will have a chance to listen to the message(s).
•If the destination device is a beeper, the subscriber will be notified when he has
message(s). If the beeper has a display, it is possible to send to it a callback number. The
caller can enter the callback number when he leaves a message. If he does not enter a
callback number, either the System Callback No., or the caller's number if it is received
through a telephone company's Caller ID service, will be sent instead.
Interview
Mailbox
Number
2-5 digits
(None)
Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox. The
interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox
number.
Note: The replies to an interview session constitute one
message. If the subscriber expects many interview
messages, "Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages" (see
Table 40 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS)
should be raised to a higher value. Possibly, the subscriber
should be assigned to a different COS.
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If this parameter is set to "Yes", all calls routed to the
extension are automatically forwarded to the extension's
mailbox without ringing the telephone. Forwarding is
accomplished through the Automated Attendant service.
Callers are permitted to leave a message.
Note: When this feature has been set to "Yes", the mailbox
owner's extension does not necessarily need to exist as a
phone extension of the PBX.
To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-2-Device No. 1, 2, or 3.
Table 37
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 227
Notification Setting-Device 1, 2, or 3
Table 38
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Dial Number Up to 32 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
Assigns a telephone or beeper number to Device 1, 2,
or 3. The subscriber can also specify the dial number
from his telephone.
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note: The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS and
"Type of Device" is set to "Beeper". The proper number
of "Pauses" must be inserted before the callback entry
code.
Important Note: When the VPS calls to a CO line via
the KX-TD500 PRI Card (KX-TD50290: PRI23 [ISDN
Primary Rate Access Interface card]), be sure to add "#"
after the telephone number (1112223333 in the
example here):
Example: 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX#
Type of Device 1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Specifies the device to receive notification. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the
Dial Number (above). The subscriber can also specify
the type of device from his telephone.
Use Mode 1. Not Use
2. Continuously
3. Scheduled
(Continuously)
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
telephone.
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
228 Installation Manual
Remote Call Forward to CO
Follow the procedure below to specify the destination outside telephone number(s) to which
the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding feature is set to an outside (CO)
line.
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 can be specified per mailbox.
• Class of Service programming determines if the mailbox owner is able to use this
feature.
• This feature is only available with DPT Integration.
No. of Retries 0-9 times
(0)
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received.
Busy Delay
Time
0-120 min
(3)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a busy condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
No Answer
Delay Time
60-120 min
(60)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a no-answer condition is received before making
another notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
Time Frame 1,
2
MON:
TUE:
WED:
THU:
FRI:
SAT:
SUN:
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
a.m./p.m.
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting
Notification service for 1 week for this device.
Note: These parameters are active only when "Use
Mode" is set to "Scheduled".
To access the proper menu for Remote Forward to CO, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-3-Telephone Number 1
or 2.
Table 38
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 229
Deleting a Mailbox
When a mailbox is deleted, the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox,
removes the mailbox from all group distribution lists, deletes the personal group distribution
lists assigned to the mailbox, erases the subscriber's name, and cancels all external delivery
messages.
Resetting a Mailbox Password
Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for clearing a mailbox password.
Table 39
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Telephone
Number 1, 2
Up to 16 digits
(With the KX-
TD816/TD1232/
TA1232)
or
Up to 24 digits
(With the KX-
TD500)
(None)
Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO
line.
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
"".
The telephone number should begin with a Line Access
Code (to seize a CO line).
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
To access the proper menu for Deleting a Mailbox, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-2-Mailbox No.
To access the proper menu for clearing a mailbox password, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-3-Mailbox No.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
230 Installation Manual
Listing Mailboxes
Follow the procedure below to display the mailbox number list.
To display the list of all mailbox numbers, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-4
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 231
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
The COS-Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to mailbox
owners. A maximum of 64 (1-64) classes can be specified. A class of service number can be
assigned for each mailbox. More than 1 subscriber can share the same class of service.
•COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is only
available to the System Manager.
•The procedure below determines the utilization of the following special features on a
COS basis:
• Remote Call Forward to CO (available for COS numbers 1-63)
• Delete Message Confirmation (available for COS numbers 1-64)
• Message Waiting Notification (available for COS numbers 1-63)
• External Message Delivery (available for COS numbers 1-62)
• Auto Forwarding (available for COS numbers 1-62)
Note
In Tables 40 and 41, sub-parameters are underlined. These sub-parameters can be assigned
only when the corresponding authorization parameter is set to "Yes".
Class of Service Setting
COS Nos. 1-62 (for subscribers)
To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1-64, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(1-64)
To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 1-62 for subscribers,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(1-62)
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
232 Installation Manual
Table 40
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Personal
Greeting
Length
8-60 s in 4 s
increments
(16)
Defines the maximum length of the personal greeting
message that can be recorded by the subscriber.
This parameter applies to:
•Personal greeting on No Answer
•Personal greeting on Busy
•Personal greeting for After Hours
•Personal greeting for Caller ID
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
(5)
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message
will remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the
day after the message reception.
Saved Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(5)
Defines the number of days that a played message will
remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed"
whenever the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited"
is selected, the saved message will remain in the mailbox
until erased by the subscriber.
Message
Length
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(3)
Defines the maximum message length.
If set to "0: Unlimited", a subscriber can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other
messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5-100 msgs
(10)
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Message
Time
5-100 min
0: Unlimited
(10)
Specifies the total number of available minutes for
storing (both new and saved) messages in each mailbox.
Message
Retrieval
Order
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved
(played back for listening).
1. LIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
2. FIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the
oldest.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 233
Message
Scanning with
Information
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender's name
and the recording date and time to the message during
the message scan.
Play System
Prompt after
Personal
Greeting
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", directions for recording a message are
given to the caller immediately after the personal
greeting has been played.
The following guidance messages are played:
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more
features".
"To pause and restart recording, press 2".
Use Call
Waiting
on Busy
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS signals the busy extension that
another call is waiting.
Note: To use Call Waiting on Busy, you must also
enable the use of the Call Waiting feature at your PBX.
Message
Cancel for Live
Call Screening
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
The Live Call Screening feature permits the subscriber to
monitor incoming messages as they are being recorded,
or intercept them if desired. If the subscriber chooses to
speak to the caller, if not disabled by the PBX
beforehand, the VPS will record the two-way
conversation. If set to "Yes", the VPS will automatically
delete this recording.
The two-way conversation may be saved in the mailbox
if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded. If set
to "No", the recording will be automatically saved.
Note: The Live Call Screening feature is available if
APT/DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA624 or other KX-T series telephone
system.
Table 40
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
234 Installation Manual
Direct Mailbox
Access
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is able to directly enter
Subscriber Service. This is accomplished by calling a
VPS extension directly from the subscriber's extension.
The Subscriber Service Access Code (" " and mailbox
number) need not be dialed. Password entry may be
required if specified beforehand.
Note: The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if
APT/DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA624 or other KX-T series telephone
system.
Intercom
Paging Group
1-17
(COS NO.1-17:
Group 1-17;
COS NO.18-62:
Group 1)
Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to
the subscriber.
If set to "17", the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups.
Note: The Intercom Paging feature is available if APT/
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA624 or other KX-T series telephone
system.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for
the subscriber during a Message Waiting Notification
Call and Subscriber Service.
Note: If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode
but not recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory-recorded System prompts
in English.
Table 40
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 235
Remote Call
Forward to CO
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; a subscriber can program (either from
a remote location or on-site) his extension to forward
various types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or
"Telephone No.2" (preprogrammed in the Mailbox
Setting), or to any other telephone number.
Note: The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available
if DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system.
Important Note: With respect to PBX programming, it
is possible that "Call Forward to CO" is disabled. To
enable VPS Remote Call Forwarding, the KX-TD1232,
for example, must be programmed properly. For the
COS of the extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to
a CO line, enable the following: [504] Call Forward to
Outside Line.
Delete
Message
Confirmation
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the
mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased
immediately.
Number of
CIDs for Caller
Name
Announcement
0-30
(30)
Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which
subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name
Announcement.
Personal
Greeting for
CID
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", subscribers can utilize the personal
greeting feature for Caller ID.
Caller ID
Screening
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", subscribers can utilize the Caller ID
Screening feature.
Authorization
for Message
Notification
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilize the Message
Waiting Notification feature. The sub-parameters to be
set include Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode, MWL
Notification for Unreceived Message, and Device
Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to "No", sub-
parameters cannot be assigned.
Note: This parameter in COS No.1 is set to "Yes" when
the Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber
Mailboxes.
Table 40
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
236 Installation Manual
Beeper
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Caller
Select:
After recording a message, the caller is
asked if the message is urgent. If urgent, the
caller is asked to enter the callback number.
Without: Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before: Before recording a message, the VPS asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
After: After recording a message, the VPS asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
Disable: Disables the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Note: To utilize this feature, the callback number entry
code must be included in the subscriber's beeper number.
When "Disable" is selected or if the caller does not enter
a callback number, "System Callback No." (see Table
63) will be displayed on the beeper's display. If a caller's
number is received through a telephone company's
Caller ID service, the caller's number will be displayed
instead of "System Callback No.".
MWL
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp will illuminate
when unplayed messages remain after the subscriber has
accessed the mailbox for Subscriber Service.
Device
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are
received.
Authorization
for External
Message
Delivery
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilize the External
Message Delivery feature. The sub-parameter to be set is
Prompt Mode. If set to "No", sub-parameter cannot be
assigned.
Table 40
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 237
COS Nos. 63 & 64 (for Managers)
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will
be greeted by the VPS in the specified language
(prompt). However, if "Selective" is enabled, then the
receiver has a choice of prompts. See related explanation
in "Incoming Call Service Prompt" in Table 23 in
5.3.1 Port Service Menu.
Note: When "Selective" is enabled and the receiver uses
a rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified by
"Prompt for Rotary Callers" in Table 23 in 5.3.1 Port
Service Menu.
Authorization
for Auto
Forwarding
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS automatically forwards
messages that have not been accessed for a specific
length of time to another mailbox. The sub-parameters to
be set for this feature include Mailbox Number, Delay
Time, and Forwarding Mode. If set to "No", sub-
parameters cannot be assigned.
Mailbox
Number
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be
forwarded.
Note: The numbers of the System Group Distribution
List cannot be specified as the destination.
Delay Time (h) (min)
00:05 to 99:59
(00:30)
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the
VPS must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note: The delay time must be less than the New Message
Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before
being forwarded.
Forwarding
Mode
1. Copy
2. Move
(Move)
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the
original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the
messages are retained in the original mailbox after
forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are
forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained
at the original location.
Table 40
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
238 Installation Manual
Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64. COS number
64 cannot assign the parameters relating to the Message Waiting Notification and the Remote
Call Forward to CO features.
To access the proper menu for Class of Service Numbers 63 & 64 for Managers,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(63-64)
Table 41
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
(30)
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can
remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the day
after the massage reception.
Saved Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(30)
Defines the number of days a played saved message will
remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed" whenever
the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited" is selected,
saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by
the mailbox owner.
Message
Length
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(6)
Defines the maximum message length.
If set to "0: Unlimited", a manager can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other messages
will automatically be set to 6 min.
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5-100 msgs
(100)
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Mailbox
Capacity
Maximum
Message Time
5-100 min
0: Unlimited
(100)
Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing
(both new and saved) messages in each mailbox.
Message
Retrieval Order
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved
(played back for listening).
1. LIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
2. FIFO—Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 239
Message
Scanning with
Information
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender's name and
the recording date and time to the message during the
message scan.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Specifies the language used for voice prompts.
Note: If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but
not recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory-recorded System prompts in
English.
Remote Call
Forward to CO
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; the Message Manager can program
(either from a remote location or on-site) his extension to
forward various types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or
"Telephone No.2" (preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting),
or to any other telephone number.
Note: The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic
KX-T series telephone system.
Important Note: With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is disabled. To enable
VPS Remote Call Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for
example, must be programmed properly. For the COS of the
extensions whose calls are to be forwarded to a CO line,
enable the following: [504] Call Forward to Outside Line.
Delete
Message
Confirmation
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
If set to "No", the message is erased immediately.
Authorization
for Message
Notification
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", the Message Manager is able to utilize the
Message Waiting Notification feature. The sub-parameters
to be set include Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode, MWL
Notification for Unreceived Message, and Device
Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to "No", sub-
parameters cannot be assigned.
Table 41
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
240 Installation Manual
Beeper
Callback
No. Entry
Mode
1. Caller
Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits the Message Manager to use the Callback Number
Entry feature.
Caller
Select:
After recording a message, the caller is asked
if the message is urgent. If urgent, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Without: Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before: Before recording a message, the VPS asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
After: After recording a message, the VPS asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
Disable: Disables the Callback Number Entry feature.
Note: To utilize this feature, the callback number entry code
must be included in the subscriber's beeper number. When
"Disable" is selected or if the caller does not enter a callback
number, "System Callback No." (see Table 63) will be
displayed on the beeper's display. If a caller's number is
received through a telephone company's Caller ID service,
the caller's number will be displayed instead of "System
Callback No.".
MWL
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp illuminates when
unplayed messages remain after the Message Manager has
accessed the mailbox.
Device
Notification for
Unreceived
Message
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are received.
Table 41
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 241
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK
SERVICE
One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX trunk (CO
line) group: Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service.
The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the Company Greeting
Number, Prompt Mode, and Delayed Answer Time to be programmed.
Services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service has the highest priority.)
B4.1 Port Assignment
Port (1-2)-Day Mode
Note
In Tables 42 and 43, the sub-parameter "Prompt for Rotary Callers" is underlined. This
sub-parameter can be assigned only when "Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to
"Selective".
To access the proper menu for Port/Trunk Service Menu, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3
To access the proper menu for Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected
port, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)
To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-1
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
242 Installation Manual
Table 42
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Company
Greeting No.
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Incoming Call
Service
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Note 1: When you specify the Interview Service, one of
subscriber's Interview Mailbox numbers should also be
specified.
Note 2: When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be specified.
Incoming Call
Service Prompt
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his choice, provided the Message Manager
has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the
System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection
Number in "System/User 1/User 2 Prompt Selection
Number" in Table 59 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
Note: If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a rotary
caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears
when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
Delayed
Answer
Time
0-60 s
(0)
Specifies whether the port answers immediately (0) or
with delay (1-60 s).
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 243
Port (1-2)-Night Mode
Port (1-2)-Lunch Mode
Port (1-2)-Break Mode
B4.2 Trunk Group Assignment
This assignment is effective only with APT/DPT Integration. The trunk (CO line) group
numbers range from 1 to 48.
Notes
•For KX-TD series (except for KX-TD500), "trunk (CO line) group number" in this
section (assignment) means "CO line number".
•The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-2
To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-3
To access the proper menu for Break Mode features for the selected port, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-4
To access the proper menu for Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected
PBX trunk (CO line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
244 Installation Manual
Trunk (1-48)-Day Mode
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
To access the proper menu for Day Mode features for the selected PBX trunk (CO
line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-1
Table 43
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Company
Greeting No.
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(System
Greeting)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the trunk
(CO line) group.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Incoming Call
Service
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
5. None
(None)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Note 1: When you specify the Interview Service, one of
subscriber's Interview Mailbox numbers should also be
specified.
Note 2: When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be specified.
Incoming Call
Service Prompt
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this trunk (CO line) group. When set to "Selective", the
caller can select the language of his choice, provided the
Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual Selection
Menu and the System Administrator has specified Prompt
Selection Number in "System/User 1/User 2 Prompt
Selection Number" in Table 59 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
Note: If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a rotary
caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears
when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 245
Trunk (1-48)-Night Mode
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Trunk (1-48)-Lunch Mode
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Trunk (1-48)-Break Mode
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Delayed
Answer
Time
0-60 s
(0)
Specifies whether the trunk (CO line) group answers
immediately (0) or with delay (1-60 s).
To access the proper menu for Night Mode features for the selected PBX trunk (CO
line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-2
To access the proper menu for Lunch Mode Features for PBX trunk (CO line) group,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-3
To access the proper menu for Break Mode Features for the selected PBX trunk (CO
line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-4
Table 43
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
246 Installation Manual
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE
SETTINGS
B5.1 Automated Attendant Parameters
The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions: Department or Speed Dialing,
Operator's Parameters, and Alternate Extension.
Department Dialing
Department Dialing is a speed-dialing feature that permits a caller to reach the intended
extension by dialing a single digit (1-9).
To access the proper menu for Automated Attendant Parameters, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1
To access the proper menu for Department Dialing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-1
Table 44
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Department
Dialing No.1-9
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the department extension number.
Note 1: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
Note 2: The Message Manager must record the
Department Dialing menu.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 247
Operator's Parameters
Use these parameters to specify the operator's (operator 1, 2, 3) extensions and mailboxes, as
well as how to treat operator-seeking calls.
Operator's parameters can be individually set for Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
Operator's Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 1
Use this parameter to enable or disable the Operator Service. It specifies Operator 1's extension
and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension. The extension number assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager. When Operator service is
enabled, operator-seeking calls first reach Operator 1's extension.
Notes
•Because the extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is for the
Message Manager, you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox.
•By default, the extension number for the Message Manager's extension (assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be used with
the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding
Set feature. When using these features, You must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
To access the proper menu for Operator's Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2
To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 1, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-1
Table 45
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator
Service
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
Note: All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the General
Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is disabled.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
248 Installation Manual
Operator's
Extension
1-5 digits
(0)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
Note 1: The default setting (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature. An
extension number must be assigned that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
Note 2: The extension number must not be assigned
anywhere else (in particular, the extension must not have
a mailbox). Otherwise, you will get an error message.
Operator's
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(998)
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message in
this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or
No Answer Coverage modes are set.
Operator No
Answer Time
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered within
the time set, the VPS will offer other options as defined by
the "No Answer Coverage Mode".
Note 1: This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
Note 2: If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator No
Answer Time" to 15 s.
Busy Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 1 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 1 when another
call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the
PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
Table 45
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 249
Note
Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator call coverage settings
depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS. Even if the operator call coverage
parameters are set to "Next Operator" on Busy/No Answer, the call may go to the VPS (if
the Operator has set the call forwarding to the VPS).
Operator's Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 2
Operator 2 receives operator-seeking calls when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer and
Operator 1's parameters are set as follows:
•Busy Coverage Mode—No Answer Coverage
•No Answer Coverage Mode—Next Operator
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select—Allows the caller to leave a message or
call another extension. (In some cases, a call to another
extension is not available. For more information, see
the "Note" on "Caller Select" in Table 24 in
5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters.)
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1's mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to Operator 2.
Message
Repeat Cycle
1-3 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the VPS will play the
Automated Attendant top menu.
To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 2, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-2
Table 45
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
250 Installation Manual
Table 46
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator's
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 2. Any
valid extension number can be assigned.
Operator's
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 2. Callers to
Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in this
mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
Answer Coverage modes are set.
Busy Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 2
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and
the Operator 2 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified
by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 2 when another
call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the
PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the call after
playing "Thank you for calling".
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 2 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available. For more
information, see the "Note" on "Caller Select" in
Table 24 in 5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters.)
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 2's mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to Operator 3.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 251
Operator's Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 3
Operator 3 receives operator-seeking calls when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and
Operator 2's parameters are set as follows:
•Busy Coverage Mode—No Answer Coverage
•No Answer Coverage Mode—next Operator
To access the proper menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 3, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-3
Table 47
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator's
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 3. Any
valid extension number can be assigned.
Operator's
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 3. Callers to
Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in this
mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
Answer Coverage modes are set.
Busy Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 3
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and
the Operator 3 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified
by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals Operator 3 when another call
is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the call after
playing "Thank you for calling".
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
252 Installation Manual
Notes
•An operator-seeking call will always reach Operator 1 first. The call will then be
transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 sequentially, depending on system
programming.
•"Next Operator" is not applicable for "No Answer Coverage Mode" of Operator 3.
Operator's Parameters-Night Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator's Parameters-Lunch Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator's Parameters-Break Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 3 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available. For more
information, see the "Note" on "Caller Select" in
Table 24 in 5.4.3 Operator’s Parameters.)
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 3's mailbox.
3. Disconnect message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
Table 47
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 253
Alternate Extension Assignment
Assigns extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension transfer
sequence. Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the sequence
defined by "Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence" (see "Alternate Extension Transfer
Sequence" in Table 75 in B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters).
Alternate Extension Group-Enter
The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence.
Alternate Extension-Delete
The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group.
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension-Enter Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-1
Table 48
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Alternate
Extension
(1-32)
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies an extension, which requires a different
transfer sequence than normal.
Note: The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension-Delete Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-2
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
254 Installation Manual
Alternate Extension-Listing
Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group.
B5.2 Custom Service
Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services. By assigning a function to each key, you
can provide callers with a customized key operation service. You can establish a maximum of
100 Custom Services with the possible depth of 8 layers. The Message Manager should record
Custom Service Menus so that callers will know which key to press.
Note
Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times.
To access the proper menu for Alternate Extension-Listing Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-3
To access the proper menu for Custom Service Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-2-Custom Service No.(1-100)
Table 49
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt Mode 1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies the language of services within Custom
Service.
Note: This parameter overrides "Incoming Call Service
Prompt".
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu
messages will be repeated to the caller.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 255
Call Transfer
Anytime
Extn./Mbx/No
(Extn.)
Specifies the destination to which the call will be
transferred. The "Extn." setting (enter "E") enables
callers to be transferred directly to their intended party
by dialing the extension number. The "Mbx" setting
(enter "M") enables callers to leave messages in a
mailbox by entering the mailbox number. The "No"
setting (enter "N") disables extension transfer and
mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries work (following
the Custom Service menu).
Note: This parameter should be set to "No" when
Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom Service
option and it is desired that digits can be entered very
quickly to specify a mailbox. Therefore, in most cases,
"No" is the best setting for this parameter. This is
especially true if you do not want to explain "Call
Transfer Any Time" in your Custom Service menu
recording.
Wait for
Second Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Resolves the problem when the first digit of the
extension or mailbox number is the same as one of the
Custom Service menu choices. The VPS waits the
specified period of time for a second digit to be dialed.
If the time period expires without a second digit being
entered, the system assumes the caller has selected a
menu choice. Use this parameter only if "Call Transfer
Anytime" is set to "Extn." or "Mbx".
No DTMF
Input
Operation
a-f
(c)
*See the following
"Keypad
Assignment".
Specifies how to handle a call when there is no response
to the menu message. No response usually indicates
that the caller is using a rotary phone. The factory
setting is "C. Operator", which allows the caller to be
automatically connected to an operator after message
playback.
Table 49
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
256 Installation Manual
Keypad
Assignment
0-9, , #
a-n
( : d, 0: c
Others: None)
Any of the 14 services listed below (a-n) can be
assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the
telephone keypad. Callers are able to access these
services by pressing the corresponding keys on their
telephones.
(a) Transfer to Mailbox—Allows the caller to leave
messages in a specific mailbox. Enter "a"
followed by a mailbox number.
(b) Transfer to Extension—Transfers the caller to a
specific extension. Enter "b" followed by an
extension number.
(c) Operator—Connects the caller to the operator.
(d) Exit—Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller. The Message Manager is
responsible for recording this prompt.
(e) Previous Menu—If programmed, returns the
caller to the previous menu.
(f) Custom Service—If programmed, transfers the
caller to another Custom Service.
(g) Voice Mail Service—Allows the caller to access
Voice Mail Service.
(h) Call Transfer Service—Allows the caller to access
Automated Attendant Service.
Table 49
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 257
B5.3 Caller ID Call Routing Parameters
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired
destination. The VPS automatically forwards the calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers to
a programmed extension, mailbox (System Group Distribution List included) or Custom
Service. It also forwards "Private" (caller's number is not received) and "Out of Area" calls to
a desired extension, mailbox or Custom Service.
The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature.
Services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service has the highest priority.)
Keypad
Assignment
0-9, , #
a-n
(: d, 0: c
Others: None)
(i) Subscriber Service—Allows the caller to access
Subscriber Service. If this option is enabled, it is
strongly recommended that each subscriber
establish a password; this will prevent
unauthorized callers from accidentally or
intentionally accessing subscribers' mailboxes.
(j) Department Dialing—Transfers the caller to the
Department Dialing menu.
(k) Dial by Name—Requests the caller to enter the
first 3 or 4 letters of a last name of the person they
wish to reach, then transfers him to the
corresponding extension.
(l) Repeat Menu—Repeats the Custom Service menu
prompts.
(m) Main Menu—Returns the caller to the Custom
Service top menu.
(n) FAX Transfer—Allows the caller to send fax
messages to an extension specified as the fax
extension.
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3
Table 49
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
258 Installation Manual
Caller ID Call Routing-Enter
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Enter, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-1-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
Table 50
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Caller ID No. P, O or
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0,
(None)
Assigns the telephone number to which the VPS applies
automatic forwarding to a desired destination. " "
substitutes any number (=wild card). For example, to
route all calls from Area Code 201, enter "201
".
To have a "Private" call automatically forwarded to a
desired destination, enter "P".
For an "Out of Area" call, enter "O".
Description Up to 20
characters
(None)
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
number. Any ASCII character (except "\") can be used.
Note: When nothing is registered in this parameter but
the caller's name is transmitted from the Central Office,
the name will be automatically registered in this
parameter. When this is done, an asterisk " " will appear
with the Call Transfer parameter if "PUTD" is enabled.
See 7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD) for
more information. For example, you might see this:
"Custom 3 ". This indicates the name was automatically
registered in the VPS.
Call Transfer Custom/Extn./
Mbx
(None)
Specifies the destination to which the call from an
assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded.
The "Custom" setting (enter "C") forwards callers to the
specified Custom Service menu. The "Extn." setting
(enter "E") forwards callers to the specified extension.
The "Mbx" setting (enter "M") enables callers to leave
messages in the specified mailbox. A System Group
Distribution List number can be specified here instead of
a mailbox number.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 259
Caller ID Call Routing-Delete
Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list.
Caller ID Call Routing-Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Delete, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-2-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
To access the proper menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Listing, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-3
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
260 Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM
PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.1 System Group Assignment
System Group Assignment-Mailbox Group
This parameter allows a caller to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes. These
mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The VPS is
able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists. Each list can have up to 20
destination mailbox numbers. Mailboxes can be added to or deleted from these lists and
reviewed as needed.
Mailbox Group-Enter
To access the proper menu for System Group Assignment, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group-Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-1-Group List No.
Table 51
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Group
List No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant mailbox number. The caller can
specify that the VPS transfers or delivers messages to all
members of a group by simply specifying the System
Group Distribution List No.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 261
Mailbox Group-Delete
Deletes specified mailboxes from the list.
Mailbox Group-Listing
Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers.
System Group Assignment-Extension Group
You can assemble several extensions into a single list. The VPS is able to maintain up to 20
Extension Group Lists. Each list can support up to 20 extensions. You can add, delete, and
review the extensions. Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox and be notified
by the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature (if authorized) when a message is
present.
Group Name Up to 16
characters
(None)
Specifies a group name. If a group name is not required,
press RETURN, and specify the mailbox numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [(space)] can be used.
Member
1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-2-Group List No.
To access the proper menu for Mailbox Group-Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-3
Table 51
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
262 Installation Manual
Extension Group-Enter
Extension Group-Delete
Deletes specified extensions from the list.
Extension Group-Listing
Displays all Extension Group List numbers.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group-Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-1-Group List No.
Table 52
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Group List
No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant extension number.
Note: The Extension Group List number can be assigned
as "The Extension of the Owner" of a mailbox. This
permits all group members to share the information in the
mailbox.
Group Name Up to 16
characters
(None)
Specifies a group name. If a group name is not required,
press RETURN, and specify the mailbox numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [(space)] can be used.
Member
1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number belonging to the group.
Note: Members cannot have a personal mailbox.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-2-Group List No.
To access the proper menu for Extension Group List Numbers, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-3
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 263
B6.2 Time Service
Time Service-Service Mode
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day/Night, Lunch, and Break Services); however, the System Administrator
or the System Manager can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific
Service Mode.
To access the proper menu for Time Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2
To access the proper menu for Time Service-Service Mode for the selected time
group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-1
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
264 Installation Manual
In Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday service has the highest priority.)
In Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), services have this order of priority:
Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service is disregarded.)
Time Service-Time Service
Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time
of day: Day, Night, Lunch and Break Services are available.
Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters; Night Service starts when Day
Service ends, and ends when Day Service starts. There are 3 periods for Break Service: Break
1 Service, Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service.
In each Time Service period, the parameters for Port Service, Trunk Group Service and
Operator's Parameters can be specified differently.
Table 53
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Service
Mode
1. Automatic
Mode
2. Manual Day
Mode
3. Manual
Night Mode
4. Manual
Lunch Mode
5. Manual
Break Mode
6. PBX Control
Mode
(Automatic
Mode)
Assigns a specific Service Mode. There are 6 options
available:
1. Automatic Mode—Operates according to the setting in
the Time Service.
2. Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day Mode.
3. Manual Night Mode—Operates only in Night Mode.
4. Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in Lunch Mode.
5. Manual Break Mode—Operates only in Break Mode.
6. PBX Control Mode—Operation changes depending
on PBX time period.
Note: Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is
retained unless the System Manager or System
Administrator changes it again, even after the power is
cut and restored.
PBX Control Mode is available only if APT/DPT
Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX-TA624 or
other KX-T series telephone system. If PBX Control
Mode does not function after it has been selected, the
VPS will operate in Automatic Mode.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 265
Note
Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service period. If
Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period, for example, Break 3 Service does not work.
Time Service-Day Service
Time Service-Lunch Service
To access the proper menu for Time Service-Time Service, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2
To access the proper menu for Day Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-1
Table 54
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Mon
(Start/End)
|
Sun
(Start/End)
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
(9:00 AM-5:00
PM)
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Day Service.
Day Mode: Day Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
Night Mode: Night Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
To access the proper menu for Lunch Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-2
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
266 Installation Manual
Time Service-Break Service
Table 55
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Mon
(Start/End)
|
Sun
(Start/End)
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
(None)
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Lunch
Service.
To access the proper menu for Break Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-3
Table 56
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Mon
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
|
Sun
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
(None)
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Break
Service.
Note: When Break Service periods overlap Lunch
Service period, Lunch Service has priority.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 267
B6.3 Holiday Setting
You can program special settings for up to 20 Holiday Services. On the day(s) specified as
holiday(s), settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service, Port Service
and Caller ID Call Routing.
When setting specific day(s) as holiday(s), you have the following 2 options:
•The first option is to specify a single day on which to enable the Holiday Service setting.
For example, you can specify the New Year's Day as a holiday.
•The second option is to specify a range of days to enable the Holiday Service setting on
all days within the specified range. For example, you can specify the start and the end
dates of your Christmas vacation.
Note
Holidays cannot overlap. For example, if you have set Dec. 22nd to Jan. 6th as holidays, you
cannot set Jan. 1st as a holiday.
To provide a special message to callers on a holiday (for example, "Today is New Year's Day
and our office is closed. If you wish to record a message, please press 1 now".), you can create
a Custom Service menu. Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan. 1st. Use
foreign languages where appropriate.
Holiday Setting-Enter
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting-Enter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-1-Holiday No.(1-20)
Table 57
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Name of
Holiday
Up to 16 characters
(None)
For reference. Any alphanumeric character, and
[(space)], [-], [.] and ['] can be used.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
268 Installation Manual
Date MM/DD-MM/DD
or
MM/DD
(MM: Month
DD: Day)
(None)
Specifies the day or the range of days on which to
enable Holiday Service setting.
•If you want to set a single day as a holiday, specify
only one date.
•If you want to set a range of days as holidays,
specify both the start and the end dates of the range.
Note: Holidays cannot overlap.
Retain Holiday 1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Stores the Holiday Service setting for future use. If set
to "Yes", the same setting will be activated
automatically on the same day every year. If set to
"No", the setting will be canceled automatically after
the holiday is over.
Service 1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the
holiday.
Note: When Interview Service is specified, one of
Subscriber's Interview Mailbox numbers should also
be specified. When the Custom Service is specified,
one of Custom Service numbers (1-100) should also be
specified.
Company
Greeting No.
1-32
S: System Greeting
N: None
(S: System
Greeting)
Specifies the Company Greeting to be played on the
holiday.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
(However, the Message Manager can change this.)
Port Affected Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port number on which the Holiday
Service setting is activated. The unspecified ports
provide the usual incoming call service.
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Trunk Affected Trunk No.
(1-48)
Specifies the trunk (CO line) number on which the
Holiday Service setting is activated. The unspecified
trunks (CO lines) provide the usual incoming call
service.
Note: Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Table 57
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 269
Holiday Setting-Delete
Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number (1-20).
Holiday Setting-Listing
Displays all of the specified holiday names and dates.
B6.4 Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Adjusts the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving time.
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-2
To access the proper menu for Holiday Setting-Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-3
To access the proper menu for Daylight Saving Time, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-4
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
270 Installation Manual
Note
The VPS changes to and from DST at 2:00 AM. According to current U.S. guidelines, in
most of the United States, DST begins at 2:00 AM on the first Sunday in April and ends at
2:00 AM on the last Sunday in October.
B6.5 Prompt Setting
This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Table 58
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Start Date/End
Date
MM: Month
DD: Day
(None)
Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight
saving time. The VPS advances 1 h on the starting date
of daylight saving time, and restores the time on the
ending date. Both the starting date and the ending date
must be set. The same date cannot be used for both
settings.
Warning: Time Synchronization (see 7.2.4 Set
Time (TIME)) overrides the DST setting of the VPS.
To access the proper menu for Prompt Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-5
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 271
Table 59
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
System Prompt
Selection
Number
1-9
(None)
Assigns a selection number (1-9) to each prompt. Callers
use the numbers to select the desired language for their
message prompts. This setting is required when either one
or both of the following parameters are set to "Selective".
Port Assignment—Incoming Call Service Prompt
Authorization of External Message Delivery—Prompt
Mode
Example:
For service in English, press (7).
For service in French, press (8).
For service in Chinese, press (9).
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this
Multilingual Selection Menu.
Note: The Prompt Selection Number should not match the
first digit of any mailbox number, because mailbox/
extension access is possible during and after the
Multilingual Selection Menu.
User 1 Prompt
Selection
Number
User 2 Prompt
Selection
Number
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp
for User 1
Prompt
1. Before
2. After
3. 24-h
(User 1 Prompt:
After;
User 2 Prompt:
24-h)
This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or
User 2 Prompts are in use. This parameter specifies the
following:
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp
for User 2
Prompt
1. Before—the VPS announces "AM/PM" before the time
(e.g., P.M. 3:42).
2. After—The VPS announces "AM/PM" after the time
(e.g., 3:42 P.M.).
3. 24-h—the VPS announces the time in 24-h format (e.g.,
15:42).
Note: When System Prompts are in use, the parameter is
set to "After".
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
272 Installation Manual
B6.6 System Caller Name Announcement
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce prerecorded Caller ID caller names
when extension users listen to messages from the assigned numbers left in their mailbox.
Extension users can also hear caller names when the VPS forwards calls from the assigned
numbers to them (Caller ID Screening). The recorded caller names will also play when the
callers use the Intercom Paging features; the recorded names will be added to the end of the
page.
The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS (Class of Service) settings.
This feature is also enabled by selecting "Call Screening" in 4.1 Call Transfer Status in the
Subscriber's Guide.
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" in 4.1 Call Transfer
Status, and/or in 4.3 Incomplete Call Handling Status in the Subscriber's Guide.
The Message Manager is responsible for recording System Caller Names.
System Caller Name Announcement-Enter
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Enter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-1-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
Table 60
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Caller ID No. Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9, 0
(None)
Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS
announces prerecorded caller name to extension users.
Description Up to 20 characters
(None)
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
number. Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 273
System Caller Name Announcement-Delete
Deletes specified Caller ID List numbers from the list.
System Caller Name Announcement-Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
B6.7 Other Parameters
Other Parameters-Extension Numbering Plan
Specifies the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognize the dialed
extension as valid. This setting promotes the call handling of the Automated Attendant Service.
We recommend that this parameter be set for better integration with the PBX.
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Delete, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-2-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
To access the proper menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Listing, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-3
To access the proper menu for Other Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7
To access the proper menu for Extension Numbering Plan, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-1
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
274 Installation Manual
Table 61
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Numbering
Plan
1-16
2-5 digits
consisting
of 0-9, X
(Numbering
Plan
1: 1XX;
Numbering Plan
2-16: None)
Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension
numbers. You can add up to 16 entries to the list. Each entry
can contain 2-5 digits "0-9", and a letter "X" which matches
any digit. Extension numbers cannot begin with "0".
Examples:
a) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 101
through 164 and 201 through 264, specify the numbers
as follows:
1XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "1".
2XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "2".
b) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400
through 450 and 3300 through 3399, specify the
numbers as follows:
4XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "4".
33XX: Indicates any 4-digit extension starting with
"33".
Note:
Auto Configuration will set this parameter automatically.
The Automated Attendant will dial any 2-5 digit PBX
extension number (except numbers beginning with "0")
whether valid or not. If the dialed number is included in the
numbering plan, the Automated Attendant will
immediately send it to the PBX without waiting for further
input. If not, the Automated Attendant will wait until the
dialed number is recognized as an extension number, the
internal inter-digit timer expires, or the caller dials 5 digits.
If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the
Numbering Plan, the VPS will consider it an outside
number. The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the
"Outgoing Call Setup Sequence".
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 275
Other Parameters-Dialing Parameter
To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-2
Table 62
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Number of
Digits
to Access
Outside Line
0-8 digits
(1)
Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an
outside (CO) line.
Example:
If the PBX requires callers to dial "9" to access an
outside (CO) line, this parameter should be set as "1".
This enables the system to recognize that an outgoing
call setup sequence is completed once the initial "9"
has been dialed (9-123-4567). The full sequence is
therefore: 9-(outgoing call setup sequence)-123-4567.
The VPS can discriminate between local and long
distance calls and can report outgoing calls and calling
times for billing purposes on periodic port usage
reports.
Call Transfer
No Answer
Time
10-60 s
(20)
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait
before retrieving the transferred call when there is no
answer at the destination extension.
Note: Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No
Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call
Forwarding No Answer Time at the PBX. Otherwise,
the PBX may forward the call (transferred by the VPS)
immediately to its destination without leaving enough
time to answer the call.
Outgoing Call
No Answer
Time
10-90 s
(30)
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait
before concluding that there is no answer at the outside
number called.
Pause Time 1-9 s
(2)
Specifies the pause time between dialed digits.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
276 Installation Manual
Other Parameters-Message Waiting Notification
Controls the handling of message waiting notification calls.
Outgoing Call
Setup
Sequence
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, , #, F, R, S, T,
W
(T)
Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS when
calling a CO line. You can set up to 12 digits. The
default value is "T". "T" indicates that the system will
dial the telephone number only after detecting a dial
tone.
Example:
9W = (9) - 1-s wait - dial telephone number. "9" is the
CO line access number.
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
To access the proper menu for Message Waiting Notification Parameter, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-3
Table 63
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Device feature. The VPS makes outgoing
calls using the port specified in this parameter. At least 1
port must be specified.
Table 62
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 277
Message
Waiting Lamp
Ports
Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Lamp feature.
The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the
extension using the port specified in this parameter. At
least 1 port must be specified.
Message
Waiting Lamp
for Every
Message
1. No
2. Yes
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting
Lamp of the extension each time a new message is
recorded in the mailbox. This will occur even if the
Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a
previous message. This setting is useful when the first
attempt is unsuccessful.
If set to "No", the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting
Lamp for the first message only. The VPS will not turn
on the lamp for subsequent messages until the subscriber
has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages stored
there.
Max. Digits for
Callback No.
1-48 digits
(20)
Specifies the maximum number of digits the caller can
enter as a callback number. This number will display on
beepers if the "Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode" is
enabled.
Callback No.
Entry Interdigit
Time-Out
1-10 s
(5)
Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on
Beeper Callback No. Entry. If the caller does not enter
any digits within the specified time, the VPS will not
accept entry of any additional digits.
System
Callback No.
Up to 32 digits
(None)
Specifies a telephone number that will display on the
subscriber's beeper as a callback number. The callback
number entry mode "X" must be included in the
telephone number.
Note: If "Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode" is enabled
through COS, the callback number entered by the caller
will display on the destination beeper. However, if the
caller fails to enter a callback number, the System
Callback No. will display instead.
Table 63
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
278 Installation Manual
Other Parameters-External Message Delivery
Controls the handling of External Message Delivery calls.
To access the proper menu for External Message Delivery, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-4
Table 64
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Retry Times 0-9 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times to attempt an external
message delivery call when the destination is busy or if
there is no answer.
Busy Delay 1-60 min
(3)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait
after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver
the message again.
No Answer
Delay
60-120 min
(60)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait
after a no answer condition is received before trying to
deliver the message again.
Outgoing Call
Ports
Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message
Delivery feature.
Message
Length
1-6 min
(3)
Specifies the allowable message length of external
delivery messages that the subscriber can record.
Max. Messages
for Mailboxes
1-100 msgs
(3)
Specifies the maximum number of external delivery
messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox.
System
External
Message
Delivery
Duration Time
1-9 min
(3)
Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowed
for an external message delivery call to prevent excessive
telephone charges. Time begins counting when the
destination number answers the call. The VPS terminates
the call when it exceeds the specified length of time.
However, the VPS does not terminate a call until the
whole message is played even though the specified time
expires.
Callback
Telephone No.
Up to 32 digits
(None)
Specifies the Callback Telephone Number. When the
recipient has failed to retrieve the sender's message
because of incorrect password entries, the VPS announces
the Callback Telephone Number for him to call in order to
retrieve it.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 279
Other Parameters-Call Hold
To access the proper menu for Call Hold, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-5
Table 65
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Call Hold
Mode
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
If set to "Enable", the VPS gives callers the option of
either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of
several Incomplete Call Handling service options.
While on hold, the VPS periodically gives callers the
choice to either continue to hold or select one of the
Incomplete Call Handling service options.
If set to "Disable", the VPS immediately offers callers the
Incomplete Call Handling service.
Call Queuing
Announcement
Mode
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their
current position in the call hold queue.
Example:
"One other person is waiting to connect".
Call Retrieval
Announcement
Timing
1-30 s
(2)
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieved
during call holding.
Example:
"To cancel holding, press 2 now.
Otherwise, I'll try your party again".
Redialing
Cancel Timing
1. 15 s
2. 30 s
3. 45 s
4. 60 s
(30)
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
messages that ask if continuous redials are to be
attempted during call holding.
Example:
"To continue holding, press 1.
Otherwise, press 2".
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
280 Installation Manual
Other Parameters-Rotary Telephone Service
Specifies how to treat callers who are calling from rotary telephones (unable to input touchtone
signals) or who are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance.
Other Parameters-Intercom Paging Parameter
Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller's party through
telephone speakers. To utilize this feature, the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature
available and the VPS must be properly programmed. This feature is available for APT/DPT
Integration mode only.
To access the proper menu for Rotary Telephone Service, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-6
Table 66
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Rotary
Telephone Call
Coverage
(Day), (Night)
1. G. D. M.
2. Operator
Extension
(G. D. M.)
Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary
telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with
the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service.
Note: G.D.M. = General Delivery Mailbox.
To access the proper menu for Intercom Paging Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-7
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 281
Table 67
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Intercom
Paging
Sequence
Up to 12 digits con-
sisting of 0-9, , #
and special codes
(FXW)
Specifies the intercom paging sequence required by
the PBX. This can be programmed using up to 12 of
the following 8 letters and 12 dial codes.
D: Disconnecting
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Pager Dialing
A: Answer
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Release for
Intercom
Paging
Up to 12 digits con-
sisting of 0-9, , #
and special codes
(FW)
Specifies the intercom paging release code required by
the PBX. This can be programmed using up to 12 of
the 8 letters and 12 dial codes as specified above.
No Answer
Time for
Intercom
Paging
1-30 s
(5)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must
wait before concluding Intercom Paging when there is
no answer.
The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer expires.
Announcement
Repeat Cycle
1-3 times
(1)
Specifies the number of times to announce the
intercom page.
Example:
"I have a call for (mailbox owner's name)".
Intercom
Paging Retry
1-10 times
(2)
Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the
paging destination is busy or if there is no answer.
Note: This setting applies only when the subscriber has
enabled "Intercom Paging" in Incomplete Call
Handling Status.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
282 Installation Manual
Other Parameters-Fax Management
You can program the VPS to automatically forward incoming fax calls to a fax extension. You
can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for the Automatic Fax Transfer.
If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the VPS will forward the fax
transmission to the alternate fax extension.
Paging Code
for Group 1-16
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, ,# for each
group
(Group 1-8:
331-338;
All Groups
[Group 17]: 33 )
Specifies the intercom paging access code required by
the PBX.
Note: The Intercom Paging Group Number available
for each subscriber is determined on a COS-by-COS
basis.
Paging Code
for All Groups
To access the proper menu for Fax Management, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-8
Table 68
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Automatic
Transfer of
Incoming Fax
Call
1: Disable
2: Enable
(Disable)
Enables or disables the Automatic Transfer of Incoming
Fax Call Service.
Note: Automatic detection works for only the first 30s.
Main Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the main fax extension number.
Alternate Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the alternate fax extension number. When the
main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the
specified "Fax No Answer Time", the VPS forwards the
fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Table 67
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 283
Fax No Answer
Time
5-60 s
(10)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must
wait before taking other action when there is no answer at
either fax extension.
Note: This timer applies to the fax call that has been
transferred to the main or alternate fax extension.
Fax Manager
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number. The VPS
will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls
depending upon the settings of the "Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode" and "Fax Notification Mode "
parameters.
Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode
1. No
2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager's mailbox.
Example: "The FAX transfer situation is as follows. One
attempt was no answer".
1. If set to "Ext", the VPS will call the Fax Manager's
extension to specify the number of unanswered fax
calls received.
2. If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager's mailbox.
3. If set to "No", the VPS will take no action concerning
unanswered fax calls.
Fax Notification
Mode
1. No
2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager's
mailbox.
Example: "You have 1 FAX message".
1. If set to "Ext", after a fax extension successfully
receives a fax call, the VPS will automatically call the
Fax Manager's extension and play a voice prompt:
"You have 1 FAX message". The VPS will also leave
the total number of received fax calls in the Fax
Manager's mailbox.
2. If set to "No", the VPS will not take any action
concerning successfully received fax calls.
Table 68
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
284 Installation Manual
Other Parameters-Disconnect Parameter
To access the proper menu for Disconnect Parameter, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7-9
Table 69
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Maximum
Silence Time
5-60 s
(10)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the VPS
must wait until it disconnects the call when silence is
detected.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 285
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE
SETTINGS
For System Administration (system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis), an RS-232C
terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS.
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters
To access the proper menu for Hardware Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6
To access the proper menu for RS-232C Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-1
Table 70
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Baud Rate 1. 300 bps
2. 600 bps
3. 1200 bps
4. 2400 bps
5. 4800 bps
6. 9600 bps
7. 19200 bps
8. 38400 bps
(9600)
Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in
bits per second.
Word Bit
Length
1. 7 bits
2. 8 bits
(8 bits)
Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
Parity 1. None
2. Odd
3. Even
(None)
Specifies the parity to use for error detection.
Stop Bit
Length
1. 1 bit
2. 2 bits
(1 bit)
Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of
the byte.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
286 Installation Manual
B7.2 Port Setting
Port Setting Menu
To access the proper menu for Port Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-2
To access the proper menu Port Setting Menu for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-2-Port No.(1-2)
Table 71
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Flash Time 1. 100 ms
2. 300 ms
3. 600 ms
4. 900 ms
(600)
Specifies the length of time the hook switch must be
pressed before the PBX will recognize it as a flash hook
signal. See the PBX manual to determine the correct
value.
CPC Signal 1. None
2. 6.5 ms
3. 150 ms
4. 300 ms
5. 450 ms
6. 600 ms
(None)
Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an
interruption in the CPC (Calling Party Control) signal
received from the PBX. The VPS is able to determine
that the line has been disconnected when it detects an
interruption of the CPC signal.
Disconnect
Time
1-8 s
(2)
Specifies the length of time the line will temporarily be
unavailable after a call has ended.
Dial Mode 1. DTMF
2. Pulse 10 pps
3. Pulse 20 pps
(DTMF)
Specifies the dial mode for DTMF (touchtone) or Pulse.
If Pulse is specified, pulse speed (10/20 pps) must be
selected.
Note: This setting only affects outward dialing from the
VPS. The VPS can only receive DTMF (touchtone)
signals.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 287
B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters
Three separate parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signaling and performance
with the PBX.
Dialing Parameters
These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing
calls, and control message waiting lamps on extensions. The procedure for verifying the
correct code sequences for non-Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems is to manually
execute the sequences from a single line telephone (SLT) with the PBX.
To access the proper menu for PBX Interface Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3
To access the proper menu for Dialing Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-1
Table 72
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
PBX Type 1. Other Manufacturers
2. KX-T Series
1. T308/T616
2. T1232
3. T96
4. T336
5. TD816/TD1232/TA1232
6. TD308
7. TA series
8. TD500
(TD816/TD1232/TA1232)
Specifies the type of PBX connected to the
VPS. In the case of a Panasonic KX-T series
telephone system, the model number should
also be specified.
Notes: The Dialing Parameters are set
automatically to each PBX default value after
selecting the PBX type.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
288 Installation Manual
Table 73
PBX Type Other
Manufac-
turers
KX-T series
T308/
T616 T1232 T96 T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308
TA series TD500
Integration
Mode
None None None None None None *1DPT None *2APT None *1DPT
Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband Inband
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX FTX FX
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX FTX FX
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX FTX FTX FTX FTX FTX FX FTX FX FTX FX
Reconnect
Sequence
on Busy
FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F FWW F
Reconnect
Sequence
on No
Answer
FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F FWW F
Reconnect
Sequence
on Refuse
Call
FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW FWW F FWW F FWW F
Light-On
Sequence
for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None N/A T701X
#T#91X T9X
T701X —T701X
#—T701X —
Light-Off
Sequence
for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None N/A T702X
#T#90X T#9X T700X —T702X
#—T700X —
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 289
Call
Waiting
Sequence
NoneN/A1N/AN/A111111
Release
Sequence
for Call
Waiting
NoneN/AFN/AN/AFFFFFF
*1When your KX-T series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode.
*2When your KX-TA624 telephone system is in APT Integration mode.
N/A Not available
—Not needed
Table 73
PBX Type Other
Manufac-
turers
KX-T series
T308/
T616 T1232 T96 T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308
TA series TD500
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
290 Installation Manual
Table 74
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Integration
Mode
1. None
2. Inband
3. APT
4. DPT
(DPT)
Specifies the method of integrating the VPS with the
PBX.
1. None—Both PBX and VPS work independently,
without accessing information concerning the status
of the other.
2. Inband—The PBX sends touchtone codes to the VPS
to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,
disconnect, etc.). Inband Integration improves the
VPS performance because call state recognition is
faster than with standard call progress tone detection.
The PBX code for each call state must be set in the
Inband Signaling Parameters. If PBX type is set to a
KX-T series telephone system, the Inband Signaling
Parameters will automatically default to the proper
codes. This is available with any of the following
Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems: T1232,
TA series, T96, T336, TD816, TD1232, TA1232,
TD308, and TD500.
3. APT—The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
APT interface. This is available only with Panasonic
KX-TA624.
4. DPT—The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
DPT interface. This is available with any of the
following Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems:
TD816, TD1232, TA1232, TD308, and TD500.
Extension
Number of
VPS Port 1-2
2-4 digits
(Port 1-2: 165-
166)
Specifies the extension number of each VPS port.
Note: Extension numbers of the VPS ports will
automatically be assigned when: (1) Auto Configuration
is executed, or (2) PBX type has been changed.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 291
To program the following 10 Parameters in the next table, use the Special Commands and Dial
Codes listed below. You can set up to 12 digits for each parameter.
D: Disconnecting
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Extension dialing
A: Answer
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Table 75
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
(FX)
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to the operator's extension.
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
(FX)
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to any extension except the operator's.
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
(FX)
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
(F)
If an extension is busy, this sequence allows the VPS to
reconnect to the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
No Answer
(F)
If the extension does not answer, this sequence allows the
VPS to reconnect with the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
(F)
The VPS performs this sequence to retrieve a call placed
on hold after the extension (in the Call Screening mode)
has refused to accept it.
Light-On
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
(None)
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must perform to
enable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message
Waiting Lamp
(None)
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must perform to
disable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
292 Installation Manual
Inband Signaling Parameters
Use these parameters if the PBX sends touchtones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call
(busy, answered, disconnected, etc.). The integration mode must be set to "Inband". If PBX
type is set to a KX-T series telephone system, the Inband Signaling parameters will
automatically default to the proper codes.
The following parameters can be programmed using "0-9", " ", "#", and "A-D".
Call Waiting
Sequence (1) The VPS carries out this sequence when performing call
waiting if the extension being called is busy.
Release
Sequence for
Call Waiting
(F)
The VPS performs this sequence to release call waiting.
To access the proper menu for Inband Signaling Parameters, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-2
Table 76
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Ringback (1) Indicates "Ringback Tone". Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialed is ringing.
Busy (2) Indicates "Busy Tone". Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialed is busy.
Reorder
(3)
Indicates "Reorder Tone". Sent to the VPS when an
invalid extension number is dialed or when inadvertently
connected to another VPS.
DND (4) Indicates "Do Not Disturb Tone". Sent to the VPS if the
dialed extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled.
Answer (5) Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the
call.
Forward to VM
Ringing (6)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to
accept the call.
Table 75
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 293
Note
Default values in the above table vary depending on the settings of "PBX type" and "Inband
Integration" (PBX Interface Parameters).
N/A: Not available
Forward to VM
Busy (7)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to
accept the call.
Forward to
Other
Extension
(8)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to
another, non-Voice Mail extension.
Confirmation (9) Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialed a Message
Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code.
Disconnect (#9) Sent to the VPS when the other party goes "on-hook".
Table 77
Parameter Other
Manufac-
turers
KX-T series
T308/
T616 T1232 T96 T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232
TD308 TA
series TD500
Ringback N/A N/A 1 A1 A1 1 1 1 1
Busy N/AN/A2B1B1 2 222
Reorder N/A N/A 3 B2 B2 3 3 3 3
DND N/A N/A 4 B3 B3 4 4 4 4
Answer N/A N/A 5 A2 A2 5 5 5 5
Forward to VM
Ringing
N/AN/A6C1C1 6 666
Forward to VM
Busy
N/AN/A7C2C2 7 777
Forward to
Other Extension
N/AN/A8C3C3 8 888
Confirmation N/A N/A 9 D1 D1 9 9 9 9
Disconnect N/A N/A #9 DD DD #9 #9 #9 #9
Table 76
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE
294 Installation Manual
Digit Translation Table Parameters
Use the Digit Translation Table to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the
proper codes for the VPS. This translation table is only effective for the incoming signal.
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Inter-Digit Timeout
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Input/Output
To access the proper menu for Digit Translation Table Parameters, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3
To access the proper menu for Inter-Digit Timeout, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3-1
Table 78
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Inter-Digit
Timeout
1-4 s
(1)
Defines the incoming signal interval (Follow on ID). The
Digit Translation Table is translated by a series of signals
received within the specified time period.
To access the proper menu for Input/Output, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3-2
Table 79
Parameter Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Table
1-8
Input digit Up to 8
digits
consisting of
0-9, , #,
A-D
(None)
Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming
signal. If this occurs, the system will take the first
assignment.
Output
digit
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 295
Appendix C
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
296 Installation Manual
C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
The System Manager's Mailbox must be accessed before performing any System Manager
task. To access the System Manager's Mailbox, three items of information must be known: the
telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service, the System Manager's
Mailbox Number and the Password for that mailbox (if assigned). The System Manager's
Mailbox Number is 99, 999 (default), 9999 or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number
length specified in System Programming. The System Manager's password is assigned through
the System Manager's Service.
To Access the System Manager's Mailbox
1. Dial the Extension Number connected to the Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS
Extension Number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
2. Press [ ], then Type the System Manager's Mailbox Number (99, 999, 9999 or 99999).
3. Type the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of System Manager's Service will be
played:
Please enter your party's mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
Enter your password, followed by [#].
You have (number) new message(s).
To receive the message, press [1].
To deliver a message, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To check the mailbox distribution, press [4].
For a system report, press [5].
For other features, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 297
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The System Manager's primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to
maintain system organization by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot set up mailboxes. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can both create and edit Subscriber Mailboxes by following the steps
below.
At any step, when editing an assigned mailbox's parameters, change current settings by
Pressing [1]. To leave the current setting unchanged, Press [2].
When creating a new mailbox, the following parameters can be set:
•Mailbox Number
•Subscriber's Voiced Name—The VPS allows a maximum of 4 s to record the name. The
name must be spoken slowly and clearly. Use the subscriber's last name.
•Extension Number
•Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber's Last Name—Enter only the first 3 or 4 letters of
the owner's last name.
•Class of Service Number—Enter any COS number (1-62).
•Interview Mailbox Number—Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from
Subscriber Mailbox Numbers
•All Calls Transfer Mailbox
Follow the steps listed below to create, edit or delete any mailbox parameter.
1. Log in to the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [1] to Assign or Edit.
5. Type the mailbox number.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
298 Installation Manual
6. Press [2] to accept the entry.
7. As each parameter plays:
a) Press [1] to enter the new parameter or [2] to leave the parameter unchanged.
b) Enter the parameter.
c) Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
8. The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered. When this
entry is completed, the prompt at Step 4 will appear. Continue assigning or editing other
mailboxes by repeating Steps 5-7.
9. To return to the Main Menu, Press [ ] twice.
Deleting a Mailbox
The System Manager must delete the mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another
person accesses the VPS, the action is automatically canceled.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [2] for Delete.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the mailbox.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 299
Deleting a Mailbox Password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must delete the password before it can be
reassigned by the subscriber.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for the Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [3] for Password Reset.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the password.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
300 Installation Manual
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS
Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to mailbox owners. A maximum of
64 Class of Services can be established. Each Class of Service can be set using the telephone.
COS No.63 and No.64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System Manager
respectively.
For a complete explanation of COS parameters, please see Table 40 and Table 41 in
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
•*1Personal Greeting Length—Length ranges from 8-60 s in increments of 4 s.
•New Message Retention Time—Maximum time is 30 days.
•Saved Message Retention Time—Up to 30 days/0: Unlimited.
•Message Length—Length ranges from 1-6 min/0: Unlimited.
•Number of Messages—The number of messages range from 5-100.
•Total Message Time—Total message time ranges from 5-100 min/0: Unlimited.
•Message Retrieval Order—Settings are LIFO (Last In First Out) or FIFO (First In First
Out).
•Message Scanning with Information—Settings are enable or disable.
•*1Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting—Settings are enable or disable.
•*1Call Waiting on Busy—Settings are enable or disable.
•*1Message Cancel for Live Call Screening—Settings are enable or disable.
•*1Direct Mailbox Access—Settings are enable or disable.
•*1Intercom Paging Group Number—1-17
•Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
1. System Prompt
2. User 1 Prompt
3. User 2 Prompt
•*2Remote Call Forward to CO—Settings are enable or disable.
•Delete Message Confirmation—Settings are enable or disable.
•*1Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement—0-30
•*1Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID—Settings are enable or disable
•*1Caller ID Screening—Settings are enable or disable
•*2Message Notification—Settings are enable or disable
•*1External Message Delivery—Settings are enable or disable
•*1Auto Forwarding—Settings are enable or disable
*1 Not available for COS No.63 (Message Manager) and COS No.64 (System Manager)
*2 Not available for COS No.64 (System Manager)
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 301
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot set COS parameters. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [2] to set Class of Service.
4. Type the Class of Service Number (1-64).
Personal Greeting Length
New Message Retention Time
Saved Message Retention Time
5. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Type the Personal Greeting length (8-60 s).
Note
The value goes up in increments of 4 s.
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
6. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the retention time (up to 30 days).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
7. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the retention time (up to 30 days or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
302 Installation Manual
Message Length
Number of Messages
Total Message Time
Message Retrieval Order
Message Scanning with Information
8. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Type the message length (1-6 min or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
9. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the number of messages (5-100).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
10. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the total message time (5-100 min or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
11. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current order (LIFO or FIFO).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
12. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 303
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting
Call Waiting on Busy
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
Direct Mailbox Access
Intercom Paging Group Number
13. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
14. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
15. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
16. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
17. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the group number (1-17).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Note
If set to "17 (Group 17)", the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
304 Installation Manual
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
Remote Call Forward to CO
Delete Message Confirmation
Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement
Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID
18. a) The current setting plays. Press [1], [2], or [3] to change the desired mode.
•[1] System Prompt
•[2] User 1 Prompt
•[3] User 2 Prompt
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
19. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
20. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
21. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the number of Caller IDs (0-30).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
22. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 305
Caller ID Screening
Message Notification
23. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
24. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If the
Message Notification is enabled, go to Step 24b below.
b) Press [1], [2], [3], [4], or [5] to choose the desired Beeper Callback Number Entry
Mode.
•[1] Caller Select Mode
•[2] Without message mode
•[3] Before message recording mode
•[4] After message recording mode
•[5] Disable All Entry Mode (Caller cannot access beeper)
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [6] to accept it.
d) The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message plays. Press [1]
to change the setting (enable or disable).
e) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
f) The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message plays. Press [1]
to change the setting (enable or disable).
g) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Return to Step 24a above.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
306 Installation Manual
External Message Delivery
Auto Forwarding
25. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If the
External Message Delivery is enabled, set the prompt mode for receiving External
Delivery Messages (go to Step 25b below).
b) The current prompt mode plays. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired
mode.
•[1] System Prompt
•[2] User 1 Prompt
•[3] User 2 Prompt
•[4] Selective Prompt
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [5] to accept it. Return to Step 25a above.
26. a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable). If Auto
Forwarding is enabled, go to Step 26b below.
b) The current forwarding destination mailbox number plays. Press [1] to change the
mailbox number.
c) Type the mailbox number.
d) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
e) The current delay time is played. Press [1] to change the setting. The delay time is
the period of time that the VPS must wait before forwarding messages. For
example, enter 115# to set the delay time to 1 h 15 min; 30# to set 30 min.
f) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
g) The current forwarding mode is played. Press [1] to change the setting (copy or
move).
h) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Return to Step 26a above.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 307
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The system clock can be set directly from the telephone. It is important to set the exact time
because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery, redialing and rescheduling
of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion are all scheduled using this
setting. The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able to set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and
ends.
Note
The System Manager cannot set the system clock while:
•the System Administrator programs via a personal computer,
•the Message Manager sets the system clock, records the Voice Labels and System
Caller Names, and customizes the Message Manager's Mailbox.
"The VPS plays Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [3] to set the time and date.
4. Press [1] to change the current time.
5. Type the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o'clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15,
press 5, 1, 5, and #".
6. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of 'AM/PM' in Time
Stamp" in Table 59 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
7. Press [2] to accept the time.
8. Press [1] to change the current date.
9. Type the current month and Press [#].
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
308 Installation Manual
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #".
10. Type the day and Press [#].
11. Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
12. Press [2] to accept the date.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 309
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Services); however, the System Manager or
System Administrator can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific
Service Mode.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is retained unless the System Manager or System
Administrator changes it again, even after the power is cut and restored.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot change the Service Mode setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
Assigning the Service Mode
There are 6 Service Modes available:
•Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
•Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
•Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
•Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in Lunch Mode
•Manual Break Mode: Operates only in Break Mode
•PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period (available only
with APT/DPT Integration)
In the Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday service has the highest priority.)
In the Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), Holiday Service is disregarded:
Caller ID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Holiday Service is disregarded.)
In the PBX Control Mode: (1) under DPT Integration, the VPS obtains the Time Service (Day,
Night, Lunch or Break) setting from the PBX when a call is received through a PBX and
operates accordingly; (2) under APT Integration, the VPS obtains the Time Service setting
from the PBX when the time period changes at the PBX or APT data link has been established
between the VPS and PBX.
When the Integration Mode is other than APT/DPT Integration and the PBX Control Mode is
selected, the VPS will operate in the Automatic Mode.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, the PBX Control
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
310 Installation Manual
Mode may not function properly. For more information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-
833-9626.
Follow the steps below to assign a Service Mode.
1. Log in the main menu.
2. Press [6] for other features.
3. Press [4] to change Service Mode setting.
4. The VPS plays the current setting. Press [1] to change the setting.
5. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to choose the desired Service Mode entry.
•[1] Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
•[2] Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
•[3] Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
•[4] Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in the Lunch Mode
•[5] Manual Break Mode: Operates only in the Break Mode
•[6] PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 311
C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING
SETTING
Company Greeting greets all incoming callers. The System Manager or System Administrator
can choose the appropriate company greeting to each individual Time Service period (Day,
Night, Lunch, and Break) for each port and trunk (CO line) group. The default is set at the
System Greeting prior to factory shipment.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot change the Company Greeting setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [5] to change Company Greeting setting.
4. Press [1] to change the port setting, or [2] to change the trunk service setting.
5. Type 1-2 (port number) or 1-48 (trunk group number).
6. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired Time Service period entry.
•[1] Day Time service
•[2] Night Time service
•[3] Lunch Time service
•[4] Break Time service
7. The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting.
8. Press [1], [2], or [3] to choose the desired setting entry.
•[1] To change Company Greeting number
•[2] To set System Greeting—Go to Step 10
•[3] To disable—Go to Step 10
9. Type the Company Greeting number 1-32.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
312 Installation Manual
10. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 313
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM
REPORTS)
The System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to help monitor the VPS operating status.
The reports are sent from the RS-232C port to either a printer or a terminal. (The System
Administrator is also able to output System Reports.)
Obtaining System Reports
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], or [8] to generate the desired report.
•[1] System Service Report
•[2] Flash Memory Usage Report
•[3] Port Usage Report
•[4] Mailbox Usage Report
•[5] Mailbox Parameter Report
•[6] Call Account Report
•[7] Class of Service Parameter Report
•[8] Fax Call Report
Note
The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as "Mailbox Assignments". The Class of
Service Parameter Report is displayed as "COS Assignments".
4. For Flash Memory Usage Report, Port Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report or Fax Call
Report, Press [1]. To generate the Mailbox Usage Report, Go to Step 5.
5. Mailbox Usage Report—Type the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-digit
mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System Report
Menu will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the
range, or Press [2] to obtain all mailbox usage counts. This mailbox number is the end of
the mailbox range. The mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range. For
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
314 Installation Manual
example, to specify the mailbox range 1001 through 1209, enter 1001 in Step 5 and 1209
in Step 6.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, a System Report
will not be generated. The System Report starts to be generated after the System
Administrator has completed programming and system prompt [>] is displayed on the
personal computer.
Clearing the Reports
The Port Usage, Flash Memory Usage, Mailbox Usage, and Fax Call Reports can be cleared.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [2] to clear the Flash Memory Usage Reports, [3] to clear the Port Usage Reports, [4]
to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, or [8] to clear the Fax Call Report.
4. Press [2] to clear the report. To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, Go to Step 5.
5. Type the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-digit
mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System Report
Menu will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range, and Type the mailbox number of the end of the
range. Press [2] to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 315
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
The System Manager can deliver the same message to all or specified subscribers' mailboxes.
When delivering a message to specified mailboxes, he can check the distribution status of each
message.
Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver the same message
to all subscribers at the same time. The message to broadcast is recorded in the System
Manager's mailbox. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current VPS
status such as remaining flash memory capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be
erased, etc.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [1] to record a broadcast message.
4. Record a broadcast message and Press [1].
5. Press [2] to accept the message recorded.
Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscriber mailboxes by specifying
their numbers.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [2] to deliver a message.
4. Type the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
Note
Enter by name by Pressing [#] [1] first.
Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
316 Installation Manual
5. Press [2] to accept the number if it is correct.
Note
Press [2] to add mailbox numbers. Press [3] to review the mailing list. Press [ ] to
cancel message transfer.
6. Press [1] to record a message.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the entry.
9. Press [1] to specify the delivery time and the private status.
Note
Press [2] to send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu.
10. Press [1] to specify the delivery time.
11. Type the time and Press [#].
12. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of 'AM/PM' in Time
Stamp" in Table 59 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
13. Type the date (month and day) and Press [#].
14. Press [2] to accept the entry.
15. Press [1] to make this message private; otherwise, Press [2].
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 317
Checking Mailbox Distribution
Use this feature to check if messages have been delivered to recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to check distribution status.
3. Press [3] to cancel the message or delete verification.
Note
Press [1] to listen to messages. Press [1] twice to check the previous message. Press [2]
to check the next message.
4. Press [1] to delete verification of this message, or [2] to cancel message delivery.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
318 Installation Manual
C9 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
In order to ensure system security, establish a password consisting of up to 10 numeric
characters. Anyone requesting access to the System Manager's service will be required to enter
this password before proceeding.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customize the mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the mailbox password. If
a password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current setting.
4. Type the password and Press [#].
Note
If a password is not needed, Press [#]. It is recommended that the password be set to
maintain security.
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 319
C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER
MESSAGES
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message was
recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•[1] Repeat this message
•[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
•[2] Play the Next Message
•[3] ([1]) Erase this Message
•[4] Reply
•[5] Rewind
•[6] Fast Forward
•[7] Transfer
•[8] Message Scan
SYSTEM MANAGER'S GUIDE
320 Installation Manual
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 321
Appendix D
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
322 Installation Manual
D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager's Mailbox must be accessed before performing any Message Manager
task. To access the Message Manager's mailbox, three items of information must be known:
the telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service, the Message Manager's
Mailbox Number, and the Message Manager's Password (if assigned). The Message Manager's
Mailbox Number is 98, 998 (default), 9998, or 99998 depending upon the mailbox number
length specified in System Programming. The Message Manager's password is assigned
through the Message Manager's Service.
To Access the Message Manager's Mailbox
1. Dial the Extension Number connected to the Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS
Extension Number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
2. Press [ ], then enter the Message Manager's Mailbox Number 98, 998, 9998 or 99998.
3. Type the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of Message Manager's Service will
be played.
Please enter your party's mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
Enter your password, followed by [#].
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To set station call forwarding, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 323
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY
MAILBOX
One of the Message Manager's functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for
messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (System Group
Distribution Lists may be used). This can be done at any time using the telephone.
Listening to Messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his
mailbox. He can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if
necessary, transfer them to their intended recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message was
recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•[1] Repeat this Message
•[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
•[2] Play the Next Message
•[3] ([1]) Erase this Message
•[4] Reply
•[5] Rewind
•[6] Fast Forward
•[7] Transfer
•[8] Message Scan
Transferring Messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients
with voice comments attached when necessary. When a message has been transferred, we
recommend that the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [1] to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
324 Installation Manual
3. The VPS plays the first (next/last) message. Press [7] to transfer the message.
4. Type the destination mailbox number.
5. Press [2] to accept the number.
6. Press [2] to transfer with comment.
Note
Press [1] to transfer messages without comment. Press [3] to add a mailbox number.
Press [4] to review the Mailing List.
7. Record the comments and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the comments entered.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 325
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION
The VPS can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his mailbox.
Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available: Notification by Message Waiting
Lamp and Notification by Calling.
Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status
The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager's Mailbox.
Note
The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager's
extension. However, its default extension number (0) cannot be used with the Message
Waiting Lamp feature. When using this feature, you must assign the extension number that
is included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status, or [2] to accept it.
Setting Notification by Calling Status
The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper when a new message is recorded in the Message
Manager's Mailbox. Set the following parameters as appropriate.
Setting Device Status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The
Message Manager cannot enable a device according to a schedule. The System Administrator
must accomplish this task (see "Time Frame 1, 2" in Table 38 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES).
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
326 Installation Manual
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification.
3. Press [2] to change the Device Status.
4. Type the device number (1-3).
Note
If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number, you
cannot set the device status. See "Assigning Notification Numbers" to assign a
telephone number.
5. Press [1], [2], or [3] to select the device status.
•[1] Schedule (enabled on the schedule)
•[2] Continuously (enabled whole day)
•[3] Not Use (disabled whole day)
Assigning Notification Numbers
Up to 3 telephone or beeper numbers can be set for message notification. Use the number keys
0 to 9, the tone/pulse switch, and the beeper Callback Number Display Entry Code [X] to make
these assignments.
When the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper number, the VPS
will ask the caller to enter the callback number that will display on the beeper. System
Programming determines if the Callback Number Entry is to be entered before, after, or
without the message.
It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not to enter a callback number. The
System Manager must authorize the use of the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [3] to assign Telephone Number.
4. Press [1] to change the first telephone number, [2] to change the second telephone number,
or [3] to change the third telephone number.
5. Press [1] to set the telephone number.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 327
6. Type the telephone number.
7. Press [2] to accept the entry.
•[1] Change the telephone number
•[2] Accept
•[3] Review
•[4] Add more digits
•[5] Insert a pause
•[6] Set dial mode
•[7] Insert a wait for dial tone
•[8] Insert a beeper display command
8. Press [1] to be notified by telephone or [2] by a beeper.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
328 Installation Manual
D4 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER'S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager is able to customize the Message Manager's mailbox by specifying: (1)
the password; (2) the extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3; or (3) Telephone numbers 1
and 2 as the call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO line.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the Message Manager
cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
Message Manager's Password
The Message Manager can specify the password at any time using the telephone. The password
contains up to 10 numeric characters. It must be entered to execute the message management
operation.
Operator's Extensions
When callers require help, they can Press [0] on their telephone keypad to be transferred to an
operator extension. In each Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Modes, up to 3 operators (Operator
1, 2, 3) can be specified. The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will
be for the Message Manager.
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO
The customization of the Message Manager's mailbox only allows you to assign Telephone
number 1 and/or 2; to enable call forwarding to the telephone number assigned by following
the steps below, follow the instructions in D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET.
If you should change the telephone number after you have enabled call forwarding to a CO line,
you must go back to D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET to reset the call forwarding
setting; otherwise, you will be transferring calls to the old telephone number unknowingly.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customize Mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the password. If a
password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current setting—
Go to Step 6.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 329
4. Type the password and Press [#].
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
6. The VPS plays the current operator's extension setting. Press [1] to change or assign the
operator's extension. Press [2] to accept the current setting, or Press [3] to delete the current
setting—Go to Step 9.
Note
Operator 1's extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Type the extension number.
8. The VPS plays the current extension setting. Press [2] to accept it.
9. Repeat Steps 6-8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and
Break Modes for each operator.
10. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [1] to change the telephone
number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 11. Press [2] to accept
the current setting—Go to Step 13.
11. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
•Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code (to
seize a CO line).
•When connected to the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232, the maximum number of
characters allowed to be entered is 16; when connected to the KX-TD500, 24.
12. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
13. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [1] to change the telephone
number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 14. Press [2] to accept
the current setting.
14. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
15. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
330 Installation Manual
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The Message Manager can set the system clock directly from the telephone. It is important to
set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery,
redialing and rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion
are all scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and System Manager are also
able to set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins and
ends.
Note
The Message Manager cannot set the system clock while:
•the System Administrator programs via a personal computer,
•the System Manager sets mailboxes and Class of Service (COS), and customizes the
System Manager's Mailbox.
The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to set the time and date.
3. Press [1] to change the current setting.
4. Type the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o'clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15,
press 5, 1, 5, and #".
5. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected in "Position of 'AM/PM' in Time
Stamp" in Table 59 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
6. Press [2] to accept the time.
7. Press [1] to change the current date.
8. Type the current month and Press [#].
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 331
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #".
9. Type the day and Press [#].
10. Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
11. Press [2] to accept the date entered.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
332 Installation Manual
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (specifically:
menus, voice labels, user prompts, and system caller names). He is responsible for maintaining
the following:
•Company Greetings—Up to 32 company greetings for business/non-business and Lunch/
Break hours as well as holidays can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
•Company Name
•The Department Dialing Menu (maximum length: 6 min)—A caller can access departments
with the touch of one key. Nine Department Dialing selections (1 to 9) can be recorded.
•The Custom Service Menus (maximum length: 6 min each)—Up to 100 custom service
menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services they require without the
need for a human operator. This is the most useful and powerful feature of your Panasonic
Voice Processing System. For example, the Message Manager can record menus in a wide
variety of foreign languages.
•* The Voice Labels (maximum length: 6 min each)—Up to 20 System Group Distribution
Lists can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice label.
•The User Prompts (maximum length: 6 min each)—There are 3 kinds of voice mail
prompts: (1) System Prompts, (2) User 1 Prompts, and (3) User 2 Prompts. Generally, the
System Prompts should be left alone; they are recorded at the factory in English. However,
the Message Manager can record User 1 Prompts and User 2 Prompts in any language he
wishes.
•The Multilingual Selection Menu (maximum length: 6 min)—With this menu, callers can
select the language they prefer to hear all prompts (mentioned in the previous paragraph,
"The User Prompts"). For example, the Message Manager can record a menu like this:
For English, press (7).
For French, press (8).
For Chinese, press (9).
•* The System Caller Names (maximum length: 4 s each)—Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can
be registered by the System Administrator. The Message Manager is responsible for
recording a name for each Caller ID number.
* While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the Message Manager
cannot record the Voice Labels and System Caller Names. The VPS plays "Sorry, this
function is not available".
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 333
Recording Menus and Voice Labels
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Select the desired number to be recorded.
•[1] Record the Company Greetings.
•[2] Record the Company Name.
•[3] Record the Department Dialing Menu.
•[4] Record the Custom Service Menus.
•[5] Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists.
•[7] Record the Multilingual Selection Menu.
4. For the item selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•For the Company Greetings—Enter the Company Greeting Number (1-32).
•For the Company Name—Go to Step 5.
•For the Department Dialing Menu—Go to Step 5.
•For the Custom Service Menus—Enter a Custom Service Number (1-100).
Enter [0] to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
•For the Voice Labels—Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be
labeled. (The System Administrator assigns list numbers.)
•For the Multilingual Selection Menu—Go to Step 5.
5. The VPS plays the current message. Press [1] to change the message. If a message has not
yet been recorded, go to Step 7.
6. Press [1] to record the message. Press [2] to erase the current message and return to Step 3
or 4.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the message.
Note
•Press [1] to review the recorded message.
•Press [3] to erase the recorded message and try again—Return to Step 7.
•Press [4] to add a message.
•Press [ ] to erase the recorded message and exit—Return to Step 3.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
334 Installation Manual
9. Repeat Steps 4-8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or Voice
Labels.
Recording User Prompts
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [6] to modify user prompts.
4. Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or [2] to change User Prompt 2.
5. To change specific prompts, Go to Step 6.
To change all prompts in a row without reviewing the current recording, Go to Step 7.
6. To change specific prompts:
a) Press [1]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of modifiable
prompts in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.)
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded, the VPS plays the
system prompt—go to Step 6g. (If you wish to turn off a certain prompt, please first
record a "dummy" prompt. Then go back to Step 6 and you will be able to turn it off by
going through these steps.)
Note
•Press [2] to return to Step 6b.
e) The VPS plays the current prompt. Press [1] to change the prompt.
Note
•Press [2] to retain the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
f) Press [1] to record a new prompt.
Note
•Press [2] to erase the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
•Press [3] to turn off/on the specified prompt—Return to Step 6b.
g) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
h) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Note
•Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
•Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 6f.
•Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Return to Step 6b.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 335
i) Repeat Steps 6b to 6h to record other prompts.
7. To change all prompts in a row:
a) Press [2]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of modifiable
prompts in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.)
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt.
Note
•Press [2] to go to Step 7g.
•Press [3] to turn off/on the prompt.
e) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
f) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Note
•Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
•Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 7e.
•Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Go to Step 7g.
g) The VPS plays the next prompt number.
h) Repeat Steps 7d to 7g to record other prompts.
Note
User prompts can be saved in a personal computer (command SAVE through the RS-232C).
Once they have been saved, they can be restored (with the command LOAD) at any time.
There is a complete list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers in D9 LIST OF
MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.
Recording System Caller Names
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [8] to modify system caller names.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
336 Installation Manual
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number*1 (1-120) to be modified.
Note
•Enter [ ] to return to Step 3.
•To record system caller names, first Caller ID numbers must be assigned (see
B6.6 System Caller Name Announcement).
5. The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name. To change the name, Press [1]. If a name
has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to Step 6.
Note
•Press [2] to accept the current name—Return to Step 4.
•Press [3] to erase the current name—Return to Step 4.
6. Record the name at the tone and Press [1].
7. The VPS plays the recorded name. Press [2] to accept it.
Note
•Press [1] to change the recorded name—Return to Step 6.
•Press [3] to erase the recorded name—Return to Step 4.
8. Repeat Steps 4-7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
*1 Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 337
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
The Message Manager can program his extension (assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode)
from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone. There are six forwarding settings available:
•FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number.
•FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is
busy.
•FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there
is no answer.
•FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when
the line is busy or there is no answer.
•FWD to CO—Forward all incoming calls to Telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in
the Mailbox Setting), or to any other telephone number.
•FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding setting.
Notes:
•The Remote Call Forwarding Set feature is available with DPT Integration only.
•By default, the extension number for the Message Manager's extension (assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be used with
this feature. When using this feature, you must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
•FWD to CO must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilized (see
"Remote Call Forward to CO" in Table 41 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS).
Assigning the Remote Call Forwarding Set
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] to set Remote Call Forwarding.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to select the desired forwarding setting.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
338 Installation Manual
•[1] FWD All
•[2] FWD Busy
•[3] FWD No Answer
•[4] FWD Busy or No Answer
•[5] FWD to CO
•[6] FWD Cancel
4. For the items selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•For FWD All—Go to Step 5.
•For FWD Busy—Go to Step 5.
•For FWD No Answer—Go to Step 5.
•For FWD Busy or No Answer—Go to Step 5.
•For FWD to CO—Go to Step 7.
•For FWD Cancel—Go to Step 10.
5. Type the extension number.
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the extension number—Return to Step 5.
7. Press [1] or [2] to select Telephone number 1 or Telephone number 2 (Go to Step 9), or
Press [3] to select another telephone number.
8. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
•Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code (to
seize a CO line).
•When connected to the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232, the maximum number of
characters allowed to be entered is 16; when connected to the KX-TD500, 24.
9. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the telephone number. Return to Step 7.
10. Call Forwarding is canceled. Press [2] to accept it.
11. Call Forwarding setting data is transmitted to the PBX. If the forwarding setting or
canceling has been completed properly, you will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call
forwarding is canceled".
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 339
Note
If you hear "Call Forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination number",
the forwarding setting has not been completed properly at the PBX, possibly because
a nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. It is also possible
that the model of the connected PBX does not support the Remote Call Forwarding
Set, or its software version is lower than required; for more information, call National
Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
340 Installation Manual
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND
AA SERVICE
There are over 900 voice prompts (all listed in the next section) and they come in 3 types.
(1) System Prompts—in English (cannot be modified)
(2) User 1 Prompts—recordable
(3) User 2 Prompts—in Spanish (can be erased or modified)
However, in many cases it is not necessary to record all the voice prompts (recording over 900
voice prompts is a big undertaking). When an outside party calls AA service or VM service,
he only hears some of the following prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or
modify) these prompts. Please change prompts as needed for your application. For example,
prompt no. [819] could be "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the
Voice Processing System". (The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 min.)
Note
To identify the prompt(s) linked to each prompt listed below, refer to the next section,
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Table 80
Prompt No. Modifiable Prompts
248 Good afternoon
249 Good evening
250 Good morning
819 Welcome to the Voice Processing System
675 To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
132 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person's last name
198 For 'Q', press 7
199 For 'Z', press 9
505 Sorry, there are no more matching names
513 Sorry, this name cannot be found
277 Incorrect entry
274 If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line
618 To call the operator, press 0
49 Calling the operator
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 341
VM Prompts
AA Prompts
417 Please wait a moment
818 Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
416 Please leave a message at the tone
668 To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
702 To pause and restart recording, press 2
732 To review, press 1
603 To accept, press 2
678 To erase and try again, press 3
614 To add, press 4
677 To erase and exit, press
697 To make this message private, press 1
392 Otherwise, press 2
531 Thank you for calling
Table 81
Prompt No. Modifiable Prompts
413 Please enter your party's mailbox number
Table 82
Prompt No. Modifiable Prompts
412 Please enter your party's extension
825 You have a call
502 Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
695 To leave a message, press 1
672 To enter another extension, press
510 Sorry, this line is busy
Table 80
Prompt No. Modifiable Prompts
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
342 Installation Manual
276 If you would like to hold, press 1
622 To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I'll try your party again
Table 82
Prompt No. Modifiable Prompts
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 343
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
The table below shows the modifiable prompts. Record prompts as User 1 or User 2. Some of
the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number. Whenever possible,
record related prompts together so that the assembled sentence flows naturally and sounds like
one voice. You can change all service prompts to User 1 or User 2 by changing the DIP Switch
setting (see Table 1 in 1.3.2 System Components).
If you wish to change some of service prompts to User 1 or User 2, but not all of them, please
see the following sections:
•B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS; "Prompt Mode" of Tables 40 and 41.
•B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE; "Incoming Call
Service Prompt" of Tables 42 and 43.
•B5.2 Custom Service; "Prompt Mode" in Table 49.
•B6.5 Prompt Setting; Table 59.
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
1 20 members maximum [509], [ 1]
2 8 members maximum [509], [ 2]
3 After hours greeting is (message) [ 3]
4 After hours greeting is not recorded [ 4]
5 All beeper entry modes are disabled [ 5]
6 All calls transfer to mailbox disabled [ 6]
7 All calls transfer to mailbox enabled [ 7]
8 All mailboxes are assigned [ 8]
9 All messages erased [ 9]
10 All transfer services disabled [ 10]
11 AM [ 11]
12 and [ 12]
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
[325], [ 12]
13 and transferred via (mailbox number) [ 13]
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
14 Answer length is (number) [ 14], [454]
15 Any digit on the telephone keypad
can be used
[ 15]
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
344 Installation Manual
16 APRIL [ 16]
17 at [ 17]
[594], [ 17]
[304], [432], [ 17]
[323], [17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
[158], [379], [ 17]
[318], [ 17]
[305], [816], [ 17]
[159], [ 17]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
18 (number) attempts were busy [ 18]
19 (number) attempts were no answer [ 19]
20 (number) attempts were successful [ 20]
21 AUGUST [ 21]
22 Auto forwarding disabled [ 22]
23 Auto forwarding enabled [ 23]
24 because message retention time
expired
[157], [815], [ 24]
25 Beeper access disabled [ 25]
26 Beeper access enabled [ 26]
27 Beeper callback number entry mode
is after message recording
[ 27]
28 Beeper callback number entry mode
is before message recording
[ 28]
29 Beeper callback number entry mode
is caller select
[ 29]
30 Beeper callback number entry mode
is without message
[ 30]
31 being delivered now [324], [ 31]
32 Busy signal greeting is (message) [ 32]
33 Busy signal greeting is not recorded [ 33]
34 Call blocking enabled [ 34]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 345
35 Call screening enabled [ 35]
36 Call transferred from the voice
processing system
[ 36]
37 CALLBACK NUMBER [ 37]
38 Caller ID (number) [ 38], [252]
[ 38], [253]
39 Caller ID number and caller name
deleted
[ 39]
40 Caller ID number entries for this box
are full, there are 30 entries for caller
ID allowed
[ 40]
41 Caller ID number is (telephone
number)
[ 41]
[ 41], [647], [603]
42 Caller ID number is not assigned [ 42]
[ 42], [647], [392]
43 Caller ID numbers assigned [541], [ 43]
44 Caller ID screen disabled [ 44]
45 Caller ID screen enabled [ 45]
46 Caller name is (name) [ 46]
47 Caller name is erased [ 47]
48 Caller name is not recorded [ 48]
49 Calling the operator [ 49], [417]
50 Cannot be retrieved [ 50]
51 Class of service number is (number) [ 51], [583]
[ 51], [584]
[ 51]
52 Company greeting number (number) [ 52], [154]
53 Company greeting number is
(number)
[ 53]
54 Company name (name) [ 54]
55 Company name erased [ 55]
56 Counts cleared [ 56]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
346 Installation Manual
57 Covering extension is (extension
number)
[ 57]
58 Covering extension not assigned [ 58]
59 Covering extension transfer disabled [ 59]
60 Covering extension transfer enabled [ 60]
61 Custom service menu [ 61]
[ 61], [154]
62 Custom service number (number) [ 62]
63 Date is (date) [ 63]
64 Day mode first operator's extension is
(extension number)
[ 64]
65 Day mode first operator's extension is
not assigned
[ 65]
66 Day mode second operator's
extension is (extension number)
[ 66]
67 Day mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[ 67]
68 Day mode third operator's extension
is (extension number)
[ 68]
69 Day mode third operator's extension
is not assigned
[ 69]
70 days [ 70]
[339], [ 70]
[449], [ 70]
71 DECEMBER [ 71]
72 Delay time is (time) [ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [264]
[ 72], [332]
73 deleted [289], [ 73]
74 Delivering message to (name) [ 74]
75 Delivery list number is (number) [ 75]
76 Department dialing menu erased [ 76]
77 Department dialing menu is (menu) [ 77]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 347
78 Device notification for unreceived
message disabled
[ 78]
79 Device notification for unreceived
message enabled
[ 79]
80 Device number is (number) [ 80]
81 DIAL TONE [ 81]
82 digits [865], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
[121], [822], [ 82]
[875], [822], [ 82]
83 Direct mailbox access disabled [ 83]
84 Direct mailbox access enabled [ 84]
85 EIGHT [ 85]
86 EIGHT [HOUR] [ 86]
87 EIGHT [MINUTE] (OWE EIGHT) [ 87]
88 EIGHTEEN [ 88]
89 EIGHTEEN [HOUR] [ 89]
90 EIGHTEEN [MINUTE] [ 90]
91 EIGHTEENTH [ 91]
92 EIGHTH [ 92]
93 EIGHTY [ 93]
94 EIGHTY EIGHT [ 94]
95 EIGHTY FIVE [ 95]
96 EIGHTY FOUR [ 96]
97 EIGHTY NINE [ 97]
98 EIGHTY ONE [ 98]
99 EIGHTY SEVEN [ 99]
100 EIGHTY SIX [100]
101 EIGHTY THREE [101]
102 EIGHTY TWO [102]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
348 Installation Manual
103 ELEVEN [103]
104 ELEVEN [HOUR] [104]
105 ELEVEN [MINUTE] [105]
106 ELEVENTH [106]
107 Enter 1 for AM, or 2 for PM [107]
108 Enter a class of service number from
1 to 64
[108]
109 Enter a group number from 1 to 9 [109]
110 Enter a group number, 1 through 4 [110]
111 Enter a mailbox list number [111]
112 Enter a message length from 1 to 6
minutes
[112]
113 Enter a message retention time up to
30 days
[113]
114 Enter a personal greeting length from
8 to 60 seconds
[114]
115 Enter delivery list number 1 or 2 [115]
116 Enter device number, 1 through 3 [116]
117 Enter extension number [117]
118 Enter question number, followed by
the hash sign
[118]
119 Enter question number, followed by
the pound sign
[119]
120 Enter the 4 digits password [120], [747]
[120], [746]
121 Enter the caller ID number [121], [822], [ 82]
122 Enter the caller name announcement
number 1 through 120
[122]
123 Enter the company greeting number 1
through 32
[123]
124 Enter the custom service prompt
number 1 through 100
To record custom service exit prompt,
press 0
[124]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 349
125 Enter the day of the month, followed
by the hash sign
[125]
126 Enter the day of the month, followed
by the pound sign
[126]
127 Enter the day, followed by the hash
sign
[127]
128 Enter the day, followed by the pound
sign
[128]
129 Enter the delay time, followed by the
hash sign
[129]
130 Enter the delay time, followed by the
pound sign
[130]
131 Enter the destination mailbox number [131], [675]
[131], [674]
132 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the
person's last name
[132], [198], [199]
[132]
133 Enter the first 4 letters of the owner's
last name
[133]
134 Enter the interview mailbox number [134]
135 Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the hash sign
[135]
136 Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the pound sign
[136]
137 Enter the mailbox number [137]
[137], [812]
[137], [813]
138 Enter the maximum number of caller
IDs for caller name announce Valid
entries are from 0 to 30
[138]
139 Enter the maximum number of
messages per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
[139]
140 Enter the month, followed by the hash
sign
[140], [208]
141 Enter the month, followed by the
pound sign
[141], [208]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
350 Installation Manual
142 Enter the new time, followed by the
hash sign
[142], [208]
143 Enter the new time, followed by the
pound sign
[143], [208]
144 Enter the operator's extension number [144]
145 Enter the owner's extension number [145]
146 Enter the prompt number [146]
147 Enter the telephone number and wait
To insert a pause or special
command, enter the partial number
and wait for the options menu
[147]
148 Enter the time, followed by the hash
sign
[148], [208]
[148], [664], [208]
149 Enter the time, followed by the pound
sign
[149], [208]
[149], [665], [208]
150 Enter the total message time available
per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes
[150]
151 Enter your party's mailbox number [151], [675]
[151], [674]
152 Enter your password, followed by the
hash sign
[152]
[152], [746]
153 Enter your password, followed by the
pound sign
[153]
[153], [747]
154 erased [ 52], [154]
[ 61], [154]
155 Extension (extension number) [155]
156 Extension number (extension
number)
[156]
157 External delivery message for (name) [157], [815], [ 24]
158 External delivery message scheduled
for (name)
[158], [379], [ 17]
159 External delivery message scheduled
on (date)
[159], [ 17]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 351
160 External delivery message will be
sent right away
[160]
161 External delivery message will be
sent to (name)
[161], [447]
162 External message delivery disabled [162]
163 External message delivery enabled [163]
164 FAX messages [824], [164]
165 FEBRUARY [165]
166 FIFTEEN [166]
167 FIFTEEN [HOUR] [167]
168 FIFTEEN [MINUTE] [168]
169 FIFTEENTH [169]
170 FIFTH [170]
171 FIFTY [171]
172 FIFTY [MINUTE] [172]
173 FIFTY EIGHT [173]
174 FIFTY EIGHT [MINUTE] [174]
175 FIFTY FIVE [175]
176 FIFTY FIVE [MINUTE] [176]
177 FIFTY FOUR [177]
178 FIFTY FOUR [MINUTE] [178]
179 FIFTY NINE [179]
180 FIFTY NINE [MINUTE] [180]
181 FIFTY ONE [181]
182 FIFTY ONE [MINUTE] [182]
183 FIFTY SEVEN [183]
184 FIFTY SEVEN [MINUTE] [184]
185 FIFTY SIX [185]
186 FIFTY SIX [MINUTE] [186]
187 FIFTY THREE [187]
188 FIFTY THREE [MINUTE] [188]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
352 Installation Manual
189 FIFTY TWO [189]
190 FIFTY TWO [MINUTE] [190]
191 FIRST [191]
192 First telephone number is (telephone
number)
[192]
193 First telephone number is not
assigned
[193]
194 FIVE [194]
195 FIVE [HOUR] [195]
196 FIVE [MINUTE] (OWE FIVE) [196]
197 for [197]
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
198 For 'Q', press 7 [132], [198], [199]
199 For 'Z', press 9 [132], [198], [199]
200 For a system report, press 5 [711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
201 For automated attendant status, press
4
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
202 For department dialing, press * [412], [675], [202]
[412], [674], [202]
203 For example, to enter 5 o'clock press
5 and the hash sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the hash sign
[203]
204 For example, to enter 5 o'clock press
5 and the pound sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the pound sign
[204]
205 For example, to enter January, press 1
and the hash sign
[205]
206 For example, to enter January, press 1
and the pound sign
[206]
207 For external message delivery, press
3
[207]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 353
208 For help, press 0 [149], [208]
[149], [665], [208]
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[143], [208]
[141], [208]
[148], [208]
[148], [664], [208]
[142], [208]
[140], [208]
209 For interview mailbox management,
press 1
[209]
210 For mailbox management, press 5 [711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
211 For notification by telephone, press 1
For notification by beeper, press 2
[211]
212 For other features, press 6 [711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
213 For the next name, press 2 [602], [213], [718], [671]
214 FORTY [214]
215 FORTY [MINUTE] [215]
216 FORTY EIGHT [216]
217 FORTY EIGHT [MINUTE] [217]
218 FORTY FIVE [218]
219 FORTY FIVE [MINUTE] [219]
220 FORTY FOUR [220]
221 FORTY FOUR [MINUTE] [221]
222 FORTY NINE [222]
223 FORTY NINE [MINUTE] [223]
224 FORTY ONE [224]
225 FORTY ONE [MINUTE] [225]
226 FORTY SEVEN [226]
227 FORTY SEVEN [MINUTE] [227]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
354 Installation Manual
228 FORTY SIX [228]
229 FORTY SIX [MINUTE] [229]
230 FORTY THREE [230]
231 FORTY THREE [MINUTE] [231]
232 FORTY TWO [232]
233 FORTY TWO [MINUTE] [233]
234 Forwarding mailbox number is
(mailbox number)
[234]
235 Forwarding mailbox number is not
assigned
[235]
236 Forwarding mode is copy [236]
237 Forwarding mode is move [237]
238 FOUR [238]
239 FOUR [HOUR] [239]
240 FOUR [MINUTE] (OWE FOUR) [240]
241 FOURTEEN [241]
242 FOURTEEN [HOUR] [242]
243 FOURTEEN [MINUTE] [243]
244 FOURTEENTH [244]
245 FOURTH [245]
246 FRIDAY [246]
247 from (name) [575], [247]
[266], [247]
[267], [247]
248 Good afternoon [248], [819]
[248]
249 Good evening [249], [819]
[249]
250 Good morning [250], [819]
[250]
251 Greeting erased [251]
252 greeting is (message) [ 38], [252]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 355
253 greeting is not recorded [ 38], [253]
254 Group member deleted [254]
255 Group name erased [255]
256 Group name not recorded [256]
257 Group number (number) [257]
258 has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
259 has not been received [323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
260 HASH(#) [260]
261 Hello, this is the voice processing
system
[261]
262 (Not available)
263 Hello, this is voice processing system
with the following information
More than 80% of flash memory
space is now utilized
Please erase unnecessary messages
[263]
264 hours (time) [ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [264]
265 HUNDRED [265]
266 I have a call for (name) [266]
[266], [247]
267 I have a call for mailbox (mailbox
number)
[267]
[267], [247]
268 I have a message for (name) [268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
269 I was unable to reach (name) [269]
270 I'll notify by beeper [270]
271 I'll notify by telephone [271]
272 I'll redial (number) [272], [337]
273 I'll redial only once [273]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
356 Installation Manual
274 If you are using a rotary telephone,
stay on the line
[274], [618]
[274]
275 If you want me to call back later,
press 3
[268], [711], [690], [275]
276 If you would like to hold, press 1 [276], [392]
277 Incorrect entry [277]
278 Intercom paging disabled [278]
279 Intercom paging enabled [279]
280 Intercom paging group number is
(number)
[280]
281 Interview mailbox number is
(mailbox number)
[281]
282 Interview mailbox number is deleted [282]
283 Interview mailbox number is not
assigned
[283]
284 JANUARY [284]
285 JULY [285]
286 JUNE [286]
287 Leaving a message is disabled [287]
288 Leaving a message is enabled [288]
289 Mailbox [289]
[289], [ 73]
290 Mailbox is in use [290]
291 Mailbox list label erased [291]
292 Mailbox list number (number) [292]
293 Mailbox number already specified [293]
294 MARCH [294]
295 Maximum number of caller IDs for
caller name announce is (number)
[295]
296 Maximum number of messages per
mailbox is (number)
[296]
297 MAY [297]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 357
298 Message back up disabled [298]
299 Message back up enabled [299]
300 Message cancel for live call screening
disabled
[300]
301 Message cancel for live call screening
enabled
[301]
302 Message delivery canceled [302]
303 Message erased [303]
304 Message for (name) [304], [432], [ 17]
305 Message from (name) [305], [816], [ 17]
306 Message from the interview mailbox [306]
307 Message from the message manager [307]
308 Message from the system manager [308]
309 Message length is (time) [309], [332]
310 Message Manager [310]
311 Message notification disabled [311]
312 Message notification enabled [312]
313 Message reception mode is interview
mode
[313]
314 Message reception mode is message
recording mode
[314]
315 Message reception mode is set to
interview mode
[315]
316 Message reception mode is set to
message recording mode
[316]
317 Message recorded by (mailbox
number)
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
318 Message recorded on (date) [318], [ 17]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
319 Message retrieval order is first-in-
first-out
[319]
320 Message retrieval order is last-in-
first-out
[320]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
358 Installation Manual
321 Message scanning with information
is disabled
[321]
322 Message scanning with information
is enabled
[322]
323 Message sent on (date) [323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
324 Message to (name) [324], [ 31]
325 Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[325], [ 12]
326 Message waiting lamp notification
disabled
[326]
327 Message waiting lamp notification
enabled
[327]
328 Message waiting lamp notification
for unreceived message disabled
[328]
329 Message waiting lamp notification
for unreceived message enabled
[329]
330 Messages [330]
[824], [330]
331 (number) messages to verify [331]
332 minutes [332]
[309], [332]
[763], [332]
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [332]
333 MONDAY [333]
334 more caller ID numbers [821], [334]
335 more members [821], [335]
336 MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED [336]
337 more times [272], [337]
338 New message [338]
339 New message retension time is (day) [339], [ 70]
340 new messages [824], [340]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 359
341 Night mode first operator's extension
is (extension number)
[341]
342 Night mode first operator's extension
is not assigned
[342]
343 Night mode second operator's
extension is (extension number)
[343]
344 Night mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[344]
345 Night mode third operator's extension
is (extension number)
[345]
346 Night mode third operator's extension
is not assigned
[346]
347 NINE [347]
348 NINE [HOUR] [348]
349 NINE [MINUTE] (OWE NINE) [349]
350 NINETEEN [350]
351 NINETEEN [HOUR] [351]
352 NINETEEN [MINUTE] [352]
353 NINETEENTH [353]
354 NINETY [354]
355 NINETY EIGHT [355]
356 NINETY FIVE [356]
357 NINETY FOUR [357]
358 NINETY NINE [358]
359 NINETY ONE [359]
360 NINETY SEVEN [360]
361 NINETY SIX [361]
362 NINETY THREE [362]
363 NINETY TWO [363]
364 NINTH [364]
365 No answer greeting is (message) [365]
366 No answer greeting is not recorded [366]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
360 Installation Manual
367 No external delivery message
pending
[367]
368 No letters have been specified [368]
369 No messages to verify [369]
370 No more messages [370]
371 No one specified by this number [371]
372 No previous message [372]
373 No question recorded [373]
374 NOVEMBER [374]
375 O'CLOCK [375]
376 OCTOBER [376]
377 of (company name) [592], [377]
378 Old message [378]
379 on (date) [158], [379], [ 17]
380 ONE [380]
381 ONE [HOUR] [381]
382 ONE [MINUTE] (OWE ONE) [382]
383 One attempt was busy [383]
384 One attempt was no answer [384]
385 One attempt was successful [385]
386 One message to verify [386]
387 One other person is waiting to
connect
[387]
388 Only extension call is available [499], [388], [415]
389 Operator transfer disabled [389]
390 Operator transfer enabled [390]
391 (number) other people are waiting to
connect
[391]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 361
392 Otherwise, press 2 [676], [392]
[697], [392]
[532], [647], [392]
[651], [392]
[276], [392]
[533], [647], [392]
[654], [392]
[720], [392]
[653], [392]
[ 42], [647], [392]
393 Owner's extension is (extension
number)
[393]
394 Owner's extension is not assigned [394]
395 Owner's extension number is deleted [395]
396 Owner's name erased [396]
397 Owner's name is (name) [397]
398 Owner's name is deleted [398]
399 Owner's name is not recorded [399]
400 Password deleted [400]
401 Password entry failure
Check the password
[401]
402 Password is (number) [402]
403 Password not assigned [403]
404 PAUSE [404]
405 Personal greeting for caller ID
disabled
[405]
406 Personal greeting for caller ID
enabled
[406]
407 Personal greeting length is (time) [407], [454]
408 Play system prompt after personal
greeting disabled
[408]
409 Play system prompt after personal
greeting enabled
[409]
410 Please call (telephone number) [410]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
362 Installation Manual
411 Please enter your callback number [411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
412 Please enter your party's extension [412], [675]
[412], [675], [202]
[412], [674]
[412],[674],[202]
413 Please enter your party's mailbox
number
[413], [675]
[413], [675], [618]
[413], [674]
[413], [674], [618]
414 Please hold while I page your party [414]
415 Please inform system manager [508], [415]
[499], [388], [415]
416 Please leave a message at the tone [416]
417 Please wait a moment [417]
[ 49], [417]
418 PM [418]
419 POUND(#) [419]
420 Prompt mode for external message
delivery is caller select
[420]
421 Prompt mode for external message
delivery is system
[421]
422 Prompt mode for external message
delivery is user 1
[422]
423 Prompt mode for external message
delivery is user 2
[423]
424 Prompt mode is system [424]
425 Prompt mode is user 1 [425]
426 Prompt mode is user 2 [426]
427 Prompt number (number) [427]
428 Prompt restored [428]
429 PULSE DIALING MODE [429]
430 Question erased [430]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 363
431 Question number (number) [431]
432 received on (date) [304], [432], [ 17]
433 Record caller name at the tone [433]
434 Record company name at the tone [434]
435 Record greeting at the tone [435]
436 Record label at the tone [436]
437 Record menu at the tone [437]
438 Record owner's name at the tone [438]
439 Record the group name at the tone [439]
440 Record the prompt at the tone [440]
441 Record the question at the tone [441]
442 Record the recipient's name at the
tone
[442]
443 Record your name at the tone [443]
444 Recording accepted [444]
445 Returning to top menu automated
attendant service disabled
[445]
446 Returning to top menu automated
attendant service enabled
[446]
447 right away [161], [447]
448 SATURDAY [448]
449 Saved message retention time is (day) [449], [ 70]
450 Saved message retention time is
unlimited
[450]
451 SECOND [451]
452 Second telephone number is
(telephone number)
[452]
453 Second telephone number is not
assigned
[453]
454 seconds [454]
[ 14], [454]
[407], [454]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
364 Installation Manual
455 Selection Menu [455]
456 Selection menu erased [456]
457 Selection menu is (selection menu) [457]
458 Sending report now to terminal or
printer connected to RS-232C port
[458]
459 SEPTEMBER [459]
460 Set the answer length using the
following options
For 4 seconds, press 1
For 8 seconds, press 2
For 16 seconds, press 3
For 32 seconds, press 4
[460]
461 SEVEN [461]
462 SEVEN [HOUR] [462]
463 SEVEN [MINUTE] (OWE SEVEN) [463]
464 SEVENTEEN [464]
465 SEVENTEEN [HOUR] [465]
466 SEVENTEEN [MINUTE] [466]
467 SEVENTEENTH [467]
468 SEVENTH [468]
469 SEVENTY [469]
470 SEVENTY EIGHT [470]
471 SEVENTY FIVE [471]
472 SEVENTY FOUR [472]
473 SEVENTY NINE [473]
474 SEVENTY ONE [474]
475 SEVENTY SEVEN [475]
476 SEVENTY SIX [476]
477 SEVENTY THREE [477]
478 SEVENTY TWO [478]
479 SIX [479]
480 SIX [HOUR] [480]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 365
481 SIX [MINUTE] (OWE SIX) [481]
482 SIXTEEN [482]
483 SIXTEEN [HOUR] [483]
484 SIXTEEN [MINUTE] [484]
485 SIXTEENTH [485]
486 SIXTH [486]
487 SIXTY [487]
488 SIXTY EIGHT [488]
489 SIXTY FIVE [489]
490 SIXTY FOUR [490]
491 SIXTY NINE [491]
492 SIXTY ONE [492]
493 SIXTY SEVEN [493]
494 SIXTY SIX [494]
495 SIXTY THREE [495]
496 SIXTY TWO [496]
497 Sorry [497]
498 Sorry, I cannot add any more [498]
499 Sorry, I cannot call this number [499], [388], [415]
500 Sorry, mailbox in use, cannot be
deleted
[500]
501 Sorry, maximum of 20 destinations
exceeded
[501]
502 Sorry, no one is available to answer
the call
[502]
503 Sorry, no space for recording [503]
504 Sorry, Operator is not available to
answer the call
Please call back later
[504]
505 Sorry, there are no more matching
names
[505]
[505], [756]
506 Sorry, there is no space for recording [506]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
366 Installation Manual
507 Sorry, there is no space for recording
in this mailbox
[507]
508 Sorry, this function is not available [508], [415]
[508]
509 Sorry, this group is full [509], [ 2]
[509], [ 1]
510 Sorry, this line is busy [510]
511 Sorry, this list is in use for delivery If
this list is edited, all the deliveries
will then be canceled
[511]
512 Sorry, this mailbox is in use [512]
513 Sorry, this name cannot be found [513]
514 Sorry, this number is not assigned [514]
515 Sorry, this pager is not available [515]
516 Sorry, this report is not available [516]
517 Sorry, you cannot deliver the message
The maximum number of delivery
has already been reached
[517]
518 Sorry, you cannot reply [518], [538]
[518], [593]
[518], [589]
519 Sorry, you cannot transfer a private
message
[519]
520 STAR( ) [520]
521 State your comment at the tone [521], [669], [702]
522 SUNDAY [522]
523 Telephone number deleted [523]
524 Telephone number is (telephone
number)
[524]
525 Telephone number is not assigned [525]
526 TEN [526]
527 TEN [HOUR] [527]
528 TEN [MINUTE] [528]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 367
529 TENTH [529]
530 Thank you [530]
531 Thank you for calling [531]
532 The callback number is (telephone
number)
[532], [647], [392]
533 The callback number is not assigned [533], [647], [392]
534 The FAX transfer situation is as
follows
[534]
535 The first 4 letters of the owner's last
name are (name)
[535]
536 The mailbox number entry failure
Check the mailbox number
[536]
537 The message is (message) [537]
538 The message sender is unknown [518], [538]
539 The prompt is now turned off [539]
540 The system-reserved mailbox cannot
be edited
[540]
541 There are (number) [541], [ 43]
542 There are no messages [542]
543 There was 1 unsuccessful attempt to
enter this mailbox
[543]
544 There were (number of failure) [544], [809]
545 These are the brief segments of your
Message
[545]
546 THIRD [546]
547 Third telephone number is (telephone
number)
[547]
548 Third telephone number is not
assigned
[548]
549 THIRTEEN [549]
550 THIRTEEN [HOUR] [550]
551 THIRTEEN [MINUTE] [551]
552 THIRTEENTH [552]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
368 Installation Manual
553 THIRTIETH [553]
554 THIRTY [554]
555 THIRTY [MINUTE] [555]
556 THIRTY EIGHT [556]
557 THIRTY EIGHT [MINUTE] [557]
558 THIRTY FIRST [558]
559 THIRTY FIVE [559]
560 THIRTY FIVE [MINUTE] [560]
561 THIRTY FOUR [561]
562 THIRTY FOUR [MINUTE] [562]
563 THIRTY NINE [563]
564 THIRTY NINE [MINUTE] [564]
565 THIRTY ONE [565]
566 THIRTY ONE [MINUTE] [566]
567 THIRTY SEVEN [567]
568 THIRTY SEVEN [MINUTE] [568]
569 THIRTY SIX [569]
570 THIRTY SIX [MINUTE] [570]
571 THIRTY THREE [571]
572 THIRTY THREE [MINUTE] [572]
573 THIRTY TWO [573]
574 THIRTY TWO [MINUTE] [574]
575 This call is for (name) [575]
[575], [247]
576 This call is from (name) [576]
577 This caller ID number already exists [577]
578 This device is for continuous use [578]
579 This device is for scheduled use [579]
580 This device is not to be used [580]
581 This group has no members [581]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 369
582 This is a new mailbox [582]
583 This is for message manager [ 51], [583]
584 This is for system manager [ 51], [584]
585 This is the General Delivery Mailbox [585]
586 This is the last message [586]
587 This is the last prompt number [587]
588 This is your mailbox [588]
589 This is your message [518], [589]
590 This list member already exists [590]
591 This mailbox number is already
assigned
[591]
592 This message is from (name) [592], [377]
[592]
593 This message is from the general
delivery mailbox
[518], [593]
594 This message will be delivered on
(day)
[594], [ 17]
595 THREE [595]
596 THREE [HOUR] [596]
597 THREE [MINUTE] [597]
598 THURSDAY [598]
599 Time is (time) [599]
600 times [764], [600]
601 To accept the prompt, press 2 [732], [601], [678], [677]
602 To accept, press 1 [602], [213], [718], [671]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
370 Installation Manual
603 To accept, press 2 [732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[738], [603]
[647], [603]
[732], [603], [678]
[639], [603], [733]
[647], [603], [661]
[647], [603], [682]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [721]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[ 41], [647], [603]
604 To accept, press 4 [612], [660], [733], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [604]
605 To accept, press 5 [759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
606 To add group members, press 2 [626], [606]
[626], [606], [656], [731]
607 To add more caller ID numbers, press
1 To end, press 2
[607]
608 To add more digits, press 4 [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
609 To add more members, press 1
To end, press 2
[609]
610 To add new mailbox number, press 3 [755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
611 To add new member, press 1 [611]
[611], [657], [733]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 371
612 To add, press 1 [612]
[612], [660], [733]
[612], [660], [733], [604]
[612], [907], [661], [908]
613 To add, press 2 [647], [613]
614 To add, press 4 [732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
615 To answer the call, press 1
Otherwise, press 2 and hang up
[615]
616 To assign or edit mailboxes, press 1
To delete mailboxes, press 2
To reset mailbox passwords, press 3
[616]
617 To call message sender, press 1
To record a message, press 2
[617]
618 To call the operator, press 0 [274], [618]
[413], [675], [618]
[618]
[413], [674], [618]
619 To call this person, press 1 [619], [645], [756]
620 To cancel , press
To continue, press 1
[620]
621 To cancel external message delivery,
press 1
[621], [642]
622 To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I'll try your party again
[622]
623 To cancel mailing list review, press
any key
[623]
624 To cancel this message or
verification, press 3
[624]
625 To change caller ID greeting number
1, press 1 To change caller ID
greeting number 2, press 2 To change
caller ID greeting number 3, press 3
To change caller ID greeting number
4, press 4
[625]
626 To change group name, press 1 [626], [606]
[626], [606], [656], [731]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
372 Installation Manual
627 To change the answer length, press 1 [627], [748], [749], [689]
628 To change the caller name and
number, press 5
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
629 To change the department dialing
menu, press 3
To change the custom service menu,
press 4
To change the voice label, press 5
To modify the user prompt, press 6
To change the selection menu, press 7
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
[629]
630 To change the first telephone number,
press 1
To change the second telephone
number, press 2
To change the third telephone
number, press 3
[630]
631 To change the message waiting lamp
status, press 1
To change the device status, press 2
To assign the telephone or beeper
numbers, press 3
[631]
632 To change the no answer greeting,
press 1
To change the busy signal greeting,
press 2
To change the after hours greeting,
press 3
[632]
633 To change the no answer greeting,
press 1 To change the busy signal
greeting, press 2 To change the after
hours greeting, press 3 To change the
caller ID greetings, press 4
[633]
634 To change the owner's name, press 3 [637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
635 To change the password, press 1 [635], [642]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 373
636 To change the password, press 2 [641], [636], [638], [643]
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
637 To change the personal greeting,
press 1
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
638 To change the recipient's name, press
3
[641], [636], [638], [643]
639 To change the setting, press 1 [639], [603], [733]
640 To change the specified prompt, press
1
To change all prompts, press 2
[640]
641 To change the telephone number,
press 1
[641], [636], [638], [643]
642 To change the time and date, press 2 [635], [642]
[621], [642]
643 To change the time and date, press 4 [641], [636], [638], [643]
644 To change this question, press 1 [644], [748], [749], [689]
645 To change to the next person, press 2 [619], [645], [756]
646 To change user prompt 1, press 1
To change user prompt 2, press 2
[646]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
374 Installation Manual
647 To change, press 1 [647], [603]
[532], [647], [392]
[533], [647], [392]
[647], [603], [661]
[647], [603], [682]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [613]
[647], [603], [721]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[ 42], [647], [392]
[ 41], [647], [603]
[647], [750], [757]
[647], [750]
[647], [750], [911]
648 To check the mailbox distribution,
press 3
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
649 To check the mailbox distribution,
press 4
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
650 To clear all mailbox usage counts,
press 2
[751], [650]
651 To continue holding, press 1 [651], [392]
652 To customize your mailbox, press 3 [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
653 To delete all caller ID numbers, press
1
[653], [392]
654 To delete all group members, press 1 [654], [392]
655 To delete distribution verification of
this message, press 1
To cancel message delivery, press 2
[655]
656 To delete group members, press 3 [626], [606], [656], [731]
657 To delete members, press 2 [611], [657], [733]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 375
658 To delete the password, press 1 [658], [694]
659 To delete, press 1 [659], [708]
[659], [705]
[659], [694]
660 To delete, press 2 [612], [660], [733]
[612], [660], [733], [604]
661 To delete, press 3 [647], [603], [661]
[612], [907], [661], [908]
662 To deliver a broadcast message, press
1
[662], [663]
663 To deliver a message, press 2 [711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
[662], [663]
664 To deliver now, press only the hash
sign
[148], [664], [208]
665 To deliver now, press only the pound
sign
[149], [665], [208]
666 To enable call blocking, press 1
To enable call screening, press 2
To enable intercom paging, press 3
To enable beeper access, press 4
To disable all transfer service, press 5
[666]
667 To end recording, hang up
To cancel your message, press , if
you have a touch tone phone
[667]
668 To end recording, hang up or press 1
for more features
[668], [702]
669 To end recording, press 1 [669], [702]
[669]
[521], [669], [702]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
376 Installation Manual
670 To end this call, press [717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[720], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [699], [868], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
671 To enter a new name or mailbox,
press
[602], [213], [718], [671]
672 To enter another extension, press [672]
673 To enter another extension, press 2 [695], [673]
674 To enter by name, press the hash sign
and 1
[413], [674]
[413], [674], [618]
[412], [674]
[412], [674], [202]
[151], [674]
[131], [674]
675 To enter by name, press the pound
sign and 1
[413], [675]
[413], [675], [618]
[412], [675]
[412], [675], [202]
[151], [675]
[131], [675]
676 To enter your callback number, press
1
[676], [392]
677 To erase and exit, press [732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
678 To erase and try again, press 3 [732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
[732], [603], [678]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 377
679 To erase this message, press 3 [717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
680 To erase this prompt and use system
prompt, press 2
[714], [680], [757]
[714], [680], [911]
681 To erase this question, press 1 [681], [748], [749], [689]
682 To erase, press 3 [647], [603], [682]
683 To fast forward, press 6 [717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
684 To generate fax call report, press 1
To clear fax call counts, press 2
[684]
685 To generate flash memory usage
report, press 1.
To clear flash memory usage report,
press 2.
[685]
686 To generate mailbox usage report,
press 1
To clear mailbox usage counts, press
2
[686]
687 To generate port usage report, press 1
To clear port usage counts, press 2
[687]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
378 Installation Manual
688 To generate system service report,
press 1
For flash memory usage report
management, press 2
For port usage report management,
press 3
For mailbox usage report
management, press 4
To generate mailbox parameter
report, press 5
To generate call account report, press
6
To generate class of service
parameter report, press 7
To generate fax call report, press 8
[688]
689 To go directly to a question, press 4 [627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
690 To hold this call, press 2 [268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
691 To insert a beeper display command,
press 8
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
692 To insert a pause, press 5 [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
693 To insert a wait for dial tone, press 7 [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
694 To keep, press 2 [659], [694]
[658], [694]
695 To leave a message, press 1 [695]
[695], [673]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 379
696 To let the caller select prompt
language, press 4
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
697 To make this message private, press 1 [697], [392]
698 To message scan, press 8 [717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
699 To modify message, press 5 [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
700 To notify your party's beeper, press 4 [700]
701 To page your party, press 3 [701]
702 To pause and restart recording, press
2
[669], [702]
[668], [702]
[702]
[521], [669], [702]
703 To play the entire message, press 3 [723], [706], [703]
704 To play the message, press 1
To check the previous message, press
1 twice
To check the next message, press 2
[704]
705 To play the next caller ID number,
press 2
[659], [705]
706 To play the next message, press 2 [717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[723], [706], [703]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[724], [706]
[706]
707 To play the next schedule, press 2 [728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
708 To play the next, press 2 [659], [708]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
380 Installation Manual
709 To play the previous schedule, press 4 [728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
710 To reach the covering extension,
press 2
[710]
711 To receive the message, press 1 [268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
712 To record a message for external
delivery, press 1
To check external delivery message
status, press 2
To set up mailing list, press 3
[712]
713 To record a message, press 1
To add new mailbox number, press 2
To review the mailing list, press 3
[713]
714 To record a new prompt, press 1 [714], [680], [757]
[714], [680], [911]
715 To record the question, press 1
To set the answer length, press 2
To erase the question, press 3
[715]
716 To record, press 1
To erase, press 2
[716]
717 To repeat this message, press 1 [717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
718 To repeat this name, press 3 [602], [213], [718], [671]
719 To repeat this schedule, press 3 [728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 381
720 To repeat, press 1 [720], [670]
[720], [392]
721 To repeat, press 3 [647], [603], [721]
722 To replay the previous message
information, press 1
To play the next message's
information, press 2
To play the message, press 3
[722]
723 To replay the previous message, press
1
[723], [706], [703]
724 To replay the previous message, press
1 twice
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[724], [706]
[724]
725 To reply, press 2 [717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
726 To reply, press 4 [717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
727 To report all mailbox usage, press 2 [751], [727]
728 To reschedule, press 1 [728], [707], [719], [709]
729 To retrieve the call, press 2 [729]
730 To review the mailing list, press 4 [755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
731 To review this group, press 4 [626], [606], [656], [731]
732 To review, press 1 [732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
[732], [603], [678]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
382 Installation Manual
733 To review, press 3 [611], [657], [733]
[639], [603], [733]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[612], [660], [733]
[612], [660], [733], [604]
734 To rewind, press 5 [717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
735 To select caller select mode, press 1
To select without message mode,
press 2
To select before message recording
mode, press 3
To select after message recording
mode, press 4
To disable all entry modes, press 5
To accept, press 6
[735]
736 To send to 1 recipient, press 1
To send by mailing list, press 2
[736]
737 To set call transfer status, press 1
To set up covering extension, press 2
To set message reception mode, press
3
To set incomplete handling status,
press 4
[737]
738 To set delivery time or make this
message private, press 1
[738], [603]
739 To set delivery time, press 1
For immediate delivery, press 2
[739]
740 To set dial mode, press 6 [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693],
[691]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 383
741 To set leaving a message status, press
1
To set covering extension transfer
status, press 2
To set intercom paging status, press 3
To set beeper access status, press 4
To set operator transfer status, press 5
To set returning to top menu
automated attendant service status,
press 6
[741]
742 To set the clock, press 4 [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
743 To set the group distribution lists,
press 4
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
744 To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
[744]
745 To set up message waiting
notification, press 2
[745]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752],[745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
746 To skip setting the password, press
the hash sign
[120], [746]
[152], [746]
747 To skip setting the password, press
the pound sign
[120], [747]
[153], [747]
748 To skip to the next question, press 2 [627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
749 To skip to the previous question,
press 3
[627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
750 To skip, press 2 [647], [750], [757]
[647], [750]
[647], [750], [911]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
384 Installation Manual
751 To specify the mailbox range, press 1 [751], [727]
[751], [650]
752 To transfer General Delivery
Mailbox messages, press 1
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
753 To transfer this message, press 7 [717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683],
[753], [698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
754 To transfer with comment, press 2 [755], [754], [610], [730]
755 To transfer, press 1 [755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
756 To try again, press [619], [645], [756]
[505], [756]
757 To turn off the prompt, press 3 [647], [750], [757]
[714], [680], [757]
758 To use for scheduling, press 1
To use continuously, press 2
To use not at all, press 3
[758]
759 To use the system prompt, press 1 [759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
760 To use user 1 prompt, press 2 [759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
761 To use user 2 prompt, press 3 [759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
762 TONE DIALING MODE [762]
763 Total message time available per
mailbox is (time)
[763], [332]
764 Transfered (number) [764], [600]
765 Transfered 1 time [765]
766 TUESDAY [766]
767 TWELFTH [767]
768 TWELVE [768]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 385
769 TWELVE [HOUR] [769]
770 TWELVE [MINUTE] [770]
771 TWENTY [771]
772 TWENTY [HOUR] [772]
773 TWENTY [MINUTE] [773]
774 TWENTY EIGHT [774]
775 TWENTY EIGHT [MINUTE] [775]
776 TWENTY EIGHTH [776]
777 TWENTY FIFTH [777]
778 TWENTY FIRST [778]
779 TWENTY FIVE [779]
780 TWENTY FIVE [MINUTE] [780]
781 TWENTY FOUR [781]
782 TWENTY FOUR [HOUR] [782]
783 TWENTY FOUR [MINUTE] [783]
784 TWENTY FOURTH [784]
785 TWENTY NINE [785]
786 TWENTY NINE [MINUTE] [786]
787 TWENTY NINTH [787]
788 TWENTY ONE [788]
789 TWENTY ONE [HOUR] [789]
790 TWENTY ONE [MINUTE] [790]
791 TWENTY SECOND [791]
792 TWENTY SEVEN [792]
793 TWENTY SEVEN [MINUTE] [793]
794 TWENTY SEVENTH [794]
795 TWENTY SIX [795]
796 TWENTY SIX [MINUTE] [796]
797 TWENTY SIXTH [797]
798 TWENTY THIRD [798]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
386 Installation Manual
799 TWENTY THREE [799]
800 TWENTY THREE [HOUR] [800]
801 TWENTY THREE [MINUTE] [801]
802 TWENTY TWO [802]
803 TWENTY TWO [HOUR] [803]
804 TWENTY TWO [MINUTE] [804]
805 TWENTYTH [805]
806 TWO [806]
807 TWO [HOUR] [807]
808 TWO [MINUTE] [808]
809 unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
[544], [809]
810 Use call waiting on busy signal
disabled
[810]
811 Use call waiting on busy signal
enabled
[811]
812 Use the hash sign key as a wild card
character
[137], [812]
813 Use the pound sign key as a wild card
character
[137], [813]
814 Verification deleted [814]
815 was erased [157], [815], [ 24]
816 was sent on (date) [305], [816], [ 17]
817 WEDNESDAY [817]
818 Welcome to the general delivery
mailbox
[818]
819 Welcome to the Voice Processing
System
[250], [819]
[248], [819]
[249], [819]
[819]
820 When you are finished hang up, stay
on the line to confirm or change your
number
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 387
821 You can add up to (number) [821], [335]
[821], [334]
822 You can enter up to (number) [865], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
[121], [822], [ 82]
[875], [822], [ 82]
823 You can not add any more digits [823]
824 You have (number) [824], [340]
[824], [330]
[824], [164]
825 You have a call [825]
826 You have a call from (name) [826]
827 You have 1 FAX message [827]
828 You have 1 message [828]
829 You have 1 new message [829]
830 ZERO [830]
831 Break mode first operator's extension
is (extension number)
[831]
832 Break mode first operator's extension
is not assigned
[832]
833 Break mode second operator's
extension is (extension number)
[833]
834 Break mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[834]
835 Break mode third operator's
extension is (extension number)
[835]
836 Break mode third operator's
extension is not assigned
[836]
837 Lunch mode first operator's extension
is (extension number)
[837]
838 Lunch mode first operator's extension
is not assigned
[838]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
388 Installation Manual
839 Lunch mode second operator's
extension is (extension number)
[839]
840 Lunch mode second operator's
extension is not assigned
[840]
841 Lunch mode third operator's
extension is (extension number)
[841]
842 Lunch mode third operator's
extension is not assigned
[842]
843 To change the company greeting,
press 1
To change the company name, press 2
To change the department dialing
menu, press 3
To change the custom service menu,
press 4
To change the voice label, press 5
To modify the user prompt, press 6
To change the selection menu, press 7
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
[843]
844 Enter a class of service number from
1 to 62
[844]
845 THOUSAND [845]
846 Enter a message length from 1 to 6
minutes or 0 for unlimited length
[846]
847 Enter the total message time available
per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes or 0 for unlimited time
[847]
848 To set station call forwarding, press 4 [848]
849 To forward all calls, press 1 [849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
850 To forward busy calls, press 2 [849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
851 To forward no answer calls, press 3 [849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 389
852 To forward busy or no answer calls,
press 4
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
853 To forward to a CO line, press 5 [849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
854 To cancel call forwarding, press 6 [849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
855 Enter the destination extension
number for forwarding
[855]
856 Your extension is call forwarded all
calls to extension (extension number)
[856]
857 Your extension is call forwarded busy
calls to extension (extension number)
[857]
858 Your extension is call forwarded no
answer calls to extension (extension
number)
[858]
859 Your extension is call forwarded busy
or no answer calls to extension
(extension number)
[859]
860 Call forwarding accepted [860]
861 Call forwarding not accepted
Please check the destination number
[861]
862 To forward to your Telephone
number 1, press 1
[862]
863 To forward to your Telephone
number 2, press 2
[863]
864 To forward to the other number, press
3
[864]
865 Enter the destination telephone
number for forwarding
[865], [822], [ 82]
866 Your extension is call forwarded to
telephone number (telephone
number)
[866]
867 Call forwarding is cancelled [867]
868 To set station call forwarding, press 6 [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
869 To change Remote Call Forwarding
to CO setting, press 6
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
390 Installation Manual
870 To change Telephone number 1, press
1
To change Telephone number 2, press
2
[870]
871 Telephone number 1 is not assigned [871]
872 Telephone number 1 is (telephone
number)
[872]
873 Telephone number 2 is not assigned [873]
874 Telephone number 2 is (telephone
number)
[874]
875 Enter the telephone number [875], [822], [ 82]
876 Telephone number 1 for Remote Call
Forward to CO is not assigned
[876]
877 Telephone number 1 for Remote Call
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
[877]
878 Telephone number 2 for Remote Call
Forward to CO is not assigned
[878]
879 Telephone number 2 for Remote Call
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
[879]
880 Message length is unlimited [880]
881 Total message time available per
mailbox is unlimited
[881]
882 Remote Call Forward to CO disabled [882]
883 Remote Call Forward to CO enabled [883]
884 Delete message confirmation
disabled
[884]
885 Delete message confirmation enabled [885]
886 To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting, press
4
To change company greeting setting,
press 5
[886]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 391
887 To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting, press
4
[887]
888 For port setting, press 1
For trunk setting, press 2
[888]
889 Enter the port number [889], [890]
890 from 1 to (number) [889], [890]
[892], [890]
891 Port number is (number) [891]
892 Enter the trunk group number [892], [890]
893 Trunk group number is (number) [893]
894 For Day time, press 1
For Night time, press 2
For Lunch time, press 3
For Break time, press 4
[894]
895 Current company greeting setting is
number (number)
[895]
896 Current company greeting setting is
System Greeting
[896]
897 Current company greeting setting is
disabled
[897]
898 To change company greeting number,
press 1
To set system greeting, press 2
To disable, press 3
[898]
899 If you really want to erase, press 1
If not, press 2
[899]
900 To set Automatic mode, press 1
To set Manual Day mode, press 2
To set Manual Night mode, press 3
To set Manual Lunch mode, press 4
To set Manual Break mode, press 5
To set PBX Control mode, press 6
[900]
901 Current service mode is Automatic
mode
[901]
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
392 Installation Manual
[Linked Prompts List]
Subscriber Service
902 Current service mode is Manual Day
mode
[902]
903 Current service mode is Manual
Night mode
[903]
904 Current service mode is Manual
Lunch mode
[904]
905 Current service mode is Manual
Break mode
[905]
906 Current service mode is PBX Control
mode
[906]
907 To change, press 2 [612], [907], [661], [908]
908 To review, press 4 [612], [907], [661], [908]
909 To change caller ID number, press 1
To change caller name, press 2
To accept, press 3
[909]
910 All caller ID numbers deleted [910]
911 To turn on the prompt, press 3 [647], [750], [911]
[714], [680], [911]
912 The prompt is now turned on [912]
913 Enter a message retention time up to
30 days or 0 for unlimited days
[913]
914 Enter a group number from 1 to 17 [914]
Table 84
[824] You have (number) [544] There were (number of failure)
[338] new message [809] unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
Table 83
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts Linked to Prompt No. (s)
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
Installation Manual 393
Receive Message
Message Scan
Message Delivery
Personal Group Distribution List
Check Mailbox Distribution
Table 85
[317] Message recorded by (mailbox number) [325] Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[ 13] and transferred via (mailbox number) [ 12] and (mailbox number)
[ 12] and (mailbox number)
[318] Message recorded on (date) [824] You have (number)
[ 17] at (time) [330] Messages
Table 86
[305] Message from (name)
[816] was sent on (date)
[ 17] at (time)
Table 87
[594] This message will be delivered on (day)
[ 17] at (time)
Table 88
[821] You can add up to (number)
[335] more members
Table 89
[304] Message for (name) [323] Message sent on (date)
[432] received on (date) [ 17] at (time)
[ 17] at (time) [197] for (mailbox number)
[197] for (mailbox number) [258] has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[259] has not been received
MESSAGE MANAGER'S GUIDE
394 Installation Manual
External Message Delivery
Message Waiting Notification
Interview Mailbox Management
Fax Management
Table 90
[158] External delivery message scheduled for
(name)
[592] This message is from (name)
[379] on (date) [377] of (company name)
[ 17] at (time) [157] External delivery message for (name)
[161] External delivery message will be sent to
(name)
[815] was erased
[447] right away [ 24] because message retention time expired
[324] Message to (name) [272] I'll redial (number)
[ 31] being delivered now [337] more times
Table 91
[411] Please enter your callback number [411] Please enter your callback number
[822] You can enter up to (number) [822] You can enter up to (number)
[ 82] digits [ 82] digits
[820] When you are finished hang up, stay on
the line to confirm or change your
number
[575] This call is for (name)
[247] from (name)
Table 92
[ 14] Answer length is (number)
[454] seconds
Table 93
[824] You have (number) [764] Transferred (number)
[164] FAX messages [600] times
Glossary
Installation Manual 395
Glossary
Alternate Extension Group
Transfers the call coming into the extensions in this group following the sequence specified
by "Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence".
APT Integration
Digital Integration between the KX-TA624 and the VPS.
Auto Configuration
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS can automatically draw information
from the KX-TA624, the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TA1232, the KX-TD308
or the KX-TD500. This information includes, among other things, extension number
assignments for each VPS port. This saves time in the initial setup. Auto Configuration can
be executed by DIP Switch settings or by System Administration (Quick Setup).
Auto Forwarding
Allows unretrieved messages to be copied or moved to another mailbox.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant feature of the VPS requests the caller to enter an extension
number and then the VPS dials the number. If there is no answer or the line is busy, the
caller is given some options, including the option to leave a message in a mailbox. This is
the advantage of calling an extension indirectly through the Automated Attendant rather
than calling it directly.
Call Blocking
Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the
subscriber's extension.
Call Screening
Allows subscribers to screen calls. The VPS prompts the caller with the message "Record
your name at the tone", and records the caller's name; it then puts the caller on hold while
playing the name to the subscriber who decides whether to take the call or not.
Call Transfer
Transfers a call to the requested destination.
Glossary
396 Installation Manual
Called Party ID
(Sometimes referred to as Follow-On ID) Allows the PBX to dial extra digits to bring the
caller directly to a specified mailbox, rather than to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Caller ID Call Routing
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS automatically sends calls from pre-
assigned Caller ID numbers to the desired extension, mailbox (including System Group
Distribution List) or Custom Service.
Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal)
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS announces prerecorded Caller ID
callers' names when: (1) extension users listen to messages from pre-assigned numbers left
in the users' mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls from pre-assigned numbers to the users
(Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the users by intercom (Intercom Paging).
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name
announcements, the VPS will use the personal caller name.
Company Greeting
Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet callers. One (or System Greeting or
none) can be selected for each Day, Night, Lunch, Break, and Holiday service on a port
basis and trunk (CO line) basis.
Company Name
This is played by the VPS to the intended receiver of an External Delivery Message when
he is unable to enter correctly the password (if required). This helps him to realize where
the call came from.
Covering Extension
This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service. This can also be accessed
by pressing [0] while a Personal Greeting is being played, or while a caller is leaving a
message.
Custom Service Setting
Allows one-touch access to extensions, other custom service menus, fax machine,
mailboxes, etc. A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal
directions to the non-subscribers.
Default Setting
A parameter defined for the system at the factory which can be changed through system
programming by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Glossary
Installation Manual 397
Delayed Ringing
There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications:
(1) The VPS is used as the no-answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature of your
PBX.
(2) DIL 1:N (CO line to several extensions) terminates on telephones and VPS ports. To
give the telephone users a chance to answer calls, the VPS lines should be programmed for
delayed ringing. Otherwise, the VPS will answer the calls immediately.
Delete Message Confirmation
The VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before erasing a message left in
the mailbox.
Delivery Time
The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a prerecorded message. You can
specify delivery time in External Delivery Message or when delivering a message to other
subscribers (Subscriber's Guide Section 3.1)
Department Dialing
A speed-dialing feature that permits an outside caller to dial a single digit (1-9) to reach a
specific extension.
Direct Mailbox Access
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can enter his mailbox directly
when he calls the VPS from his extension. He does not have to enter any special codes
except for his password, if one is established.
DPT Integration
Digital integration between the VPS and the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232, the KX-
TA1232, the KX-TD308 or the KX-TD500. Requires upgraded software in the PBX.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may not
be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
DTMF
(Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Commonly referred to as touchtone.
External Call Forwarding
(Available on the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TA1232, the KX-TD308 and the
KX-TD500.) Forwards calls to an extension that has call forwarding activated to an outside
phone.
Glossary
398 Installation Manual
External Delivery Message
A message intended for automatic delivery to outside parties and/or extensions.
The message can be delivered immediately or at a specified time.
External Message Delivery List
Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to outside parties. Each list can
have 8 destinations.
External Message Delivery Redial
Allows the System Administrator to instruct the VPS when making external message
deliveries how many attempts to make when the line is busy or when there is no answer.
Fast Forward
Puts the user 4 s ahead in the current message.
Follow-On ID
See Called Party ID.
General Delivery Mailbox
When the caller does not dial anything (either because he does not want to or he is using a
rotary telephone), the VPS sends him to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Periodically (daily is best), the Message Manager should transfer the contents of the
General Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations.
Hash Sign
Same as Pound Sign.
HELP
One of the utility commands that is used to list all utility commands with a brief description
of each.
Immediate Reply
Allows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the extension number
or the mailbox number of the sender.
Inband Signaling
The Follow-On ID (or Called Party ID) that integrates the VPS and the PBX. Uses intercom
paths to light message wait light. Does not give "high end" features such as: Intercom
Paging, Direct Mailbox Access, Live Call Screening, etc.
Glossary
Installation Manual 399
Incomplete Call Handling Service
Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy.
There are 6 options for the Incomplete Call Handling Service:
(1) to record a message from the caller,
(2) transfer the caller to a covering extension,
(3) page the mailbox owner via the PBX,
(4) notify the mailbox owner via beeper,
(5) transfer the caller to the operator, or
(6) let the caller try another extension.
Integration
Required between the VPS and the PBX. See Inband Signaling, APT Integration and DPT
Integration.
Intercept Routing No Answer
Transfers an unanswered call to another extension or to the VPS.
(This is a PBX feature.)
Intercom Paging
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows up to 16 different paging groups. An
outside party can reach a subscriber who is away from her telephone using either internal
or external page groups. For a Caller ID caller, if her name has been recorded for the Caller
Name Announcement feature, the name will be announced at the end of the page.
Interview Service
A special type of subscriber mailbox that enables the subscriber to record up to 10
questions. After the answers are recorded, the Message Waiting Lamp turns on at the
subscriber's telephone. (Good for claims departments, order desks, job applications, etc.)
Keypad
All touchtone keys on the telephone.
LCD
Liquid crystal display
Live Call Screening
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The proprietary telephone works like an
answering machine. The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone or the
handset while the message is being recorded.
LOAD
One of the utility commands that is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from a
personal computer.
Glossary
400 Installation Manual
Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)
An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox. This feature is used by
subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone.
Mailbox Capacity (messages)
The number of messages that can be recorded in a subscriber's mailbox: should be set
between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Mailbox Capacity (recording time)
The total length of time for messages in a subscriber's mailbox: should be set between 5 and
100 min or unlimited length by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Mailbox Extension
Normally the same number as the telephone extension number.
Mailbox Management
Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes.
Menu
A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or the keys
from a personal computer.
Message Manager
(Mailbox 98, 998, 9998, or 99998) The person who takes care of the General Delivery
Mailbox and records: the Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialing Menu,
Custom Service Menus, Voice Labels, User Prompts (User 1/User 2), Multilingual
Selection Menu, and System Caller Names.
Message Retention Time
New Message Retention Time—the length of time the VPS will store a new (unplayed)
message before deleting the message.
Saved Message Retention Time—the length of time the VPS will store an old (played)
message before deleting the message.
Message Retrieval Order
The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages: Last In First Out (LIFO) or First In
First Out (FIFO).
Message Transfer
Allows a subscriber to reroute a message to another mailbox unless the message was
marked "private". Additional comments can be added to this message.
Glossary
Installation Manual 401
Message Waiting Lamp
Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox.
Message Waiting Notification
The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have received
messages (if authorized by the System Administrator or the System Manager). There are 3
notification methods: (1) by the Message Waiting Lamp, (2) by a telephone, or (3) by a
beeper.
Multilingual Selection Menu
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this menu. Allows callers to choose the
language they want (System, User 1 or User 2 prompts) when they call the VPS.
Non-Subscriber
A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox.
Notification Method
(See Message Waiting Notification.)
Operator
Up to three destinations can be assigned as operators. This is the extension that receives
calls when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials [0].
Owner's Name
After a subscriber records his name, the VPS announces his name during transfers,
Intercom Paging, and confirmation of Dialing by Name.
Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator. This allows
callers to dial parties by name (Dialing by Name) rather than by number. For example, a
caller can dial "S-M-I-T" (Smith) rather than Smith's mailbox number, which can be hard
to remember.
Password
A combination of numbers selected by the subscriber to protect access to his mailbox. If
forgotten, the System Administrator or System Manager can clear it so that the subscriber
can select a new password.
Personal Greetings
A subscriber can record messages to greet callers. There are 3 kinds of Personal Greetings:
(1) No Answer Greeting
(2) Busy Signal Greeting
(3) After Hours Greeting
Glossary
402 Installation Manual
Personal Greeting for Caller ID
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can record up to 4 personal
greeting messages for calls from pre-assigned Caller ID numbers. Each greeting supports
up to 8 Caller ID numbers.
Personal Group Distribution List
A subscriber can maintain up to 4 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20
mailboxes. Using this list, he can send the same message to all members of a specific
distribution list at once.
Port
The point of connection between the PBX and the VPS.
Pound Sign
The [#] key on the telephone keypad.
Private Message
A message recorded as a private message cannot be forwarded. You can specify privacy
when delivering a message to other subscribers (Subscriber's Guide Section 3.1).
Prompt
Prerecorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non-subscribers through specific
VPS functions. The VPS supports 3 prompts: (1) System prompts (prerecorded at the
factory in English), (2) User 1 prompts*, and (3) User 2 prompts*.
Prompts are numbered; the Message Manager can turn off and on the prompts individually.
*: freely recorded by the Message Manager
Remote Call Forward to CO
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Allows the System Administrator to program
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 as the destination to which the callers are
forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside (CO) line. This feature
must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilized. See Remote Call
Forwarding Set.
Glossary
Installation Manual 403
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(Available with DPT Integration only.) A subscriber and the Message Manager can
program his extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired
extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
(1) Forward All Calls
(2) Forward Busy Calls
(3) Forward No Answer Calls
(4) Forward Busy or No Answer Calls
(5) Forward to a CO Line
(6) Forward Cancel.
See Remote Call Forward to CO.
Review
Plays back a message.
Rewind
Replays the last 4 s of a message.
Rotary Telephone
A telephone capable of pulse dial only. Callers using a rotary telephone will be
automatically forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox.
SAVE
One of the utility commands that is used to save VPS data to a personal computer.
Scanning Messages
Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message. Another method is to
press [2] while listening to a message; this instructs the VPS to skip to the next message.
Service Mode
The System Administrator or the System Manager can change the call handling method
programmed in the Time Service setting.
Station Programming
Programming via the proprietary telephone.
Subscriber
A person who has an assigned mailbox.
Glossary
404 Installation Manual
System Administration
System programming can be performed via 2 ways: (1) Locally (personal computer
connected directly to the RS-232C port of the VPS), or (2) remotely (personal computer
connected via the telephone network and the external modem of the VPS).
Note: Local programming and remote programming are mutually exclusive.
System Administrator
Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager, who use a telephone to perform
their duties, the System Administrator uses a personal computer to program the VPS. The
System Administrator’s handbook is the Installation Manual.
System External Message Delivery Duration Time
The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the VPS,
specified by the System Administrator.
System Group Distribution List
The VPS can maintain up to 20 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20
mailboxes. Each list is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and is
assigned via system administration. A recording into a System Group Distribution List
number will go into the mailboxes of all group members.
System Manager
(Mailbox 99, 999, 9999, or 99999) The person who can perform very basic and limited
system programming using a telephone. He can create/delete mailboxes, clear subscriber
passwords when they are forgotten, set Class of Service parameters, set the System Clock,
and generate System Reports.
System Report
The System Administrator or System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to monitor
the VPS operating status as required.
TIME
One of the utility commands that is used to confirm or set the time and date of the VPS.
Time Synchronization
(Available with DPT Integration only.) When the PBX sets a new date and time or when
DPT Integration is established, the data is sent from the PBX to the VPS.
Two-Way Recording
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation
into his mailbox.
Glossary
Installation Manual 405
Two-Way Transfer
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation
into another person's mailbox.
Unlimited Message Length
Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way conversations of unlimited length into his or
another person's mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The maximum
recording time for other messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Voice Mail
A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to another.
Voice Prompt
Recorded VPS instructions to callers. These are either system prompts or user prompts.
VPS
Voice Processing System (e.g., Panasonic KX-TVS90).
Glossary
406 Installation Manual
INDEX
407
INDEX
INDEX
408
A
Alternate extension group 190
APT integration 20, 71, 190
Auto configuration 191
Auto forwarding 191
Automated attendant 191
B
Broadcasting messages 191
Busy coverage mode 192
C
Call services 192
Call Transfer No Answer Time 131, 275
Call transfer status 192
Callback number entry 193
Callback Telephone Number 278
Caller ID call routing 193
Caller ID screening 193
Caller name announcement—personal 194
Caller name announcement—system 194
Calling a beeper 195
Class of service (COS) 196
Company greeting 149, 196, 311
Company name 196
Connections—PBX 33
Covering extension 197
Custom service 197
D
Data—loading new or saved data to the VPS
(LOAD) 166
Data—saving the system data to the backup device
(SAVE) 153, 164
Daylight saving time assignment 197
Delete message confirmation 197
Department dialing 198
Dialing by name 198
Digital integration 20, 23, 71
DIP switch 18, 31, 79, 85, 90, 98
Direct mailbox access 198
DPT integration 20, 71, 199
E
Extension group 199
Extension numbering plan 199
External message delivery list 199
External message delivery service 200
External message delivery status 200
F
Fax management 201
G
Group distribution list—personal 201
Group distribution list—system 201
H
Hardware settings 44, 285
Hold 201
Holiday service 202
I
Inband Integration 202
Incomplete call handling service 202
Initializing the system 156
Intercom paging 203
Interview service 204
L
Live Call Screening 205
LOAD 166
Logical extension 206
M
Mailbox 206
Message delivery status 207
Message delivery, internal 206
Message management 16, 148
Message manager's guide 321
Message manager's mailbox-recording company
name 149
Message reception mode 207
Message scan 207
Message transfer 208
Message waiting notification—device 208
Message waiting notification—lamp 209
Multilingual service 209
N
No answer coverage mode 210
O
Operator service 210
P
Password administration 210
PBX Integration 210
Personal greeting for Caller ID 211
Personal greetings 211
Play system prompt after personal greeting 212
Port service 212
Private message 212
INDEX
409
Q
Quick setup 114, 115, 172
R
Receive message 212
Remote Call Forwarding Set 213, 337
Rotary telephone service 214
RS-232C parameters 285
S
SAVE 153, 164
Service access commands 214
Service mode 214, 309
Special feature authorization 215
Specifications—outline 21
Specifications—VPS 188
Subscriber service prompt selection 234
System administration 16
System administrator's guide 219
System clock 215, 307
System components 17
System management 16
System manager's guide 295
System reports 215
T
Time service 216
Time synchronization 216
Troubleshooting 184
Trunk service 216
Twenty-four-hour time stamp 271
Two-Way Recording 216
Two-Way Transfer 217
U
Unlimited message length 217
Utility commands 217
V
Voice mail service 217
Voice prompts 218
Printed in Japan PSQX2722ZA
KK0702YK0
c
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). You may print out this
manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual
in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee.
2002 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Panasonic Consumer Electronics
Company, Division of Matsushita
Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus,
New Jersey 07094
www.panasonic.com
Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”)
Division of Matsushita Electric of
Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5,
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,
Puerto Rico 00985

Navigation menu